Agrotron 120-130-150-150.7-165.7

INSTRUCTION BOOK
Head offices
Deutz-Fahr Strasse, 1
D-89415 Lauingen
Tel. (09072) 997-0
www.deutz-fahr.de
Copertina.pmd 1 20/12/2004, 10.22

Tractor Type/Model: ..............................
Tractor Identification (Chassis) No.:..............................
Engine Serial No.: ..............................
Transmission Serial No.: ..............................
Front Axle Serial No.: ..............................
The specifications and illustrations contained in this instruction book refer to

the status as valid on the date of printing stated below.
When concluding a contract, the binding scope of supply is generally
determined on the basis of the price list valid at that time.
We reserve the right to change engineering details, scope of equipment
and shape of the tractor contrary to the descriptions and illustrations in this
booklet.
Claims based on the representations in this booklet are excluded.
Also this instruction book is subject to change by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
DEUTSCHLAND GmbH.
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

D - 89415 Lauingen
1st edition 12/2004
Retrocopertina.pmd 1 20/12/2004, 10.22

Tractor Type/Model: ..............................
Tractor Identification (Chassis) No.:..............................
Engine Serial No.: ..............................
Transmission Serial No.: ..............................
Front Axle Serial No.: ..............................
The specifications and illustrations contained in this instruction book refer to

the status as valid on the date of printing stated below.
When concluding a contract, the binding scope of supply is generally
determined on the basis of the price list valid at that time.
We reserve the right to change engineering details, scope of equipment
and shape of the tractor contrary to the descriptions and illustrations in this
booklet.
Claims based on the representations in this booklet are excluded.
Also this instruction book is subject to change by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
DEUTSCHLAND GmbH.

D - 89415 Lauingen
1st edition 12/2004
Retrocopertina.pmd 1 22/02/2005, 9.32

CHAPTER 0 Table of contents
II
Sezione 0.pmd 2 20/12/2004, 10.22

Chapter 0 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 0 - Table of contents and Presentation ......... I - XXVI
Chapter 1 - Safety ................................................ XXVII - LXX
Chapter 2 - Tractor identification ...................... LXXI - LXXXII
Chapter 3 - Use .......................................................... 1 - 138
Chapter 4 - Wheels ................................................139 - 168
Chapter 5 - Maintenance .......................................169 - 218
Chapter 6 - Electrical system ..................................219 - 234
Chapter 7 - Storage of the tractor .........................235 - 238
Chapter 8 - Technical specifications .......................239 - 250
Chapter 9 - Fault diagnosis ....................................251 - 260
n
CAUTION: BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATIONS, READ THE
INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL. FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS
CAREFULLY DURING OPERATION OF THE TRACTOR. avv001gb
III
Sezione 0.pmd 3 20/12/2004, 16.52

Table of contents
Chapter 0 - Table of contents and Presentation ............................ I

Tractor serial numbers .............................................................................. I
Table of chapter ..................................................................................... III
Table of contents .................................................................................... IV
Conformity declaration ......................................................................... XVI
Presentation of Models ........................................................................ XVII
Pre-delivery operations to be done in the workshop ........................... XVIII
Delivering the tractor to the customer ................................................ XVIII
CE ......................................................................................................... XX
EMV supplement sheet ......................................................................... XXI
Scope of equipment ............................................................................ XXII
Case for instruction booklet ................................................................. XXII
Introduction ........................................................................................ XXIII
Pre-delivery, Installation on the Farm and Warranty ............................ XXIV
EU Declaration of Conformity ............................................................. XXVI
Chapter 1 - SAFETY ..................................................................... XXVII

Safety Alert Symbol and Terms ........................................................ XXVIII
Introduction to Safety ......................................................................... XXIX
Safety ................................................................................................ XXIX
- A Word to the Operator ................................................................ XXIX
Danger, Warning, Caution .................................................................. XXIX
Decals ................................................................................................. XXX
Follow a Safety Programme ............................................................... XXXI
General safety rules ........................................................................... XXXI
Protective Structures ........................................................................ XXXVII
- Roll Over Protective Structures ................................................... XXXVII
- Operation .................................................................................. XXXVII
Damage to the ROPS ..................................................................... XXXVIII
Cab ................................................................................................ XXXVIII
Prepare for Safe Operation .............................................................. XXXIX
- Protect Yourself ........................................................................... XXXIX
- Risks from exposure to noise ....................................................... XXXIX
- Know Your Equipment ...................................................................... XL
- Use all Available Protective and Safety Devices ............................... XL
- Check the Equipment ..................................................................... XLI
- Clean the Tractor ........................................................................... XLIII
- Protect the Environment ................................................................. XLIII
Servicing the Tractor ........................................................................... XLIV
Starting .............................................................................................. XLIV
- Warn Personnel before Starting ..................................................... XLIV
- Mount and Dismount Safely .......................................................... XLV
- Start Safely .................................................................................... XLV
- Follow Recommended Starting Procedures ..................................... XLVI
IV
Sezione 0.pmd 4 20/12/2004, 10.22

- Test the Controls ........................................................................... XLVI
- Starting Fluid ................................................................................. XLVI
- Work Safely .................................................................................. XLVII
- Making the Right Moves ............................................................... XLVII
- Follow Safe Operating Practices .................................................... XLVII
- Watch out for Others ................................................................... XLVIII
- Risk of Overturning ............................................................................ L
- To Avoid Side Overturns .................................................................... L
- To Avoid Rear Overturns ................................................................... LI
- General Operating Hazards ............................................................. LII
- Implements and Attachments .......................................................... LIII
- Safety - Towing .............................................................................. LIV
Road Transport ...................................................................................... LV
- Rules of the Road ............................................................................ LV
- After Operation .............................................................................. LVII
- Welding work on the tractor body ................................................... LVII
Illustrations of safety decals ................................................................. LVIII
Chapter 2 – Tractor identification ............................................... LXXI

Original replacement parts ................................................................. LXXII
- Tractor nameplate ........................................................................ LXXIII
- Engine Serial Number ................................................................ LXXIV
- Gearbox Nameplate ................................................................... LXXIV
- Front Axle Nameplate ................................................................ LXXIV
Warning triangle * ............................................................................. LXXV
First-aid box * .................................................................................... LXXV
Mounting the numberplate ................................................................ LXXV
Routine checks ................................................................................. LXXVI
- Fuel tank supply ......................................................................... LXXVI
- Engine oil level ........................................................................... LXXVI
- Screen wash system ................................................................... LXXVI
- Coolant ...................................................................................... LXXVII
- Tires and Wheels ........................................................................ LXXVII
- Air brake system * ...................................................................... LXXVII
- Lighting ...................................................................................... LXXVII
- Trailer hitch assemblies ............................................................... LXXVII
International symbols (Part. 1) ......................................................... LXXVIII
International symbols (Part. 2) .......................................................... LXXIX
International symbols (Part. 3) ........................................................... LXXX
Metric conversion .............................................................................. LXXXI
Conversion tables ............................................................................ LXXXII
Chapter 3 - Use ................................................................................. 1

Ignition key ............................................................................................. 3
- Unlocking the door * .......................................................................... 3
- Children’s guard * .............................................................................. 3
Sezione 0.pmd 5 20/12/2004, 10.22

Driver’s seat ............................................................................................ 4
- Driver’s seat ...................................................................................... 6
- Seat adjustment functions ................................................................. 6
Steering wheel adjustments * .................................................................. 7
- Adjusting the height .......................................................................... 7
- Adjusting the tilt ................................................................................ 7
Adjustable multi-function arm rest * ........................................................ 8
Ignition lock ............................................................................................. 9
Seat belts * ............................................................................................. 9
Survey - in-cab controls ......................................................................... 11
Survey - instrument console .................................................................. 13
INFOCENTER 2 ...................................................................................... 14
INFOCENTER 3 * ................................................................................... 15
- Fuel level in tank ............................................................................. 16
- Engine temperature ......................................................................... 16
- Engine speed ................................................................................... 17
- Hours in operation ........................................................................... 17
- Front P.T.O. speed * .......................................................................... 18
- Rear P.T.O. speed ............................................................................. 18
- Ground speed ................................................................................. 19
- Wheel slip * ..................................................................................... 19
Calibrating the ground speed ................................................................ 20
Warning and servicing display * ............................................................. 21
Survey - Warning and pilot lights ........................................................... 23
- Green function display ..................................................................... 23
- Blue function displays ...................................................................... 23
- Yellow displays ................................................................................. 23
- Red warning lights ........................................................................... 23
- Turn signal pilot light ....................................................................... 24
- High beam pilot light ....................................................................... 24
- 4-WD pilot light ............................................................................... 25
- Differential lock pilot light ................................................................ 25
- Shifting range pilot light .................................................................. 25
- Charge warning light ....................................................................... 26
- Engine oil pressure pilot light ........................................................... 26
- Gearbox oil pressure pilot light POWERSHIFT ................................... 26
- Electronic engine speed ................................................................... 27
- Preheating pilot light ....................................................................... 27
- Parking brake warning light ............................................................. 28
- Parking brake warning light * ........................................................... 28
- Inadequacy oil pressure in the idraulic sterring system
warning light .................................................................................. 28
- P.T.O. shaft pilot lights ...................................................................... 29
- Dry-type air filter pilot light ............................................................. 29
- Pressure test in the engine hydraulic circuit supply
system warning light ...................................................................... 29
- P.T.O. shaft speeds ........................................................................... 30
- Air pressure gauge for air brake system * ........................................ 30
VI
Sezione 0.pmd 6 20/12/2004, 10.22

Multi-purpose switch lever ..................................................................... 31
- Without automatic resetting ............................................................. 31
- With automatic resetting * ............................................................... 31
- Hazard warning lights ...................................................................... 32
Control switches located on left of dashboard under the
steering wheel ..................................................................................... 33
Suspended front axle * .......................................................................... 34
ASM * .................................................................................................... 35
- Front axle drive ................................................................................ 36
- Differential lock ............................................................................... 36
ASM * Driveline Management ............................................................... 37
- ASM - Four wheel drive ................................................................... 38
- ASM - Differential lock ..................................................................... 39
Switchs on right side for additional electric devices ................................ 40
- Rotary flashlight * ............................................................................ 40
- Rear screen wiper * .......................................................................... 40
- Worklights, rear * ............................................................................. 41
- Automatic P.T.O. ............................................................................... 41
- Service brake - steering brake ......................................................... 42
- Main clutch ...................................................................................... 42
- Accelerator pedal ............................................................................. 43
- Manual throttle ................................................................................ 43
Actuating elements right ....................................................................... 44
Transmission gear shifting with PowerShuttle ......................................... 45
- Commutator switch F–N–R .............................................................. 46
Powershift Display ................................................................................. 47
- Acoustical warning signal ................................................................. 47
- Failure code display ......................................................................... 47
- POWERSHIFT display ........................................................................ 48
- Creeper range ................................................................................. 49
- Standby driving program* ................................................................ 50
Failure indications ................................................................................. 51
- Acoustical warning signal ................................................................. 51
- Failure indications ............................................................................ 51
- Failure codes ................................................................................... 51
Meaning of the failure code numbers in the POWERSHIFT display ........ 52
Electronic engine speed controller .......................................................... 54
- Pilot light EMR .................................................................................. 54
- Failure indications ............................................................................ 54
- Functional description ...................................................................... 55
- Storing and recalling the upper speed ............................................. 55
- Storing and recalling the lower speed .............................................. 56
- Changing over between MIN and MAX stored speeds ..................... 56
- Speed over-control .......................................................................... 56
- Actual speed storing ........................................................................ 56
P.T.O. control .......................................................................................... 57
- Activation front and rear P.T.O. ......................................................... 57
- Rear P.T.O. clutch control .................................................................. 57
VII
Sezione 0.pmd 7 20/12/2004, 10.22

- External operation of rear P.T.O. ....................................................... 58
- Rear power take-off shaft selector lever .......................................... 59
Checks before start-up .......................................................................... 60
Refuelling .............................................................................................. 60
Rear view mirrors* ................................................................................. 60
Starting the engine ............................................................................... 61
- Ignition lock ..................................................................................... 61
- Warning and servicing display * ........................................................ 61
Starting the tractor ................................................................................ 63
- Starting with clutch .......................................................................... 63
- Starting without clutch ..................................................................... 64
Changing the driving direction .............................................................. 65
- Changing the driving direction with clutch ....................................... 65
- Changing the driving direction without clutch .................................. 65
Stopping the tractor .............................................................................. 66
- Stopping the Motor .......................................................................... 66
- Check parking brake ........................................................................ 66
Leaving and securing the tractor ............................................................ 67
Wheel chock .......................................................................................... 67
P.T.O. shaft operation ............................................................................ 68
- Starting work with the P.T.O. ............................................................ 69
- To prevent damage ......................................................................... 69
- Length of the universal joint shaft ................................................... 69
- Changing the P.T.O. stubs ................................................................ 70
- External operation of rear P.T.O. ....................................................... 71
Electronic lift * ....................................................................................... 72
- Function electronic lift * ................................................................... 72
- Main control lever ............................................................................ 72
- Activation ........................................................................................ 72
Rear lift controls .................................................................................... 73
- Control type selector ....................................................................... 74
- 100 % Draft control ......................................................................... 74
- Draft/position intermix ..................................................................... 75
- Position control ................................................................................ 75
- LEDs ................................................................................................ 75
- Lowering speed control .................................................................... 76
- Maximum lift height control ............................................................. 76
- Maximum working depth control ...................................................... 76
- Lift height control ............................................................................ 77
- Remote control ................................................................................ 77
- Flow controls for hydraulic control valves * ....................................... 78
- Wheel slip control * .......................................................................... 78
- External remote control * ................................................................. 79
Remote valves ...................................................................................... 80
- Survey ............................................................................................. 81
- Oil feed control ............................................................................... 83
- Remote couplers .............................................................................. 83
- Load-Sensing System * .................................................................... 84
VIII
Sezione 0.pmd 8 20/12/2004, 10.22

- External connection (POWERBEYOND)* ............................................ 85
- Hydraulic control valve levers ........................................................... 86
- Remote connections ........................................................................ 86
- Locking remote valves ..................................................................... 87
- Hydraulic control valve levers ........................................................... 87
Cross shifting lever ................................................................................ 88
- Operating the cross shifting lever .................................................... 88
- Parallel operation ............................................................................ 89
- Floating position with the cross shifting facility in use ....................... 90
- Permanent consumers ..................................................................... 91
- Hydraulic trailer brake * ................................................................... 92
- Instrument introduction flap ............................................................. 92
Combination of tractor and mounted implement .................................. 93
- Consideration of rear mounted implement and front/rear
combinations ................................................................................... 94
- Table ............................................................................................... 95
Front towing and manoeuvring hitch ..................................................... 95
Front towing and manoeuvring hitch ..................................................... 96
- Front towing and manoeuvring hitch with bolt ................................. 96
- Front towing and manoeuvring hitch with ballast carrier
and ballast weights * ....................................................................... 96
- Front towing and manoeuvring hitch front with front ballast
weight 600 kg (1322.76 lbs) 1000 kg (2204,60 lbs) * ..................... 97
- Front towing and manoeuvring hitch with bolt ................................. 97
Front power lift * ................................................................................... 98
- Coupling the catching hook ............................................................. 99
- Mounting the upper link ................................................................ 100
- Adjusting the upper link ................................................................. 100
- On-road travel with front-mounted implement .............................. 102
Front loader * ...................................................................................... 104
Trailer hitch, rear * ............................................................................... 104
- Mechanical * trailer hitch ................................................................ 104
- Automatic * trailer hitch ................................................................. 105
- Remote control of automatic trailer hitch * ..................................... 105
- Height adjustment * with adjusting rail .......................................... 106
- PICK-UP HITCH drawbar and towing hitch ...................................... 107
- Class „C“ towing hitch ................................................................... 109
- Class „D2“ AND „D3“ towing hitches ............................................. 110
- Drawbar* and Piton Fix* towing hitch ............................................. 111
- Piton Fix * ...................................................................................... 113
Three-point hitch ................................................................................. 114
- Mounting implements .................................................................... 115
- Safety measures for coupling and uncoupling of implements ......... 117
- Adjusting upper link ....................................................................... 117
- Adjusting lift rods ........................................................................... 118
Implement Stabilization ....................................................................... 119
- Side stabilisation, right .................................................................. 119
- Lateral stabilization, automatic * .................................................... 119
IX
Sezione 0.pmd 9 20/12/2004, 10.22

- Lateral stabilization, length adjustable * ........................................ 119
- Pendulum compensation ................................................................ 120
Cab ..................................................................................................... 121
Climate control ................................................................................... 121
- Ventilation ..................................................................................... 121
- Outlet nozzles ................................................................................ 122
Air conditioning system ....................................................................... 123
- Air conditioning controls ................................................................. 125
- Heating system ............................................................................. 125
- Manual temperature control .......................................................... 126
- Fresh/recycled air controls .............................................................. 126
Active carbon air filter ......................................................................... 127
Connector sockets ............................................................................... 128
- Trailer receptacle ........................................................................... 128
- Arrangement of electrical implement sockets ................................. 128
- Power socket .................................................................................. 129
- Signal socket as per ISO 11786 ..................................................... 129
- External socket ............................................................................... 129
- Overhead indirect control panel light ............................................. 130
- Cab interior light ........................................................................... 130
- Ashtray and cigar lighter ................................................................ 130
- Clock * .......................................................................................... 131
- Radio * .......................................................................................... 131
- Loudspeakers * .............................................................................. 131
- Interior rearview mirrors ................................................................. 132
- Storage compartment .................................................................... 133
- Refrigerator compartment .............................................................. 134
Doors and windows ............................................................................. 134
- Cab door ....................................................................................... 134
- Children’s guard * .......................................................................... 135
- Front window ................................................................................. 135
- Installation of additional controls and display units ........................ 136
- Rear window .................................................................................. 136
- High-visibility roof .......................................................................... 136
- Instrument introduction flap ........................................................... 137
- Sunshade - roof hatch * ................................................................. 137
- Sunshade * .................................................................................... 137
Chapter 4 - Wheels ....................................................................... 139

Track adjustment ................................................................................. 140
- Tyre inflation pressures .................................................................. 141
- Narrow track .................................................................................. 141
- Width of front axle ......................................................................... 142
- Mechanical ratio ............................................................................ 142
- Width of rear axle .......................................................................... 142
- Row crop tires ................................................................................ 142
- Running direction of tires ............................................................... 142
Sezione 0.pmd 10 20/12/2004, 10.22

- Adjusting steering stops ................................................................. 143
- Adjustable track wheels ................................................................. 144
Permissible tyre combinations .............................................................. 145
Track width adjustment for wheels with adjustable rims ....................... 147
- Front wheels .................................................................................. 147
- Rear wheels ................................................................................... 148
Track width adjustment for wheels with fixed rims ............................... 154
Adjusting front fender ......................................................................... 158
Ballasting * .......................................................................................... 161
- Ballast carrier ................................................................................. 161
- Front ballast for front hydraulic lift ................................................. 163
- Rear ballast ................................................................................... 163
Water ballasting .................................................................................. 164
- Filling tires with water .................................................................... 165
- Draining tires ................................................................................. 165
Mixed-automatic air braking system .................................................... 166
Chapter 5 - Service and maintenance ........................................ 169

Service and maintenance .................................................................... 170
- Maintenance intervals .................................................................... 170
Prescribed lubrificants and fuels ........................................................... 174
Checks and maintenance table ........................................................... 175
Servicing of the engine ....................................................................... 179
- Opening the engine hood ............................................................. 179
- Closing the hood ........................................................................... 179
- Cleaning side grilles ...................................................................... 180
- Front engine compartment ............................................................ 180
- Cleaning the gearbox oil and fuel coolers and the
engine radiator .............................................................................. 181
- Cleaning with detergents .............................................................. 182
- Cleaning with compressed air ........................................................ 182
- Checking the engine oil level ........................................................ 183
- Changing engine oil ...................................................................... 184
- Changing engine oil filter .............................................................. 185
- Changing fuel filter ....................................................................... 185
Servicing air filter ................................................................................ 187
- Replacing air filter cartridge ........................................................... 187
- Cleaning dry-type air cleaner ........................................................ 188
- Replacing safety cartridge .............................................................. 188
- Air intake ....................................................................................... 188
Fuel storage ........................................................................................ 189
- Refueling ....................................................................................... 189
- Refueling at the end of the working day ........................................ 189
- Fuel ............................................................................................... 190
Engine coolant .................................................................................... 191
- Water quality ................................................................................. 191
XI
Sezione 0.pmd 11 20/12/2004, 10.22

- Cooling system .............................................................................. 192
- Checking the coolant level ............................................................ 193
- Topping up coolant ........................................................................ 193
- Poly-V belt ..................................................................................... 194
- Changing poly-V belt ..................................................................... 194
- Fan with air conditioning system .................................................... 194
- Checking the drivebelts ................................................................. 195
- Fuel supply pump, water pump and generator .............................. 195
- Fan with air conditioning system .................................................... 195
Maintenance of the transmission ......................................................... 196
- Checking oil level .......................................................................... 196
- Draining oil .................................................................................... 197
- Filling in oil .................................................................................... 197
- Changing intervals for the hydraulic oil filter and for the
circuit hydrostatics steering * ........................................................ 197
- Oil filter for transmission oil pump ................................................. 198
- LS system adjustment pump .......................................................... 198
- Changing oil filter .......................................................................... 198
- Changing upstream filter ............................................................... 198
- Cleaning upstream filter ................................................................ 198
- Steering system ............................................................................. 199
- Constant pump ............................................................................. 200
- Transmission housing breather ....................................................... 201
- Clean installed mesh filter for front axle suspension ...................... 202
Maintenance of the front drive axle ..................................................... 203
- Differential .................................................................................... 203
- Planetary drives ............................................................................. 204
- Grease lubrication for front axle and cardan shaft ......................... 205
Maintenance of front P.T.O. * ............................................................... 206
- Checking oil level .......................................................................... 206
- Changing oil .................................................................................. 207
- Cleaning P.T.O. housing breather ................................................... 207
Clutch ................................................................................................. 209
- Checking the main clutch .............................................................. 209
Brakes ................................................................................................. 209
- Checking the service brake ............................................................ 209
- Checking brake fluid for service brake and main clutch .................. 210
- Checking service brake .................................................................. 210
Air Brake System * .............................................................................. 211
- Checking gladhands of air brake system ........................................ 211
Maintenance of the climate control system .......................................... 212
- Renewing the cab air filter ............................................................. 212
- Cleaning the filter ......................................................................... 213
Maintenance of the air conditioning system ......................................... 214
XII
Sezione 0.pmd 12 20/12/2004, 10.22

- Inspecting the radiator-condenser .................................................. 214
- Air conditioning system check ........................................................ 215
- Air conditioning system compressor ............................................... 216
- Service valves of the air conditioning system ................................. 217
General cleaning of the tractor ........................................................... 218
- Cleaning with detergents .............................................................. 218
- Cleaning with compressed air ........................................................ 218
Chapter 6 - Electrical system ....................................................... 219

Battery ................................................................................................ 220
- Battery maintenance ..................................................................... 220
- Connection/disconnection of the battery to the tractor’s
electrical system ............................................................................ 221
- Fuse box and fuses ........................................................................ 221
- Relay assignment .......................................................................... 224
Radar sensor ....................................................................................... 226
Cleaning front and rear headlights ...................................................... 226
Exchanging bulbs ................................................................................. 227
- Headlights front grille .................................................................... 227
- Workslights .................................................................................... 227
- Headlights rear * ........................................................................... 228
- Lighting flashing sidelight with auxiliary top headlight * ................. 228
- Lighting rear fender ....................................................................... 229
- Overhead control panel light ......................................................... 229
- Cab interior light ........................................................................... 229
Headlight alignment ........................................................................... 230
- Horizontal adjustment ................................................................... 231
- Vertical adjustment ........................................................................ 231
Adjusting auxiliary top headlights * ...................................................... 232
- Horizontal adjustment ................................................................... 233
- Vertical adjustment ........................................................................ 233
Chapter 7 - Storage of the tractor .............................................. 235

Cleaning ............................................................................................. 236
Operations prior to garaging the tractor for a long period ................... 236
- Engine ........................................................................................... 236
- Fuel tank ....................................................................................... 236
- Coolant ......................................................................................... 236
- Gearbox and hydraulic system ....................................................... 236
- Rear axle and epicyclic reduction units ........................................... 236
- Inlet manifold and exhaust pipe .................................................... 237
- Battery .......................................................................................... 237
Storing the tractor ............................................................................... 237
Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of storage ................. 238
XIII
Sezione 0.pmd 13 20/12/2004, 10.22

Chapter 8 - Technical data ........................................................... 239
Dimensions ......................................................................................... 240
Engine data ......................................................................................... 242
Power take-offs ................................................................................... 242
Hydraulic system ................................................................................. 243
Fuel tank capacity ............................................................................... 243
Cab ..................................................................................................... 244
Battery ................................................................................................ 244
Attachment of implements to the tractor ............................................. 245
Attachment points ............................................................................... 246
Chapter 9 - Fault diagnosis ......................................................... 251

Towing the tractor ............................................................................... 252
Tools ................................................................................................... 252
Fault diagnosis .................................................................................... 253
- Engine ........................................................................................... 253
- Gearbox ........................................................................................ 254
- Front and rear P.T.O. ...................................................................... 255
- Front wheel drive ........................................................................... 256
- Brakes ........................................................................................... 256
- Hydraulic lift .................................................................................. 256
- Auxiliary hydraulic systems ............................................................. 257
Important ............................................................................................ 258
- Sockets for data transfer and diagnostics ....................................... 258
NOTES ................................................................................................ 259
Index ................................................................................................ 261
XIV
Sezione 0.pmd 14 20/12/2004, 10.22

Dear customer,
prior to starting your tractor, you should first carefully read these operating
instructions as well as the additional instructions, if any, (e.g. for front
loader, front power lift etc.) to get familiarized with it within short time. In
this way, you will avoid accidents, maintain the warranty of the
manufacturer and will always avail on a functioning and operable tractor.
This tractor has been defined by the manufacturer and constructed for use
in agriculture – the intended purpose – and all uses in excess of this shall be
deemed not to be in conformity with the intended purpose. The
manufacturer will not be responsible for resulting damages. The risk will be
borne solely by the user.
Use in accordance with the intended purpose also includes obeying the
operating, servicing and repair instructions stipulated by the manufacturer.
Beyond the regular care and maintenance, a competent treatment of the
tractor will save its value and is, in many cases, a pre-condition for warranty
claims. The tractor must only be used, serviced and repaired by persons
who have the necessary skills and were instructed about the risks involved.
The relevant accident prevention regulations as well as the other generally

recognized safety, industrial hygiene and road traffic regulations must be
observed. If you make any changes to the tractor, this will exclude all
liability claims against the manufacturer for resulting damage.
The SAME DEUTZ-FAHR design engineers have placed special emphasis on

safety and efficiency. It is now up to you to operate your tractor with
adequate care, to maintain its efficiency and performance and thus to
ensure smooth operation.
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR furnishes you with all necessary information.
And finally, one urgent request to you: If you should sell your tractor, please
hand over the complete instruction booklet to the new owner – the board
literature is part of the tractor!
Your SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
XV
Sezione 0.pmd 15 20/12/2004, 10.22

Sezione 0.pmd
XVI
Conformity declaration
CHAPTER 0
Deutz-Fahr-Straße 1
D-89415 Lauingen
The tractors,
16
types:
TT3
Agrotron 120
Agrotron 130
Agrotron 150
TT4
Agrotron 150.7
TT5
Agrotron 165.7
are in conformity with the EU-regulation 75/322/EWG, 2001/3/EWG and 95/54/EEC

regarding the electro-magnetic compatibility.
20/12/2004, 16.54
Lauingen, li 11/2003
Table of contents
7249-2
XVII
Sezione 0.pmd 17 20/12/2004, 10.22

Pre-delivery operations to be done in the workshop
- Check, and if necessary top up, all the oil levels (engine, gearbox, rear
axle reduction gears, front drive, side hubs of the front drive, brake/clutch
reservoir)
- Check, and if necessary top up, the engine coolant and the liquid in the
windscreen washer tank.
- Check the charge of the air-conditioning system for the tractor cab.
Delivering the tractor to the customer
- Tell the customer there are safety instructions in the owner’s handbook for
tractor operation.
- Tell the customer how important it is to comply with current local stand-
ards, especially as regards speed limits and trailer braking systems.
- Provide detailed explanations of the instructions given in the handbook on
using the controls, transmission, digital display, maintenance, starting and
stopping the tractor, using components such as the hoist, front and rear
PTO.
n
CAUTION: CAREFULLY READ ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED IN
THE OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK AND FOLLOW THE
INSTRUCTIONS LISTED ON THE TRACTOR’S DECALS. avv008gb
XVIII
Sezione 0.pmd 18 20/12/2004, 16.53

7181-59
n
CAUTION: CAREFULLY READ ALL THE INSTRUCTIONS GIVEN IN THE
TRACTOR OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
BEFORE USE AND FOLLOW THEM CAREFULLY DURING OPERATION.
n
CAUTION: ALL THE WARNINGS GIVEN IN THIS MANUAL:
* THAT REFER TO POSSIBLE ACCIDENTS
* THAT SIGNAL WORKING CONDITIONS WHERE IT IS NECESSARY TO
PROCEED APPROPRIATELY SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE THE TRACTOR ARE
PRECEDED BY THIS SYMBOL n AND SURROUNDED BY A FRAME.
ALL THE USERS OF THE TRACTOR MUST BE FAMILIAR WITH THESE
WARNINGS.
n
WARNING: LEARN TO USE THE TRACTOR BEFORE OPERATING IT. DO NOT
ALLOW OTHERS TO USE THE TRACTOR IF THEY ARE NOT FAMILIAR WITH
THE SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS REGARDING ITS USE. avv006gb
n
XIX
Sezione 0.pmd 19 20/12/2004, 16.53

n
WARNING: IN SOME OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS USED IN THIS OPERATOR
INSTRUCTION BOOK, PANEL OR GUARDS MAY HAVE BEEN REMOVED
FOR CLARITY. NEVER OPERATE THE TRACTOR WITHOUT THESE
COMPONENTS IN POSITION. IF THE REMOVAL OF PANEL OR GUARDS IS
NECESSARY TO MAKE A REPAIR, THEY MUST BE REPLACED BEFORE
OPERATION. avv140gb
CE - This symbol certifies that

the tractor has undergone and
passed the electromagnetic
compatibility test.
7181-60
n
IMPORTANT: THE SAFETY SEAL ON THE ENGINE GOVERNOR IS APPLIED
BY THE MANUFACTURER AND ENSURES THAT THE POWER OUTPUT OF
YOUR TRACTOR DOES NOT EXCEED THE DECLARED AND APPROVED
VALUE.ANY TAMPERING WITH THIS SEAL ON THE GOVERNOR WILL
VOID THE WARRANTY FOR THE ENTIRE TRACTOR WITH IMMEDIATE
EFFECT. avv139gb
XX
Sezione 0.pmd 20 20/12/2004, 16.53

EMV supplement sheet

(State: Nov. 8, 96)
Safety information regarding the subsequent installation of electrical

and electronical instruments and/or components
The machine is equipped with electronic components and parts whose

functioning can be influenced by electromagnetic transmissions from other
equipment. Such influence may represent a hazard to persons, if the
following safety information are not observed.
In case of the subsequent installation of electrical and electronical

instruments and/or components into the machine with connection to the
board mains, the user must check in his own responsibility, whether the
installation affects the electronic system of the vehicle or other components.
This applies in particular to:

– Board computer,
– CB-radio, telephone,
– Radio set
– Remote CB-radio controls, e.g. for all rope hoists.
In particular, ensure that the subsequently installed electrical and

electronical components meet the requirements of the EMV regulation 89/
336/EEC in the respectively valid version and that they bear the CE mark.
For the subsequent installation of mobile communication systems (e.g. CB-

radio, telephone), the following requirements must be met:
– Only equipment with approval according to the valid national regulations
(e.g. BZT approval in Germany) can be installed.
– The equipment must be fixedly installed.
– The operation of portable or mobile equipment inside the vehicle is only
admissible via a connection to a fixedly installed external antenna.
– The transmission unit must be installed in a space separate from the
vehicle electronics.
– When installing an antenna, ensure a correct installation with good mass
connection between antenna and vehicle mass.
For cabling and installation as well as for the maximal current consumption,
observe the supplementary installation instructions of the machine producer.
XXI
Sezione 0.pmd 21 20/12/2004, 10.22

You should know the following before reading the operating
instructions
Scope of equipment
In the present operating instructions, the most extensive scope of
equipment at the time of printing this booklet is described. Possibly, some
equipment items can be supplied only at a later date or only on specific
markets.
Therefore, no claims can be derived from the descriptions in this booklet
regarding the equipment of tractors already delivered or still to be
delivered.
*
The equipment marked with an asterisk may be standard
or optional items for all the models or just for some
depending on the type of market.
Directions
All direction indications (left, right,
front front, rear) in these instructions
always refer to the forward driving
direction of the tractor. One
exception: If a description in the text
right should indicate another direction.
left
IMPORTANT
Since the production process may be
modified subsequent to the printing
of this manual, the instructions,
rear
7181-415b illustrations, specifications or other
information in this manual may not
correspond exactly to your tractor.
7181-414 Case for instruction booklet

To have your instruction booklet
always available, the tractors with
co-driver’s seat * have – on top of
1 0
the seat in the back rest – a case for

1 2
keeping the booklet.
3
The board literature is part of the

0
tractor. Therefore hand over the

complete operating instructions to
the new owner, if you should sell
your tractor.
XXII
Sezione 0.pmd 22 20/12/2004, 10.22

Introduction
NOTE: This book is published for worldwide distribution, and the
availability of equipment shown either as basic or accessory may
vary according to the territory in which the tractor is to be operated.
Full details of equipment available in your area can be obtained from
your SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Dealer. Use only SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
approved attachments and equipment.
The purpose of this book is to enable the owner and driver to operate the
tractor in a safe manner. Providing that the instructions are followed
carefully, the tractor will give years of service in the tradition of SAME
DEUTZ-FAHR. The installation of the product on the farm by the Dealer
gives the opportunity to ensure that these operating and maintenance
instructions are understood. Always consult your Dealer if you do not
understand any part of this book. It is important that these instructions are
understood and observed. Daily maintenance should become a routine,
and a record of hours in service should be kept.
When new parts are required it is important that only genuine SAME
DEUTZ-FAHR service parts are used. SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Dealers supply
genuine parts and can give advice regarding their fitment and use.
Extensive damage may occur as a result of the fitment of parts of inferior
quality. Customers are advised to buy their service parts only from an
authorized SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Dealer.
Owing to wide variations in operating conditions, it is impossible for the
Company to make comprehensive or definitive statements in its
publications regarding performance or methods of use of its machines, or to
accept liability for any loss or damage which may result from these
statements, or from any errors or omissions. If the tractor is to be used for
abnormal conditions which may be detrimental, (e.g. deep water or paddy
fields) consult your SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Dealer for special instructions, or
the warranty may be invalidated.
These tractors are designed solely for use in customary agricultural
operations (intended use).
Use in any other way is considered as contrary to the intended use. SAME
DEUTZ-FAHR accepts no liability for any damage or injury resulting from
misuse and these risks must be borne solely by the user.
Compliance with, and strict adherence to, the conditions of operation,
service and repair as specified by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR also constitute
essential elements for the intended use.
These tractors should be operated, serviced and repaired only by persons
familiar with all their particular characteristics and who are acquainted with
the relevant safety rules (accident prevention).
Customers are strongly advised to use an official SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
Dealer in connection with any service problems and adjustments that may
occur.
XXIII
Sezione 0.pmd 23 20/12/2004, 10.22

Pre-delivery, Installation on the Farm and Warranty
The Company, when selling new goods to their Dealers, gives a warranty
which, subject to certain conditions, guarantees that the goods are free
from defects in material and workmanship. Since this book is published for
worldwide circulation, it is impossible to detail the exact terms and
conditions of warranty that apply to a retail customer in any particular
country. Purchasers of new SAME DEUTZ-FAHR equipment should request
full details from their supplying Dealer.
In accordance with the Company’s policy of continuous improvement to its

machines, alterations in the specifications of machines may be made at any
time without notice. The Company accepts no responsibility for
discrepancies which may occur between the specifications of its machines
and the descriptions thereof contained in its publications.
Pre-delivery and Installation on the Farm

A Dealer is required to carry out certain activities when supplying a new
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR tractor. These consist of a full pre-delivery inspection to
ensure that the tractor supplied is ready for immediate use, and to give full
instruction in the basic principles of operation and maintenance of the
tractor. These instructions will cover instruments and controls, routine
maintenance and safety precautions. All persons who will be concerned with
the operation and maintenance of the machine should be present during
this instruction period.
NOTE: SAME DEUTZ-FAHR will not accept responsibility for any claim
resulting from the fitment of non-approved parts or attachments, or
unauthorized modification or alteration.
Warranty Procedure
Correct installation on the farm, coupled with regular maintenance, will do
much to prevent breakdowns. If, however, operating trouble is experienced
during the warranty period, the following procedure must be adopted:
- Immediately notify the Dealer from whom you purchased the tractor,
quoting the Model and Serial Number. It is most important that there
should be no delay, and you should realise that, even where the original
failure is covered by warranty, if the failure is not repaired immediately,
warranty cover may not apply.
- Provide your Dealer with as much background information as you can. It
will help him to know how many hours service has been achieved, the
type of work on which you are engaged and the symptoms of the trouble.
It should be noted that normal maintenance services such as tuning, brake/

clutch adjustments, and the supply of materials used to service the tractor
(oil, filters, fuel and antifreeze) are not covered by the terms of warranty.
XXIV
Sezione 0.pmd 24 20/12/2004, 10.22

Parts Warning
The fitment of non SAME DEUTZ-FAHR parts may result in a part of
substandard quality being used. SAME DEUTZ-FAHR will not take the
responsibility for any loss, damage or liability resulting from the fitment of
such parts, and, if fitted during the normal warranty period the
manufacturer’s guarantee may be invalidated.
Moving to a new Location
Only the SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Dealer from whom you purchased the tractor
is responsible for the protection afforded by your warranty and, where
possible, you should always take your tractor to him for repair. If, however,
you move to another area or if your tractor should be working temporarily
at some distance from the Dealer from whom it was purchased, you are
recommended to obtain from that Dealer the name and address of the
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Dealer nearest to your new location and to ask for
arrangements to be made for outstanding service warranty commitments to
be transferred to the latter. If you have left the area in which the original
Dealer operates and have not made arrangements with a new Dealer, the
latter will readily provide assistance in an emergency but you will be
charged at normal rates for any work undertaken unless:
• You make it clear that the warranty has not expired,
and
• You give the repairing Dealer the opportunity to make suitable

arrangements with the retailing Dealer.
Service After Warranty

During the warranty period, you should have all your repairs and
maintenance performed by your SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Dealer. This ensures
that a detailed check is kept on the progress and performance of your new
tractor.
In order to obtain the best results from your SAME DEUTZ-FAHR tractor, it
is important that regular maintenance and service checks continue after the
warranty period has expired. Make use of your local SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
Dealer for all major tractor services; a trained mechanic will spot any
problems between one service and the next.
The mechanics are regularly trained and updated on the product, servicing
techniques and the use of modern service tools and diagnostic equipment.
They receive regular Service Bulletins, have all Workshop Manuals and other
such technical information to ensure that the repair or service is to the
standard required by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR.
XXV
Sezione 0.pmd 25 20/12/2004, 10.22

EU Declaration of Conformity
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR tractors conform with the protection requirements

relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility.
Tractor and Machine Noise
The SAME DEUTZ-FAHR range of series tractors meet the sound level
requirements in accordance with Directive 77/311 ECC Annex 1, with cab
doors and windows closed.
XXVI
Sezione 0.pmd 26 20/12/2004, 10.22

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Chapter 1 - SAFETY
Safety Alert Symbol and Terms .....................................XXVIII

Introduction to Safety ................................................... XXIX
Safety ............................................................................ XXIX
Danger, Warning and Caution ..................................... XXIX
Decals ............................................................................ XXX
General safety rules ...................................................... XXXI
Protective structures ................................................... XXXVII
Demage to the ROPS .................................................XXXVIII
Cab ............................................................................XXXVIII
Prepare for safe operation ......................................... XXXIX
Servicing the tractor ...................................................... XLIV
Road trasport .................................................................... LV
Illustrations of safety decals ........................................... LVIII
n
CAREFULLY DURING OPERATION OF THE TRACTOR.
avv001gb
XXVII
Sezione 1 - Sicurezza Verticale.pmd 27 20/12/2004, 10.22

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Safety Alert Symbol and Terms

This safety alert symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY
IS INVOLVED!
The safety alert symbol identifies important safety messages on machines,

safety signs, in manuals, or elsewhere.
When you see this symbol, be alert to the possibility of personal injury or
death.
Follow the instructions in the safety message.
Why is SAFETY important to you?

ACCIDENTS DISABLE and KILL
ACCIDENTS are COSTLY
ACCIDENTS can be AVOIDED
Tractor and Implement Safety

The tractor is a source of power - Mechanical and Hydraulic.
On its own, the tractor is of little practical value. Only when used in conjun-
ction with an implement or other attachment does it become a working
unit.
This instruction book is compiled to cover those safe working practices that are
associated with the base tractor operation.
It does not cover all operation and safety instructions relevant to all known
implements and attachments that may be fitted at the time of tractor deli-
very or at some future date.
It is essential that operators use and understand the relevant instruction
manual of such implements and attachments.
XXVIII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Introduction to Safety
This safety section of your Operator Instruction Book is intended to point out
some of the basic safety situations which may be encountered during the
normal operation and maintenance of your FOOTSTEP (ROPS) or CAB
tractor, and to suggest possible ways of dealing with these situations. This
section is NOT a replacement for other safety practices featured in other
sections of this book.
Additional precautions may be necessary, depending on attachments used

and conditions at the work site or in the service area. The tractor maker has
no direct control over tractor application, operation, inspection, lubrication,
or maintenance. Therefore it is YOUR responsibility to use good safety
practices in these areas.
Safety
The safety of the operator is one of the main concerns in designing and
developing a new tractor. Designers incorporate as many safety features as
is possible in constructing our tractors. However, every year many accidents
occur which could have been avoided by a few seconds thought and a more
careful approach to handling farm machinery and implements.
Read and practice the safety instructions detailed in the next pages of this
book.
A Word to the Operator

It is YOUR responsibility to read and understand the safety section in this
book before operating your tractor.
You must follow these safety instructions that take you step by step through
your working day.
Remember that YOU are the key to safety. Good safety practices not only
protect you, but also the people around you. Study the features in this
manual and make them a working part of your safety programme. Keep in
mind that this safety section is written only for this type of machine. Practice
all other usual and customary safe working precautions, and above all
- REMEMBER –SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. YOU CAN PREVENT
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
Use only SAME DEUTZ-FAHR approved attachments and equipment.
Danger, Warning, Caution

Whenever you see the words and symbols shown below, used in this book
and on decals, you MUST take note of their instructions as they relate to
personal safety.
XXIX

CHAPTER 1 Safety
CAUTION: This symbol together with the
n CAUTION
word CAUTION is used to indicate a po-
tentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, may result in MINOR INJURY.
WARNING: This symbol together with the

n WARNING
word WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation that if not avoided
could result in DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY.
DANGER: This symbol together with the
n
word DANGER indicates an imminently
DANGER hazardous situation that, if not avoided,
will result in DEATH OR VERY SERIOUS IN-
JURY.
IMPORTANT: The word IMPORTANT is used to identify special instructions or
procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of
the machine, process or its surroundings.
NOTE: The word NOTE is used to indicate points of particular interest for more
efficient and convenient repair or operation.
n
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE OR OBSCURE DANGER, WARNING,
CAUTION OR INSTRUCTION DECALS. REPLACE ANY DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION OR INSTRUCTION DECALS THAT ARE NOT
READABLE OR ARE MISSING. REPLACEMENT DECALS ARE
AVAILABLE FROM YOUR DEALER IN THE EVENT OF LOSS OR
DAMAGE. THE ACTUAL LOCATION AND ORDERING CODE OF
THESE SAFETY DECALS IS ILLUSTRATED AT THE END OF THIS
SECTION.WHEN YOU REPLACE A PART THAT CARRIES A SAFETY
LABEL, MAKE SURE THAT THE SAME LABEL IS APPLIED TO THE NEW
PART. DO NOT USE FUEL OR SOLVENTS ETC. TO CLEAN SAFETY
LABELS. USE A CLEAN CLOTH DAMPED IN SOAPY WATER. avv147gb
Decals
If a used tractor has been purchased, refer to the illustrations at the end of
this section to ensure that all the safety warning decals are in the correct
position and are readable.
n
WARNING: IN SOME OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS USED IN THIS
OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK, PANEL OR GUARDS MAY HAVE
BEEN REMOVED FOR CLARITY. NEVER OPERATE THE TRACTOR
WITHOUT THESE COMPONENTS IN POSITION. IF THE REMOVAL
OF PANEL OR GUARDS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE A REPAIR, THEY
MUST BE REPLACED BEFORE OPERATION. avv140gb
XXX

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Follow a Safety Programme
For Safe Operation
For safe operation of an agricultural tractor, you must be a qualified and
authorized operator. To be qualified you must understand the written
instructions supplied in this Operator Instruction Book, have training, and
know the safety rules and regulations for the job.
Some regulations specify that no one under the age of 16 years, for
example, may operate power machinery. This includes tractors. It is your
responsibility to know what these regulations are, and obey them, in the
operating area or situation.
These will include, but are not limited to, the following instructions for safe
tractor operation.
n
WARNING: AN OPERATOR SHOULD NOT USE ALCOHOL OR
DRUGS WHICH CAN AFFECT HIS ALERTNESS OR CO-
ORDINATION. AN OPERATOR ON PRESCRIPTION OR ‘OVER THE
COUNTER’ DRUGS NEEDS MEDICAL ADVICE ON WHETHER OR
NOT HE OR SHE CAN SAFELY OPERATE MACHINES. avv019gb
General safety rules

- DO NOT allow children or
unqualified persons to operate your
tractor. Keep others away from
your area of work.
- Securely fasten your seat belt when
the tractor has a ROPS (Roll Over
Protective Structure) frame in the
upright position or is fitted with a
cab.
- Before starting the engine, check
that all the tractor controls are in
neutral position. This is to prevent
accidental movement of the vehicle
or the starting of tractor-driven
implements.
- ONLY operate the controls when
seated in the driver’s seat.
XXXI

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- Always use the seat belt. When

used correctly, it can help you
drive in safety. Ensure the belt is
worn without slack or twists, and
that is not caught on objects near
the seat or trapped under the seat
support.
- Before leaving the driving position, remember to lower the 3-point

linkage and/or any implement mounted on the tractor, to put all controls
in neutral, to apply the handbrake, to switch off the engine, to remove
the key from the ignition switch and to turn the battery earth switch to
“off” (where present).
- Where possible, avoid operating the tractor near ditches, embankments
and holes. Reduce speed when turning, crossing slopes, and on rough,
slippery, or muddy surfaces.
- Stay off slopes too steep for safe operation.
- Watch where you are going, especially at row ends, on roads, and around
trees.
- DO NOT permit others to ride on the tractor or the implement unless an
approved passenger seat and seat belt is fitted.
- Hitch only to the drawbar and hitch points recommended, and never
above the centre line of the rear axle.
- Operate the tractor smoothly - no jerky turns, starts or stops. When the
tractor is stopped, apply the parking brake securely. Lower the implement
and remove the key.
- DO NOT modify or remove any part of the equipment and DO NOT use
attachments unless they are properly matched to your tractor.
- For safety reasons, avoid very steep slopes. Change down through the
gears on both uphill and downhill slopes, especially with heavy loads.
NEVER allow the tractor to freewheel with the clutch disengaged or the
gearbox in neutral.
XXXII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- ALWAYS travel at a speed that allows full control and stability of the
tractor. Avoid working near embankments and ditches. Reduce speed
when turning or driving on steep gradients, and when travelling over
ground that is loose, slippy or covered in mud.
- DO NOT travel on the road or at high speed with the differential lock
engaged, as this could cause steering problems and thus lead to
accidents.
- Before starting the tractor or PTO driven implements, ALWAYS check that
no-one is within the tractor/implement operating area.
- Only attach to the 3-point linkage those implements specifically designed
for the purpose. Do not use the 3-point linkage as a towing hook. For
towing, use the rear towing hitch only (the front hook is for use in
emergencies only).
- ALWAYS check that the weight of the towed vehicle or trailer is less than
the weight of the tractor (unless equipped with independent braking).
Braking distance will increase with speed and the weight towed,
particularly on downhill slopes.
- Lock the oscillating towing hitch in a fixed position and use the safety locks
when travelling on the public highway. Display load warning signs when
necessary and in accordance with the applicable regulations. It is the
responsibility of the operator to know and comply with the requirements
of the highway code.
- Use emergency lights when travelling on the public highway, both in
daytime and at night.
Use direction indicators before any turning manoeuvre.
Ensure that all the lights on the tractor are kept clean.
- Use the bolt provided to lock the two brake pedals together when
travelling on the road. This is to ensure more uniform and more effective
braking.
- All machinery driven by the PTO is a potential cause of serious and even
fatal injury. Ensure that the PTO and drive shaft guards are always in
place. Before starting any work in the vicinity of the PTO shaft, and
before servicing/cleaning PTO-driven implements, put the PTO control in
the disengaged position, stop the tractor engine and wait until all the
moving parts of the implement have come to a complete standstill.
XXXIII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- Alighting from the driving position when the engine is running, although
permitted in emergencies, creates a hazardous situation for which
additional precautions must be taken as regards the tractor and any
implements connected to it. In any case, before leaving the driving
position, make sure that all the safety devices are in place, that no-one is
in the vicinity of the tractor, that the tractor is parked on a level surface,
that the handbrake is applied and that all the drive control levers are in
neutral position. While alighting from the tractor, keep well clear of any
moving parts.
- NEVER operate the tractor inside a

building with the doors closed. It is
essential to ensure that the area is
sufficiently ventilated.
- Fluids under pressure can cause

severe injury. NEVER use your
hands to trace an oil or fuel leak.
Use instead a piece of wood or
cardboard for this purpose. Before
disconnecting any part of a
normally pressurised circuit, always
make sure that the circuit is fully
depressurised. If engine oil,
hydraulic fluid or any fluid from a
pressurised circuit penetrates your
skin, seek medical assistance
IMMEDIATELY.
- DO NOT use explosive ether based products to facilitate cold starting.

Follow the instructions given in this manual in the section “Cold starting”.
- Incorrect connection of the battery terminals or between the battery and a
battery charger could damage the electrical system or even cause the
battery to explode. NEVER connect the battery terminals together. The
acid electrolyte contained in the battery is highly corrosive and can cause
burns or even blindness if it enters the eyes. When filling/topping up a
battery with electrolyte, NEVER smoke or allow a naked flame in the
vicinity and always wear safety goggles.
XXXIV

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- DO NOT use elastic materials to

pull the tractor, as a sudden release
of energy stored in the material
could cause a fatal accident.
- NEVER attempt to weld or repair a

wheel or wheel rim when fitted
with an inflated tyre.
- A runaway tractor can cause serious

or fatal injury. Only start the
engine when seated in the driving
position and after checking that all
the drive controls are in neutral.
NEVER start the engine from the
ground or by bypassing the
electrical safety system. If the
starter motor fails to operate when
all the controls are in neutral
position, contact your nearest
Assistance Service centre.
- NEVER refuel the tractor when the

engine is running or even hot. DO
NOT smoke when refueling. DO
NOT fill the fuel tank right to the
brim, but leave a little space to
allow for expansion of the fuel.
Refuel in a safe place, away from
naked flames or sparks.
- NEVER allow anyone to stand

between the tractor and the
implement during hitching
operations.
- NEVER wear headphones or
earphones to listen to the radio or
music while driving. This reduces
your ability to concentrate and to
hear sounds essential to safe
driving.
XXXV

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- Avoid contact with pesticides. Tractor cabs, when fitted, do NOT protect
you against inhaling dangerous pesticides. Meticulously follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for using and handling pesticides. Always wear
the required personal protective equipment (respirator, face mask, etc.)
even in the cab.
- Certain tractor models are

equipped with speed measurement
radar. Even though these radar
systems emit only low intensity
radio waves, NEVER look directly at
the device when it is operating. RA
DA
R
- Periodically check the wheel nuts and tighten them to the specified
torque. (See the Maintenance section for wheel nut torque values).
- The best way to transport a tractor that has broken down is to tow it away
on a flat bed truck. Always secure the tractor to the truck with chains
before driving off. If you must tow a tractor, do not exceed 10 km/h (6.21
mph), and always have an operator at the tractor’s controls to steer and
brake as necessary. If necessary, ask your dealer if the model of tractor
you have can be towed or not.
- Do not weld or heat any painted parts. Toxic fumes could be given off.
Remove paint by abrasion first, before heating the part. Always perform
these operations in a well ventilated area.
- Keep heat well away from pipes

and hoses containing pressurised
fluids. Heating pressurised pipes
and hoses can cause inflammable
fluids to spray out and cause
serious burns to you and others
nearby.
XXXVI

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Protective Structures
Roll Over Protective Structures
A Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS) and seat belt is fitted as standard
equipment to the footstep tractor at the time of factory assembly. If the
ROPS was removed by the original purchaser or has been removed, it is
recommended that you equip your tractor with a Roll Over Protective
Structure and a seat belt. ROPS are effective in reducing injuries during
overturn accidents.
Overturning a tractor without ROPS

can result in serious injury or death.
If a fold down ROPS is installed DO
NOT wear seat belt when the ROPS
is in the folded down position.
Operation
- Before using the tractor ensure that the ROPS frame is not damaged, that
it is securely fastened to the tractor and if a hinged section is fitted that it
is in the raised position and secured.
- If the ROPS has been removed from the tractor, or folded down for a
specific operation, it must be refitted or erected immediately afterwards
using the proper hardware and applying the recommended torque values.
- DO NOT attach chains, ropes, or cables to the ROPS for pulling purposes;
this will cause the tractor to tip backwards. Always pull from the tractor
drawbar.
- Always wear your seat belt - adjusted snugly except when operating with
a folded down ROPS.
- Check the seat belt for damage. A damaged seat belt must be replaced.
XXXVII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Damage to the ROPS
If the tractor has rolled over or the ROPS has been damaged (such as
striking an overhead object during transport), the ROPS must be replaced to
provide the original degree of protection.
After an accident, check for damage to the ROPS, operator’s seat, seat belt
and seat belt mountings.
Before you operate the tractor, replace all damaged parts.
DO NOT WELD, DRILL, BEND OR STRAIGHTEN THE ROPS.

To do so reduces the protection it offers.
Cab
The safety cab has been designed for fitment to this series of tractor and
meets all the legal requirements of cab safety and noise levels.
The safety cab conforms to the various international safety standards. The
cab must NEVER be drilled, or modified to install accessories or
implements . Welding components to the cab or repairing damaged
components is NOT PERMITTED. DO NOT attach chains or ropes to the
main frame of the cab for pulling purposes.
If additional controls or displays are to be added to the operator’s area

contact your DEUTZ-FAHR Dealer for information as to how this can best
be done.
The ROPS cab together with the seat belt is effective in reducing injuries
during overturn accidents. Wearing the seat belt is an important part of this
protection.
- Always wear your seat belt-adjusted snugly.
- Check the seat belt for damage. A damaged seat belt must be replaced .
n
WARNING: IF THE TRACTOR HAS TO OPERATE IN AREAS WITH
RISK OF FALLING OBJECTS (LIKE IN MINES, ETC.), WHERE A FOPS
IS REQUIRED, PLEASE CONSIDER THAT YOUR TRACTOR, EQUIPPED
WITH ROPS SAFETY STRUCTURE (FRAME OR CAB), IS NOT
ALLOWED TO OPERATE IN THOSE AREAS. avv146gb
XXXVIII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Prepare for Safe Operation
Protect Yourself
Wear all the protective clothing and personal safety devices issued to you or
called for by job conditions. Don’t take chances.
You may need:

• A hard hat.
• Safety glasses, goggles, or face
shield.
• Hearing protection.
• Respirator or filter mask.
• Foul weather clothing.
• Reflective clothing.
• Heavy gloves (neoprene for
chemicals, leather for rough work).
• Safety boots.
Note where fire extinguishers and

first-aid or emergency equipment is
kept and get to know where to find
help in a hurry. Make sure you know
how to use this equipment.
DO NOT wear loose clothing, BASIC

jewellery or other items and tie up FIRST
AID
long hair which could entangle in

controls or other parts of the tractor.
Risks from exposure to noise
The tractor and any implements attached to it constitute a source of noise

of which the intensity and frequency can be measured using the
appropriate instruments. Anyone who uses the tractor must know that:
- exposure to excessive and/or prolonged noise can cause serious damage,
not just to the hearing but also to general health. The higher the noise
level (dbA) and the greater the duration of exposure, the higher the risk.
The combination of both these factors can be expressed in the value LEP
(level of personal exposure to noise).
- you therefore need to know the noise level generated by the tractor. This
information can be found in the Use and Maintenance Handbook, under
the chapter heading "Technical Data".
XXXIX

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- the use of ear protection is essential when the noise level exceeds a
certain value and/or when operating the tractor for prolonged periods.
The point at which action is to be taken is generally when the level of
personal exposure LEP reaches or exceeds 85 dbA. Various types of
protection are available, including ear muffs, ear plugs and helmets.
Know Your Equipment
Know your tractor. Know how to

operate all equipment on your
machine and the implements and
attachments used with it. Know the
purpose of all the controls, gauges
and dials. Know the rated load
capacity, speed range, braking and
steering characteristics, turning
radius, and operating clearances.
Keep in mind that rain, snow, ice,
loose gravel, soft ground, etc. can
change the way your tractor
operates.
Under poor conditions, slow down and be extra careful, engage four-
wheel drive, if fitted.
Study the DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION safety signs on your tractor

and the information signs also.
READ THIS OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK BEFORE STARTING THE

ENGINE.
STUDY IT BEFORE YOU START WORK.
IF THERE IS SOMETHING IN THE MANUAL YOU DON’T UNDERSTAND, ASK
SOMEONE (such as your equipment Dealer) TO EXPLAIN IT TO YOU.
IMPORTANT: This manual covers general safe practices for agricultural

tractors. It must always be kept with the tractor. For further copies contact
your Dealer.
Use all Available Protective and Safety Devices
Keep all protective devices in place and securely fastened. Make certain all
guards, shields and safety signs are properly installed, as specified, and are
in good condition.
XL

CHAPTER 1 Safety
To help keep you and others around you safe, your tractor must be
equipped with:
- Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS), and seat belt.
- Tractor P.T.O. shield.
Your tractor may also need:

- Rear view mirror.
- Fire extinguisher.
- ROPS, FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure), protective enclosure or
protective screens. Remember FOPS are protection from light falling
objects and are not intended as protection from large falling objects such
as large round bales or fence rails.
- SMV (slow moving vehicle) emblem, additional safety guards, lights or
decals and a back up alarm.
Know which devices are required for safe operation of your tractor. Use
them. Make sure they are in place and in good condition. DO NOT remove
or disconnect any safety device.
Check the Equipment

Before you begin your working day, take time to check your tractor and
ensure that all systems are in good operational condition.
- DO NOT smoke while refuelling

the tractor. Keep any type of open
flame away.
- Stop the engine and wait for it to
cool before refuelling.
- Check for loose, broken, missing,
or damaged parts.
- Have everything put into good
repair. Make certain all safety
devices are in place.
- Check ROPS and seat belt for damage. A damaged ROPS or seat belt
MUST be replaced.
- Ensure that implements and attachments are properly installed and that
the tractor and implement P.T.O. rev/min ratings match.
XLI

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- Check the tyres for cuts, bulges and correct pressure. Replace worn or
damaged tyres.
- Check the engine oil level and add oil if required.
- Perform all maintenance procedures outlined in the maintenance and
adjustment section of this manual.
- Check foot and parking brakes for proper operation, adjust if necessary.
- Check that the P.T.O. driveline locking devices are latched.
- Check that the tractor P.T.O. shield and driveline guards are in place and
operating properly.
- Check the tractor and implement

hydraulic system. Have any leaks
or damaged parts repaired or
replaced.
n
WARNING: DIESEL FUEL OR HYDRAULIC FLUID UNDER PRESSURE
CAN PENETRATE THE SKIN OR EYES AND CAUSE SERIOUS
PERSONAL INJURY, BLINDNESS OR DEATH. FLUID LEAKS, UNDER
PRESSURE, MAY NOT BE VISIBLE. USE A PIECE OF CARDBOARD OR
WOOD TO FIND LEAKS. DO NOT USE YOUR BARE HAND. WEAR
SAFETY GOGGLES FOR EYE PROTECTION. IF ANY FLUID IS
INJECTED INTO THE SKIN, IT MUST BE SURGICALLY REMOVED
WITHIN A FEW HOURS BY A DOCTOR FAMILIAR WITH THIS TYPE
OF INJURY. avv073gb
XLII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Before applying pressure to the fuel or hydraulic system, be sure all

connections are tight and that lines, pipes, and hoses are not damaged.
Before disconnecting fuel or hydraulic lines, be sure to relieve all pressure.
Make sure that all hydraulic lines are correctly installed and not crossed.
n
WARNING: LIQUID COOLING SYSTEMS BUILD UP PRESSURE AS
THE ENGINE GETS HOT. BEFORE REMOVING THE RADIATOR CAP,
STOP THE ENGINE AND LET THE SYSTEM COOL.
CHECK THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM AND ADD COOLANT AS
REQUIRED. avv048gb
Clean the Tractor

- Keep work surfaces and engine compartments clean.
- Before cleaning the machine, always lower implements to the ground,
place transmission in neutral or with the lowest gear engaged, if
mechanical, engage the parking brake, shut off the engine and remove
the key.
- Clean steps, pedals and floor. Remove grease or oil. Brush away dust or
mud. In winter, scrape away snow and ice. Remember - slippery surfaces
are dangerous.
- Remove or put away tools, buckets, chains and hooks.
Protect the Environment
It is illegal to pollute drains, water

courses or soil. Use authorised waste
disposal facilities, including civic
amenity sites and garages providing
facilities for disposal of used oil. If in
doubt, contact your local authority
for advice.
XLIII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Servicing the Tractor

- DO NOT service the tractor while
the engine is running or hot, or if
the tractor is in motion.
- Before making adjustments to, or
servicing the electrical system,
disconnect the battery negative (-)
cable first.
- To prevent fires or explosions keep
open flame away from the battery
or cold weather starting aids. To
prevent sparks which could cause
explosions use jump cables
according to instructions.
- When making repairs or adjustments it is recommended that you consult
your Dealer, and have the work carried out by trained personnel.
- The implement and/or tractor must be supported on suitable wooden
blocks or stands, NOT a hydraulic jack.
- Check all nuts and bolts periodically for tightness, especially wheel hub
and rim nuts. Tighten to the prescribed torque values.
- Check the brakes regularly, top up the reservoir and/or adjust where
necessary. Make sure that the brakes are evenly adjusted, especially when
using a trailer.
Starting
Warn Personnel before Starting
Before starting, walk completely around the tractor and any attached
equipment. Make sure that no one is under it, on it, or close to it. Let other
workers and bystanders know you are starting up and don’t start until
everyone is clear of the tractor, implements and towed equipment.
Ensure that all bystanders, particularly children, are a suitable distance
away before starting the engine.
XLIV

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Mount and Dismount Safely
Always use ‘three point contact’ with the machine, and face the machine
when you mount it. (Three point contact means both hands and one foot or
one hand and both feet are in contact with the machine at all times during
mounting and dismounting).
Clean your shoes and wipe your hands before climbing on. Use handrails,
grab handles, ladders or steps (as provided) when mounting or dismount-
ing.
DO NOT use control levers as a

hand hold and never step on foot
controls when mounting or dis-
mounting.
DO NOT attempt to mount or dis-

mount from a moving tractor. DO
NOT jump off a tractor other than in
an emergency.
n
WARNING: BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE MAKE SURE THERE IS
PLENTY OF VENTILATION. DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE IN A
CLOSED BUILDING. THE EXHAUST FUMES MAY CAUSE
ASPHYXIATION. avv149gb
Start Safely
Always start the engine from the
operator’s seat with all the
transmission levers and the P.T.O.
lever in neutral.
Make sure that the tractor’s dual
brake pedals are locked together at
all times unless you are making turns
in the field which require independ-
ent use of the brakes. Make sure the
brakes are properly adjusted so that
both brakes engage at the same
time.
Adjust the seat, fasten the seat belt,
apply the parking brake and put all
controls in neutral before starting up.
XLV

CHAPTER 1 Safety
n
DANGER: START THE ENGINE, WITH THE STARTER KEY, FROM THE
OPERATOR’S SEAT ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE
ENGINE BY SHORTING ACROSS THE STARTER TERMINALS. THE
MACHINE WILL START IN GEAR IF THE NEUTRAL START CIRCUIT IS
BYPASSED. THIS COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
ANYONE IN THE VICINITY OF THE TRACTOR. ENSURE THAT THE
ENGINE STARTER SOLENOID COVER IS ALWAYS IN POSITON.avv012gb
Follow Recommended Starting Procedures

Follow the starting procedures recommended in the Operation section of
this Operator Instruction Book. This includes normal starting, cold starting,
and the use of starting fluids.
Test the Controls

After starting, re-check all gauges and lights. Make sure everything is
functioning correctly. If the tractor does not respond correctly when each
control is operated, DO NOT use the machine until the fault is rectified.
n
DANGER: DO NOT USE AEROSOL CANS OF STARTING AID ON
TRACTORS WITH THE THERMOSTART CONNECTED TO THE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. ETHER COMBINED WITH THERMOSTART CAN
CAUSE AN EXPLOSION WITH DAMAGE TO ENGINE, PERSONAL
INJURY, OR BOTH. avv106gb
Starting Fluid
Your tractor has been fitted with a
thermostart cold starting device. If
aerosol cans of starting fluid, or
ether start-aid, are to be used the
thermostart must be disconnected.
Remove the wire from the ST A R TI NG
thermostart unit which will be found F LUI D
on the induction manifold. Tape the
end of the wire to prevent an
electrical short circuit.
XLVI

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Handle starting fluid as directed by

the manufacturer. Starting fluid must
only be used when an ether-start aid
is fitted as original equipment by the
manufacturer or when installed by a
Dealer as an accessory. In cases of
tractors being fitted with glow plugs
or thermostart,
these must be removed prior to the
installation of an ether start-aid.
n
WARNING: AN UNBALANCED TRACTOR COULD OVERTURN AND
CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH. MAKE SURE FRONT FRAME
COUNTERWEIGHTS, WHEEL WEIGHTS AND WHEEL BALLAST ARE
USED AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DO NOT ADD
EXTRA COUNTERWEIGHTS TO COMPENSATE FOR AN
OVERLOADED TRACTOR, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO REDUCE THE
LOAD. KEEP ALL PARTS OF YOUR BODY INSIDE THE OPERATOR’S
COMPARTMENT WHILE OPERATING THE TRACTOR. avv150gb
Work Safely
Making the Right Moves
Make sure your tractor is ready for the job it must do.
Know the rated load capacities of your tractor and never exceed them. Be
certain that any equipment or implements you intend to use DO NOT
exceed the load rating of your tractor. Be sure the tractor and implement
PTO speed match.
Keep in mind that tractors normally operate on uneven, unpaved, and

often bumpy or sloping surfaces. Operating conditions can reduce the
amount of weight you should carry or pull.
Follow Safe Operating Practices

- Operate the controls smoothly - don’t jerk the steering wheel or other
controls.
- DO NOT get on or off a moving tractor. Keep a firm grip on the steering
wheel at all times, with the thumbs clear of the spokes when driving the
tractor
XLVII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- Make sure you have adequate clearance in all directions for tractor, cab,
ROPS and implement.
- DO NOT play games with a tractor or equipment. Use only for intended
purpose.
- DO NOT attempt to work the controls except from the operator’s , if
tractor is NOT equipped with proper passenger seat.
- DO NOT carry passengers, if tractor is NOT equipped with proper
passenger seat.
- Before dismounting, always disengage the P.T.O., lower all attachments
and implements to the ground, engage parking brake, shut off the
engine, engage the lowest gear (if mechanical transmission) and remove
the key. With hydraulic transmission or powershift transmission or
powershuttle, ALWAYS chock the tractor wheels.
- DO NOT touch, lean on, or reach

through any implement mechanism
or permit others to do so.
Stay alert. Should something
break, come loose, or fail to
operate on your equipment, stop
work, lower equipment to the
ground, shut off the engine,
inspect the machine and have
repairs or adjustments made
before resuming operation.
Watch out for Others

- Be aware of what is going on. DO
NOT allow an untrained or
unqualified person to operate your
tractor. They could injure
themselves or someone else.
XLVIII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
n
WARNING: YOUR TRACTOR IS A ONE-PERSON MACHINE. DO
NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO RIDE ON THE TRACTOR OR THE
IMPLEMENT. IN SOME TERRITORIES A PASSENGER SEAT MUST BE
FITTED TO CARRY PASSENGERS. DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO
RIDE ON THE IMPLEMENTS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT INCLUDING
TRAILERS, EXCEPT ON CERTAIN HARVESTING EQUIPMENT,
SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR RIDERS DURING THE ACTUAL
HARVEST OPERATION ONLY (NOT DURING TRANSPORT). SUCH
EQUIPMENT MUST HAVE PROVISION FOR A SAFE RIDING AREA.
DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN ON THE TRACTOR. avv151gb
- Be certain you can control both speed and direction before moving. Move
slowly until you are sure that everything is operating properly. After
starting, recheck the steering, right and left. Be certain you have full
steering and brake control. If differential is locked, DO NOT operate at
high speed or turn the tractor until the differential lock is disengaged.
- DO NOT lift a load over anyone.
- Keep others away from your operation. DO NOT allow anyone to stand or
pass under a raised implement.
- DO NOT lift objects that can not be contained in the bucket, get the
appropriate attachment. DO NOT allow anyone to stand on the ROPS or
fenders.
- When using a loader, avoid sudden stops, starts, turns, or change of
direction. Keep loads close to the ground when transporting.
- DO NOT stand (or allow anyone else to stand) in front of, under, or
behind loaded or loading equipment. DO NOT drive a tractor up to
someone standing in front of a fixed object.
- Keep others away from universal joints, hitches, drawbar, lift arms, P.T.O.
drives, cylinders, belts, pulleys, and other moving parts. Keep all shields
and guards in place.
n
WARNING: DO NOT STAND, OR ALLOW ANYONE ELSE TO STAND,
BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT UNLESS THE ENGINE IS
TURNED OFF AND THE PARKING BRAKE IS ENGAGED, THE
LOWEST GEAR IS ENGAGED, THE KEY IS REMOVED, AND ALL
ATTACHMENTS OR IMPLEMENTS ARE LOWERED TO THE GROUND.avv152gb
XLIX

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Risk of Overturning
For your safety, it is strongly
recommended that all footstep
tractors are fitted with Roll Over
Protective Structures (ROPS) and seat
belts.
In the event of an overturn with a
tractor fitted with a cab or ROPS,
hold the steering wheel firmly and
DO NOT attempt to leave the seat
until the tractor has come to rest. If
the doors of the cab are obstructed,
leave through the rear window or
the roof hatch.
To Avoid Side Overturns
- Set the wheel track at the widest setting suitable for the job being done.
- Lock the brake pedals together before driving at transport speeds.
- Reduce speed to match operating conditions. If the tractor is equipped
with a front-end loader, carry the bucket and load as low as possible.
- Make wide slow turns at reduced speed. Don’t let your tractor bounce. You
may lose steering control.
- Don’t pull a load too heavy for your tractor. It could run away on the down
slope or the tractor could jack-knife around a towed load.
- Don’t brake suddenly. Apply brakes smoothly and gradually.
- When going down a slope, use the throttle to slow the tractor engine and
use the same gear range you would use to go up the slope. Shift into
gear before you start downhill.
- Engage four-wheel drive (if fitted).
- It is less likely that the tractor will overturn if you travel straight up or
down a steep slope rather than across it.

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you must do so, avoid any holes
or depressions on the downhill side. Avoid any stumps, rocks, bumps or
raised areas on the uphill side. When operating near ditches and banks,
always keep your tractor behind the shear line. Avoid ditches,
embankments and river-banks which might cave in.
- If it is necessary to cross a steep slope, avoid turning uphill, slow down
and make a wide turn. Travel directly up or down the slope, never across
it. When travelling up or down a slope, keep the heavy end of the tractor
on the uphill side.
- If when travelling across a slope with side mounted implements, keep the
implement on the uphill side.Do not raise the implements. Keep them as
low to the ground as possible when crossing a slope.
- When towing a load at transport speed or in the field, lock the drawbar in
the centre position and use a safety chain.
- DO NOT use your tractor to round up farm animals.
n
WARNING: DO NOT DISENGAGE THE CLUTCH OR ATTEMPT TO
SHIFT GEAR AFTER YOU HAVE STARTED DOWNHILL. avv153gb
n
WARNING: HITCHING TO THE REAR AXLE, OR ANY OTHER POINT
ABOVE THE SWINGING DRAWBAR, CAN CAUSE A REAR
avv154gb
OVERTURN.
To Avoid Rear Overturns
- DO NOT pull anything using the top link connection, or from any point
above the centre line of the rear axle. Always use an approved drawbar,
and only use a drawbar pin that locks in place.
- High hitching can cause rear overturn, which may cause serious injury or
death. Hitch loads to the drawbar only.
- Only use a three-point linkage drawbar when stays are fitted to keep it in
the down position.
- Use front counterweights to increase tractor stability when towing a heavy
load or to counter balance a heavy rear mounted implement.
LI

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- Start forward slowly and gradually increase your speed. DO NOT rev the
engine or drop the clutch. If the tractor is attached to a heavy load, or
immovable object, improper clutching may cause overturn.
- If the front end of the tractor starts to lift, reduce your speed and, if
necessary, disengage the clutch.
- If your tractor is bogged down in mud or frozen to the ground, DO NOT
attempt to drive forwards. The tractor can rotate around its rear wheels
and overturn. Lift any attached implement and attempt to BACK OUT. If
this is not possible, tow it out with another vehicle.
- If you get stuck in a ditch, BACK OUT, if possible. If you must go forward,
do it slowly and carefully.
- A bare tractor or tractor with rear mounted attachments should be backed
up the slope in reverse and travel forward downhill.
- A tractor with a loaded front-end bucket should be backed down the slope
and travel forward uphill. Keep the loader bucket as low as possible.
- Always keep the tractor in gear when going downhill. DO NOT permit the
tractor to coast with clutch disengaged or transmission in neutral.
General Operating Hazards
- Ensure that the P.T.O. shield is in place and that the P.T.O. cap is fitted
when the P.T.O. driveline is not in use.
- Before attaching, detaching, cleaning or adjusting P.T.O. driven
implements, disengage the P.T.O., stop the engine, remove the key, and
make sure that the P.T.O. driveline has stopped.
- Ensure that all the P.T.O. driveline guards are in place and observe all
safety decals.
- Be sure everyone is clear of your machine before engaging the P.T.O.. For
stationary P.T.O. operation, always place transmission in neutral, engage
parking brake, and chock both tractor and implement wheels.
n
DANGER: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO UNPLUG THE HYDRAULIC
CONNECTIONS, OR ADJUST AN IMPLEMENT WITH THE ENGINE
RUNNING OR THE P.T.O. DRIVE IN OPERATION. TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN VERY SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. avv155gb
LII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- When operating mobile P.T.O. driven equipment, DO NOT leave the

tractor seat until the PTO drive is disengaged, the lowest gear is engaged
(if mechanical), the parking brake is engaged, the engine shut off and the
key removed.
- DO NOT use P.T.O. adaptors, reducers or extensions as they extend the
P.T.O. coupler and universal joint out beyond the protection offered by the
P.T.O. shield.
- The top link and lift rods must not be extended beyond the point where
threads begin to show.
- When using chemicals, carefully follow for use, storage and disposal. Also
follow the chemical application equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
- When operating under poor visibility conditions, or in the dark, use your
tractor field lights and reduce your ground speed. DO NOT use your field
lights when travelling on a roadway because rear pointed white lights
may be illegal except when reversing and may confuse following drivers.
- Operate your tractor with the wheels set at the widest setting possible,
consistent with the particular task you are performing. To adjust wheel
settings refer to Maintenance and Adjustment section.
- Reduce your speed when operating over rough or slippery ground and
when foliage restricts your view of hazards.
- DO NOT make sharp turns at high speed.
n
WARNING: A FRONT-END LOADER (BUCKET OR FORKS) MUST BE
EQUIPPED WITH A SUITABLE RESTRAINING DEVICE TO PREVENT
THE LOAD (BALES, FENCE POSTS, ROLLS OF FENCE, WIRE ETC.)
FROM ROLLING DOWN THE LIFT ARMS INTO THE OPERATOR’S
COMPARTMENT AND CRUSHING THE DRIVER WHEN THE LOADER
IS RAISED. INADEQUATELY SECURED OBJECTS COULD ALSO FALL
AND INJURE BYSTANDERS. avv156gb
Implements and Attachments
- Three-point hitch and side mounted implements make a much larger arc
when turning than towed equipment. Make certain to allow sufficient
clearance for turning. Use only approved attachments and implements.
- When using attachments or implements with the tractor, be sure to
thoroughly read the Operator Instruction Book for that attachment or
implement and follow its safety instructions.
LIII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- DO NOT overload an attachment or towed equipment. Use proper
counter-weights to maintain tractor stability. Hitch loads to the drawbar
only.
- A safety chain will help control drawn equipment should it be accidentally
separated from the drawbar while transporting. Using the appropriate
adaptor parts, attach the chain to the tractor drawbar support or other
specified anchor location.
Provide only enough slack in the chain to permit turning.
See your Dealer for a chain with a strength rating equal to, or greater
than the gross weight of the towed machine.
- Make sure any towed implements are equipped with a safety chain
linking tractor and implement.
- Pull only from the approved drawbar. Towing or attaching to other
locations may cause the tractor to overturn.
n
WARNING: TRACTOR REQUIRES CORRECT TRAILER BRAKING
EQUIPMENT BE INSTALLED AND CONNECTED TO THE
EQUIPMENT. avv169gb
Safety - Towing
- For towed equipment WITHOUT brakes, DO NOT tow equipment:
- at speeds over 30 km/h (18.64 mph);
- that, when fully loaded, weighs more than 1 times the weight of the
towing unit (please refer to local rules).
- For towed equipment WITH MECHANICAL brakes, DO NOT tow
equipment:
towing unit or 5000 Kg (11021.5 lb) (please refer to local rules).
- For towed equipment WITH HYDRAULIC OR PNEUMATIC brakes, DO NOT
tow equipment:
towing unit, with a maximum of 20.000 Kg (44092 lb) (please refer to
local rules).
- When parking tractor and towed trailer, engage the lowest transmission
gear, engage parking brake, shut off the engine, remove the key and
chock both tractor and trailer wheels
- Stopping distance increases with speed and weight of towed loads, and
on hills and slopes. Towed loads with or without brakes that are too heavy
for the tractor or are towed too fast can cause loss of control. Consider
the total weight of the equipment and its load.
LIV

CHAPTER 1 Safety
n
ATTENTION: WHEN TOWING TRAILERS, REMEMBER TO PUT ALL
OPERATING ELEMENTS IN THE NEUTRAL POSITION BEFORE LEAVING THE
DRIVER’S CAB, TO SWITCH ON THE ALL-WHEEL DRIVE, TO APPLY THE
HAND BRAKE, TO SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE, TO ENGAGE THE LOWEST
GEAR (WITH MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION) AND TO REMOVE THE
IGNITION KEY. IN THE CASE OF HYDRAULIC OR POWERSHIFT
TRANSMISSION OR POWERSHUTTLE THE TRACTOR AND TRAILER WHEELS
MUST ALWAYS BE BLOCKED. avv157gb ver 2
Road Transport
BEFORE operating your tractor on a public road, a number of precautions
must be taken.
- Familiarise yourself with - and obey - all laws appropriate to your tractor.
- Lock your brake pedals together.
- Raise all implements to their transport position and lock them in place.
- Place all implements into their narrowest transport configuration.
- Disengage the P.T.O. and differential lock.
- Make sure any required clearance flags or hazard lights are in place and
in working order.
- Make sure you use a proper hitch pin with a clip retainer.
- Clean off all reflectors and road lights, front and rear, and be certain they
are in working order.
- Make sure tractor and equipment are equipped with Slow Moving Vehicle
(SMV) signs and other marking aids recommended for improved visibility,
or beacon if the law requires them.
n
WARNING : DO NOT ALLOW ANY PASSENGERS ON THE TRACTOR
OR TOWED EQUIPMENT. avv158gb
Rules of the Road

WHEN operating your tractor on a public road a number of precautions
must be taken.
- Know the route you are going to travel.
- Use flashing lights or beacon when travelling on roads, day or night,
unless prohibited by law.
- Use caution when towing a load at transport speeds especially if the
towed equipment is NOT equipped with brakes.
LV

CHAPTER 1 Safety
- Observe all local or national regulations regarding the road speed of your
tractor.
- Observe all local or national regulations regarding the max towed weight.
- Use extreme caution when transporting on snow-covered or slippery
roads.
- Wait for traffic to clear before entering a public road.
- Beware of blind intersections. Slow down until you have a clear view.
- DO NOT attempt to pass at any intersection.
- Slow down for turns and curves.
- Make wide, gentle turns.
- Signal your intent to slow, stop or turn.
- Shift to a lower gear before going up or down hills.
- Keep tractor in gear. DO NOT coast with the clutch disengaged or
transmission in neutral.
- Stay out of the path of oncoming traffic.
- Drive in your correct lane keeping as near to the kerb as possible.
- If traffic builds up behind you, pull off the road and let it go by.
- Drive defensively. Anticipate what other drivers might do.
- When towing a load, start braking sooner than normal and slow down
gradually.
- Watch out for overhead obstructions.
- Make sure that the load does not obscure warning or any other lights.
LVI

CHAPTER 1 Safety
After Operation
When stopping at any time, bring the tractor to a complete halt, apply the
parking brake, disengage the P.T.O., place the lowest gear engaged, lower
the implement to the ground, stop the engine and remove the key BEFORE
leaving the seat.
Welding work on the tractor body
Before performing electrical welding work on the tractor body or on

attached implements, always disconnect the electrical wiring of the
generator, the battery and the electronic boxes.
Welding work on the cab posts is not permitted.
Watch out that plastic components, such as air compressor system or

hydraulic hoses, are not overheated.
LVII

LVIII
18 19 21
7 8 9 10 11
CHAPTER 1
Sezione 1 Decalcomanie.pmd
12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4
5 6
22
58
25 26 18
23 24
29 30
31 32 20
Safety and operational decals
20
27 30
28
20/12/2004, 10.22
19
20 24 33
Safety
7216-30
CHAPTER 1 Safety
WARNING
1. READ OPERATORS MANUAL BEFORE
OPERATING THIS TRACTOR.
2. KEEP ALL SHIELDS IN PLACE.
3. SECURELY FASTEN YOUR SEATBELT
WHEN OPERATING TRACTOR WITH
ROPS (ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURE).
4. HITCH ONLY TO DRAWBAR AND
HITCH POINTS RECOMMENDED IN
THE OPERATORS MANUAL.
5. BE SURE EVERY ONE IS CLEAR OF
MACHINE BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
AND OPERATING UNIT.
6. DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO RIDE.
7. KEEP HANDS, FEET AND CLOTHES
AWAY FROM POWER DRIVEN PARTS.
8. OPERATE TRACTOR SMOOTHLY, NO
JERKY STARTS, STOPS OR TURNS.
9. WHERE POSSIBLE AVOID OPERATING
TRACTOR NEAR DITCHES, EMBANK-
MENTS AND HOLES.
10.REDUCE SPEED AND BE CAREFUL
WHEN TURNING, APPLYING BRAKES,
OPERATING AROUND HAZARDS OR
OBSTRUCTIONS AND ON ROUGH,
SLICK OR MUDDY SURFACES.
2.9929.289.0
7214-73
1 - P/N 2.9929.289.0
Location: On the cab B-upright left.
WARNING
11.STAY OFF SLOPES TOO STEEP
FOR SAFE OPERATION.
12.ON TRACTORS EQUIPPED WITH
RIGHT AND LEFT BRAKES PROPERLY
LOCK PEDALS TOGETHER WHEN
TRAVELING AT HIGH SPEEDS.
13.USE PROPER LIGHTING AND
MARKING WHEN OPERATING
TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENTS ON
PUBLIC HIGHWAYS.
14.DISENGAGE POWER TAKE-OFF,
LOWER IMPLEMENT TO GROUND AND
TURN OFF ENGINE. WHEN TRACTOR
IS PROPERLY STOPPED SET
PARKING BRAKE OR PARK LOCK
BEFORE DISMOUNTING, SERVICING
OR MAKING ADJUSTMENTS TO
TRACTOR OR IMPLEMENT.
15. WHEN SERVICING LIFTED IMPLE-
MENTS WHICH MUST BE ADJUSTED
OR SERVICED IN THE RAISED
POSITION ALWAYS BLOCK OR
SUPPORT THEM.
7214-74
2 - P/N 2.9929.290.0
WARNING
Engage the parking
brake to prevent
tractor movement
with the engine off.
The clutch WILL NOT

hold the tractor in
place,even thogh
transmission is in gear.
Unexpected tractor
movement may cause
serious injury
7214-79
2.9929.813.0
3 - P/N 2.9929.813.0
LIX
Sezione 1 Decalcomanie.pmd 59 20/12/2004, 10.22

CHAPTER 1 Safety
WARNING
USE SEAT BELT.

Keep seat belt adjusted snugly.
Do not jump if
tractor tips.
0445 3235
7216-31
4 - P/N 0445 3235
CAUTION
Disengage differential
locks for road transport
or turning
0445 3298
7216-32
5 - P/N 0445 3298
Location: On the cab A-upright right.
IMPORTANT
To reduce the risk of damage to
transmission when tractor is towed
without its engine running:
- switch off creepen gear
- shift gear range manually to
neutral position
- do not tow faster than 6 mph
(10 km/h)
- do not tow further than 10 miles
(16 kilometres)
0445 3297
7216-33
6 - P/N 0445 3297
Location: On the cab A-upright right.
LX

CHAPTER 1 Safety
WARNING
DO NOT USE ETHER WITH
MANIFOLD PRE-HEATER
OR THERMOSTART
ATTACHMENT.
ETHER MAY IGNITE AND/OR EXPLODE

RESULTING IN BURNING OF THE AIR
CLEANER HOSE OR FILTER ELEMENT,
AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
2.9929.544.0
7214-71
7 - P/N 2.9929.544.0
Location: On the cab B-upright right.
WARNING
THIS TRACTOR IS EQUIPPED WIT A
SHIFTABLE PTO: TO AVOID INJURY:
1. MATCH PTO SPEED TO IMPLEMENT
2. KEEP ALL SHIELDS IN PLACE
3. CENTER AND LOCK DRAWBAR
4. ENGAGE PTO CAREFULLY
2.9929.281.0
7214-81
8 - P/N 2.9929.281.0
IMPORTANT
PRE-HEATING OPERATION
ROTATE THE KEY TO PRE-HEATING
POSITION. WHEN THE LIGHT IN
DASH TURN OFF, ENGINE CAN BE
STARTED.
7214-68
9 - P/N 2.9929.852.0
LXI

CHAPTER 1 Safety
Re
pe
r
tic
rre
ion
ma
de
arr
Re
an
q
10 Sec.
ue
Restart
Startwiederholung
7216-34
10 - P/N 0445 1780
Location: On the cab B-upright right over the ignition key.
+
PREHEAT RUN
START
STOP
0445 3230
7216-35
11 - P/N 0445 3230
Location: On the cab B-upright right over the ignition key.
speed
fast +
slow
Gear shifting
0445 3240
7216-36
12 - P/N 0445 3240
Location: Inside the cab on the right door near the speed control lever.
LXII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
speed
+ slow
fast
Gear shifting
0445 3239
7216-37
13 - P/N 0445 3239
Location: Inside the cab on the right door near the range shift lever control
lever.
locked off
detent for work
unlocked for work
unlocked for
work and float
detent
for float
levers working hydraulik

0445 3243
14 - P/N 0445 3243 7216-38

Location: Inside the cab on the right door near the auxiliary hydraulic
services control valves control device.
CAUTION
For road transport
lock selective hydraulic
valves in neutral position
0445 3299
7216-39
15 - P/N 0445 3299
Location: Inside the cab on the right door near the PTO control device.
LXIII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
PTO
on off
2
1
0445 3241
7216-40
16 - P/N 0445 3241
Location: Inside the cab on the right door near the PTO switches.
PTO
unlocked
locked
0445 3242
17 - P/N 0445 3242 7216-41
Location: Inside the cab on the right door near the PTO speed/standard-
ECO selector lever.
IMPORTANT
Disconnect battery cables prior
electric welding on tractor or
attached implements. Connect
ground close to welding area.
0445 3237
7216-42
18 - P/N 0445 3237
Location: Out side right on the rear window.
Location: On right side over the battery box.
LXIV

CHAPTER 1 Safety
IMPORTANT
Refer to the Operator’s
Manual for the use of the
proper oil.
0445 3236
7216-43
19 - P/N 0445 3236
Location: Out side right on the rear window.
Location: On left side near the engine oil dipstick.
WARNING
Accumulator
contains gas and oil
under pressure.
See Operator’s
Manual for service
information.
0445 3231
7216-44
20 - P/N 0445 3231
Location: At the back of tractor near the PTO clutch accumulator.
Location: On the left side near the front axle suspension shock absorber
(With front axle suspension only)
Location: In front of tractor, on left side, on front lift frame, near the
accumulator (With front lift accumulator only).
LXV

CHAPTER 1 Safety
0445 3198
Vehicle is fitted
with plastic pipes.
Teke care, when welding!
Permissible impact of heat
on depressurised lines,
max. 130 C and for a max. of 60 mins.
7216-49
21 - P/N 0445 3198
Location: Out side right on the rear window (With air braking system only).
DANGER WARNING
Pull only from Stand clear when

approved drawbar or using controls to
lower links of 3 point move 3 point hitch
linkage at orizontal
position or below
7214-70
22 - P/N 2.9929.790.0
Location: Rear on the left and right wings.
540 OR 1000 R.P.M. P.T.O.

1. POSITION DRAWBAR HITCH HOLE AS FOLLOWS:
PTO
SHAFT SIZE DISTANCE "A"
RPM
"A"
540 35mm (1.38IN.) 356mm (14.0IN.)
1000 35mm (1.38IN.) 406mm (16.0IN.)
1000 45mm (1.75IN.) 508mm (20.0IN.)
2. LOCK DRAWBAR IN LINE WITH P.T.O. OUTPUT SHAFT.

3. POSITION IMPLEMENT P.T.O. DRIVE LINE IN LINE WITH DRAWBAR.
4. DO NOT OPERATE P.T.O. ABOVE RATED SPEED FOR 540 OR 1000
R.P.M. P.T.O. SHAFT.
5. READ OPERATOR MANUALS FOR COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS AND SAFE
OPERATION TO AVOID ACCIDENTS.
72162055
7214-69
23 - P/N 2.9929.304.0
Location: At the back of tractor, near the rear PTO.
LXVI

CHAPTER 1 Safety
DANGER
Rotating driveline
contact can cause death
KEEP AWAY!
Keep all driveline,
tractor and equipment shields
in place during operation
24 - P/N 2.9929.305.0/10 7214-80

Location: At the back of tractor, near the rear PTO.
Location: In front of tractor near the front PTO (With front PTO only).
7216-45
25 - P/N 0445 3246
Location: On the right side near the radar sensor(With radar only).
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals know to the
State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
2.9929.754.0
7214-75
26 - P/N 2.9929.754.0
Location: On right side over the battery.
LXVII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
DANGER
Start from seat only when

in park or neutral
Jump starting in gear can
cause injury or death
7214-76
27 - P/N 2.9929.288.0
Location: On left side of tractor near the starter.
WARNING
High pressure steam
and hot water.
Remove filler cap with
extreme care.
3808561M3
7214-72
28 - P/N 2.9929.792.0
Location: On the radiator expansion reservoir.
WARNING
Keep hands clear

of fan and belts
while engine is
running
2.9929.794.0
7214-78
29 - P/N 2.9929.794.0
Location: On left side and right side of fan housing.
LXVIII

CHAPTER 1 Safety
WARNING
Beware hot parts
To avoid personal
injury, keep all
shields, covers and
guards in place
while engine is
running.
3774440M1
30 - P/N 2.9929.791.0 7214-77

Location: On left side of engine near the alternator.
Location: On left side and right side of cooler.
WARNING
Escaping fluid under

pressure can penetrate
skin and cause serious
injury.
See Operator’s Manual

for proper service
procedures.
0445 3232
31 - P/N 0445 3232 7216-46
Location: On left side and rear side of front axle (With front axle suspension
only).
WARNING Stay clear

of this area
when
engine
is running.
0445 3234
7216-47
32 - P/N 0445 3234
Location: On left side and rear side of front axle (With front axle suspension
only).
LXIX

CHAPTER 1 Safety
WARNING
Stand clear when

using controls to
move 3 point hitch
7216-48
33 - P/N 0445 3247
Location: On left side and rear side of front lift (With front lift only).
n
SECTION.
WHEN YOU REPLACE A PART THAT CARRIES A SAFETY LABEL, MAKE
SURE THAT THE SAME LABEL IS APPLIED TO THE NEW PART. DO
NOT USE FUEL OR SOLVENTS ETC. TO CLEAN SAFETY LABELS.
USE A CLEAN CLOTH DAMPED IN SOAPY WATER. avv147gb
LXX

CHAPTER 2 Tractor identification
Chapter 2 - TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION
Original replacement part ............................................ LXXII

Routine checking .......................................................... LXXVI
International symbols (Part I) ..................................... LXXVIII
International symbols (Part II) ...................................... LXXIX
International symbols (Part III) ...................................... LXXX
Metric conversion ......................................................... LXXXI
Conversion tables ....................................................... LXXXII
n
LXXI
Sezione 2.pmd 71 20/12/2004, 16.57

Original replacement parts
Your authorised SAME DEUTZ-FAHR dealer is obliged to provide all the

Technical Assistance necessary and to offer you technical support through his
workshop and specially trained personnel to ensure that your tractor
continues to offer the very best performance.
In order to obtain replacement parts or prompt and efficient technical
assistance, the owner must provide the tractor model, the tractor serial
number, the engine model and the engine serial number.
Use the space below to record your tractor identification data:
Tractor model
Tractor serial number
Engine model
Engine serial number
Date of purchase
Dealer's name
Dealer's telephone number
LXXII
Sezione 2.pmd 72 20/12/2004, 10.23

The use of ORIGINAL PARTS will
ensure that the perfect operating
efficiency of your tractor is Made by
DEUTZ FAHR
maintained and that operating costs DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
D-89415 LAUNINGEN/GERMANY
are kept to a minimum. Tipo

When ordering replacement parts, Numero di omologazione
please supply the following Numero di identificazione

Massa totale ammissibile da a Kg
information: Massa ammissibile sull'asse anteriore da a Kg
1
Massa ammissibile sull'asse posteriore
2
da a Kg
1 - Tractor serial number and engine Massa rimorchiabile ammissibile
serial number Massa rimorchiabile anon frenata Kg
7181-403
Massa rimorchiabile con frenatura indipendente Kg
(in the case of engine parts). Massa rimorchiabile e con frenatura ad inerzia Kg
Massa rimorchiabile con frenatura assistita (idraul. o pneum.) Kg
2 - Part name and code number.

1 = Tractor Type
2 = Tractor Identification-No.
Tractor nameplate
The tractor’s type plate is riveted onto an aluminium plate inside the cabin
or on the right of the fan housing (cooler divider).
TZ
DEU
R
FAH
7181-390 7181-426
The vehicle identification number is

also stamped onto the front right of
the frame.
1234535646
7181-390a
LXXIII
Sezione 2.pmd 73 20/12/2004, 17.00

Engine Serial Number
You will find the nameplate of the

engine on the RH side of the
crankcase.
1 = Engine Type 1 2
2 = Engine number
The engine number is also
E
hammered into the hydraulic pump
flange on the right-hand side.
KHD
DEUTZ
7181-83
Gearbox Nameplate
1 2
1 = Gearbox type.
Zahnradfabrik Passau GmbH
Made in Germany
2 = Gearbox serial numbers. Baumuster Aggregat-Nr.
Stücklisten-Nr. Übers.ges./Ausführg.
3 = Oil quality.
Ölfüllung Liter Schmierstoffliste
TE-ML
TE-ML
TE-ML
Kunden
Nr.
3
7181-84
Front Axle Nameplate

6 1
The data plate is located on the right
side of the front axle. Zahnradfabrik Passau GmbH
Made in Germany
Type Serial-No
1 = Axle serial number 2

5 Parts List No. Total/Version
2 = Overall transmission ratio of the Oil ltr. List of Lubricants

3
axle/design with or without ZF
TE-ML
multi-disk self-locking
TE-ML
differential 4 Customer©s
TE-ML
Code No.
3 = Oil quality
4 = Oil type 7181-85
5 = ZF parts list number

6 = Axle type
LXXIV
Sezione 2.pmd 74 20/12/2004, 17.00

Warning triangle *
One or two warning triangles should be carried in the tractor depending on
applicable national legislation.
Store these in a suitable place.
First-aid box *
The first-aid box can be stored in the
storage box on the left next to the
driver’s seat or in another suitable FIRST-AID KIT
place. KALFF
gut
Verbandkasten
Mounting the numberplate
PREMIER SECOURS
Upon delivery, the holder for

mounting the front numberplate with
installation instructions is deposited
in the tool kit. 7181-417
n
CAUTION: IT IS IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS HAVE FIRST-AID EQUIPMENT
READ-ILY
AVAILABLE:
- FIRST-AID KIT WITH MEDICAMENTS;
- FIRE EXTINGUISHER;
- EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBERS ON HAND (DOCTOR, HOSPITAL,
AMBULANCE, FIREMEN). avv018gb
n
CAUTION: ALWAYS RESPECT THE NATIONAL RULES AND THE ROADWAY
LEGISLATION. avv010gb
LXXV
Sezione 2.pmd 75 20/12/2004, 17.00

Routine checks
Routine checks must be performed with the tractor at standstill, activated

parking brake and the engine shut off.
Eliminate any damage or deficiency before setting the tractor into

operation.
Fuel tank supply

Always take care of a sufficient fuel supply. Never run the tank completely
empty.
Engine oil level

Park the tractor on a level surface. The oil level should be between the
dipstick marks.
Top up as necessary. For the type of oil see chapter 5, Maintenance.
Screen wash system

Check the water level in the
reservoir, add detergent and/or
antifreeze according to the season.
The reservoir for the screen wash
system is located on the left of the
rear axle.
7181-81
LXXVI
Sezione 2.pmd 76 20/12/2004, 17.00

Coolant
Check the cooling system regularly for the correct coolant level.
Before the beginning of the cold season check the coolant for the proper
amount of anti-freeze.
Tires and Wheels

Tire condition: check tires for damage and wear.
Tire inflation pressure: must correspond to the type of tires fitted. Observe
the directions of the tire manufacturer.
Wheel mounting: check all bolt connections on axles and rims – comply with
tightening torque specifications.
Air brake system *

Water drains automatically from air accumulator. Check periodically the
water draining valve. Check air compressor system for tightness.
Lighting
Check headlamps, turn signal lights, tail lights, etc.
Trailer hitch assemblies

Check all bolts for correct tightness. Immediately replace or renew any
missing or broken linch pins.
n
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE RADIATOR CAP WHILE ENGINE IS HOT.
RADIATOR IS PRESSURIZED AND IF OPENED WHILE HOT, STEAM AND
BOILING LIQUID WILL BE SPRAYED OUT, WHICH MAY INJURY YOU AND
OTHERS WHICH MAY BE CLOSE BY. THERE CAN ALSO BE A EXCESSIVE
AMOUNT OF COOLANT LOSS. avv162gb
LXXVII
Sezione 2.pmd 77 20/12/2004, 17.00

INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS (PART. 1)
LXXVIII
Sezione 2.pmd 78 20/12/2004, 10.24

LXXIX
Sezione 2.pmd 79 20/12/2004, 10.24

LXXX
Sezione 2.pmd 80 20/12/2004, 10.24

Metric conversion
LXXXI
Sezione 2.pmd 81 20/12/2004, 10.24

Conversion tables
Area ..................................................................................... Multiply by
mm2 to in2 ........................................................................................ 0.0015

in2 to mm2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 645.16
m2 to ft2 ................................................................................................................................................................ 10.764
ft2 to m2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 0.0929
ha to acre ......................................................................................... 2.4711
acre to ha ......................................................................................... 0.4047
Capacity ............................................................................... Multiply by
ml to fluid oz .................................................................................... 0.0338

fluid oz to ml .................................................................................... 29.573
litre to Imp. gal ................................................................................ 0.2199
Imp. gal to litre ................................................................................ 4.5460
litre to US gal ................................................................................... 0.2641
US gal to litre ................................................................................... 3.7854
Imp. gal to US gal ............................................................................ 1.2010
US gal to Imp gal ............................................................................. 0.8326
litre to U.S. qts ................................................................................. 1.0567
U.S. qts to litre ................................................................................. 0.9463
Length .................................................................................. Multiply by
mm to in .......................................................................................... 0.0394
in to mm .......................................................................................... 25.400
m to ft .............................................................................................. 3.2808
ft to m .............................................................................................. 0.3048
yard to m ......................................................................................... 1.0936
m to yard ......................................................................................... 0.9144
km to mile ....................................................................................... 0.6214
mile to km ....................................................................................... 1.6093
Power ................................................................................... Multiply by
ps to hp ............................................................................................ 0.9863
hp to ps ............................................................................................ 1.0139
kW to hp .......................................................................................... 1.3410
hp to kW .......................................................................................... 0.7457
LXXXII
Sezione 2.pmd 82 20/12/2004, 10.24

Pressure ............................................................................... Multiply by
Bar to psi .......................................................................................... 14.504

Psi to bar .......................................................................................... 0.0689
Speed ................................................................................... Multiply by
km/hr to mph ................................................................................... 0.6214

mph to km/hr ................................................................................... 1.6093
Torque .................................................................................. Multiply by
Nm to lbf ft ........................................................................................ 0.738

lbf ft to Nm ........................................................................................ 1.356
Kgm to Nm ........................................................................................ 9.810
Nm to Kgm ........................................................................................ 0.102
Kgm to lbf ft ....................................................................................... 7.233
Lbf ft to Kgm ...................................................................................... 0.138
Volume ................................................................................. Multiply by
cm3 to in3 ............................................................................................................................................................... 0.061

in3 to cm3 ............................................................................................................................................................ 16.390
m3 to ft3 ................................................................................................................................................................ 35.315
ft3 to m3 ................................................................................................................................................................ 0.0283
Weight .................................................................................. Multiply by
gram to oz ....................................................................................... 0.3530

oz to gram ....................................................................................... 28.350
kg to lb ............................................................................................ 2.2046
lb to kg ............................................................................................ 0.4536
kg to ton .......................................................................................... 0.0011
ton to kg .......................................................................................... 907.18
tonne to ton ..................................................................................... 1.1023
ton to tonne ..................................................................................... 0.9072
Temperature
°C to °F .................................................................................. 1.8 x °C + 32
°F to °C ................................................................................ (°F - 32) ÷ 1.8
LXXXIII
Sezione 2.pmd 83 20/12/2004, 10.24

Page intentionally left blank
LXXXIV
Sezione 2.pmd 84 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Chapter 3 - USE
Ignition key ........................................................................ 3
Driver’s seat and multi-function armrest ........................... 4
Steering wheel adjustments * ............................................. 7
Survey - in-cab controls ................................................... 11
Survey – instrument console ............................................ 13
Infocenter ......................................................................... 14
Warning and servicing display * ..................................... 21
Control switches ............................................................... 33
Suspended front axle * .................................................... 34
ASM * ............................................................................... 35
Interrupters for additional electric devices ....................... 40
Transmission gear shifting with PowerShuttle .................. 45
P.T.O. control .................................................................... 57
Checks before start-up, starting the engine and
starting the tractor .......................................................... 60
P.T.O. shaft operation ....................................................... 68
Lifting AGROTRONIC -hD ................................................ 72
Remote valves .................................................................. 80
Front towing and manoeuvring hitch .............................. 95
Front power lift * ............................................................. 98
Three-point hitch ........................................................... 114
Cab ................................................................................ 121
Connector sockets .......................................................... 128
*
The equipment marked with an asterisk may be standard or op-
tional items for all the models or just for some depending on the
type of market.
n
Sezione 3.pmd 1 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
n
CAUTION: DO NOT DISENGAGE THE CLUTCH AND/OR PUT THE
GEAR IN „NEUTRAL“ AFTER YOU HAVE STARTED DOWNHILL. avv034gb
n
REQUIRED. avv048gb
n
WARNING: DO NOT FILL FUEL TANK WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING,
HOT, NEAR OPEN FLAME OR WHILE SMOKING. TRACTOR
REFUELING SHOULD BE PERFORMED WITH THE ENGINE TURNED
OFF AND IN OPEN AIR. avv040gb
n
CAUTION: ALWAYS WEAR CLOTHING SUITABLE FOR THE TYPE OF
WORK TO BE PERFORMED. IF NECESSARY, USE HEARING
PROTECTION PLUGS AND WEAR EYE PROTECTION. avv090gb
n
DANGER: CONTACT BETWEEN THE TRACTOR OR ATTACHED
IMPLEMENTS AND HIGH-TENSION ELECTRICAL LINES MAY CAUSE
DEATH. IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH HIGH-TENSION ELECTRICAL
LINES, DO NOT GET DOWN FROM THE DRIVING POSITION, BUT
MANOEUVRE THE TRACTOR AND/OR IMPLEMENT TO ELIMINATE
THE CONTACT AND DRIVE AWAY TO A SAFE DISTANCE FROM THE
ELECTRICAL LINE. avv165gb
n
DANGER: DO NOT ALLOW PASSENGERS ON THE TRACTOR
UNLESS IT IS EQUIPPED WITH A SEAT SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS
PURPOSE. CARRYING PASSENGERS IN AN IRREGULAR FASHION
CAN OBSTRUCT THE DRIVER’S VIEW AND CONSEQUENTLY
JEOPARDISE SAFETY. avv100gb
n
CAUTION: STORE THE FUEL INTO THE TANKS, FOLLOWING THE
SAFETY RULES. avv111gb
Sezione 3.pmd 2 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Ignition key
The ignition key is used for both

doors, the ignition lock and the tank
lock.
7181-87
Unlocking the door *

To unlock the door turn key to the
left.
To open the door press the button in

the door handle.
7181-88
Children’s guard *
The door handles have a double
7181-89
catches to prevent accidental opening.
To open the doors from inside the
cab, turn the knob located by the
side of the driver upwards. The lock
on the left-hand door is fitted with a 2 1
lever (shown in the figure) which
allows the operator to lock the door
to prevent accidental opening. The
lock must be activated every time
that someone sits in the passenger
seat.
1= Door unlocked – may be opened from outside and inside
2= Door locked – may be opened only from outside
Sezione 3.pmd 3 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
7181-310
Driver’s seat
1 = Seat back-rest extension *, height adjustable and removable
2 = Lumbar vertebrae support
3 = Clamping handle for multi-function armrest
4 = Swivelling range, left - right
5 = Weight adjustment
6 = Height adjustment
7 = Horizontal springing
8 = Longitudinal adjustment
9 = Seat padding inclination adjustment
10 = Back-rest inclination adjustment handle
11= Seat depth adjustment handle
n
DANGER: NEVER ADJUST THE SEAT WHILE THE TRACTOR IS IN
MOTION! avv014gb
Sezione 3.pmd 4 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
7181-311
11
10
1
9
2
98
6
7
2
8
5
4
1
Sezione 3.pmd 5 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Driver’s seat
The driver’s seat is offered with the following configurations:
- EUROFIT DS 85 H/90 seat with adjustable armrests
- AEROFIT MSG 95 G-20 seat with adjustable arms and air suspension
- AEROMAT seat with adjustable arms and air suspension depending on the
weight of the driver
The AEROFIT MSG 95 G-20, AEROMAT seat and the low frequency seat are
available with armrests or with armrest and multifunctional control.
Seat adjustment functions

Eurofit Aerofit Aeromat
1 Adjustable headrest O O O
2 Armrest X X X
3 Knob to adjust the multifunction control - O O
4 Control to adjust the cradle of
the seat lengthways O O O
5 Control for manual height
adjustment of the seat O O O
6 Lever for lh-rh seat rotation O O O
7 Lever for lengthways adjustment
of the seat mounting X X X
8 Control to adjust the
air suspension of the seat - O O
- pneumatic adjustment indicator
according to the driver’s weight - - O
9 Catches to lock the seat oscillation system X X X
10 Control for lumbar adjustment
of the backrest O O O
11 Control to tilt the backrest O O O
X - Standard version O - Optional extra - Not available
n
WARNING: AN OPERATOR SHOULD NOT USE ALCOHOL OR
DRUGS WHICH CAN AFFECT HIS ALERTNESS OR CO-
ORDINATION. AN OPERATOR ON PRESCRIPTION OR ‘OVER THE
COUNTER’ DRUGS NEEDS MEDICAL ADVICE ON WHETHER OR
NOT HE OR SHE CAN SAFELY OPERATE MACHINES. avv019gb
Sezione 3.pmd 6 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Steering wheel adjustments

*
Adjusting the height: 1
Turn hand wheel 1 to the left to re-

lease the steering wheel lock.
Pull out or push in steering wheel.
Turn hand wheel 1 to the right and
lock steering wheel.
7181-93
Adjusting the tilt:
Push lever 2 downward. Adjust tilt.

Let lever go, steering wheel is again
properly locked in position.
2
7181-94
n
WARNING: LEARN TO USE THE TRACTOR BEFORE OPERATING IT.
DO NOT ALLOW OTHERS TO USE THE TRACTOR IF THEY ARE NOT
FAMILIAR WITH THE SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS REGARDING ITS avv006gb
USE.
n
DANGER: NEVER ADJUST THE STEERING WHEEL WITH THE
TRACTOR IN MOTION. THE DRIVER SHOULD MAKE CERTAIN THAT
avv013gb
THE WHEEL IS SUITABLY ADJUSTED BEFORE STARTING OFF.
n
WARNING: IF THE TRACTOR BEGINS TO TURNOVER, HOLD ON
TO THE STEERING WHEEL. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO JUMP CLEAR.
avv032gb
Sezione 3.pmd 7 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Adjustable multi-function arm
rest*
It permits the driver a stepless ad-

justment of the desired height as
well as tilting of the arm rest.
The arm rest is adjusted after having
unfixed the T-handle on the right.
CAUTION: Always check after

adjustment that the armrest se-
curing knob is fully screwed 7193-23
down.
Height adjustment
For adjusting the height, unfix the T-

handle and move the arm rest for-
wards at the same time lifting it.
Then, tighten T-handle again.
7193-24
Tilting
For tilting, completely remove the T-

handle. Now, the arm rest can be
tilted backwards.
After tilting, tighten the T-handle
again.
7193-25
Sezione 3.pmd 8 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Ignition lock 7181-95a
Re
p
Ignition key in position:
eti
r
rre
cio
ma
na
de
rra
Re
0 – all functions are off, except for
q
ue
10 Sec
Restart
Startwiederholung
I II
the hazard warning system and 0
the power socket
I – Preheat/Drive
II – Start
The ignition key can be removed in

position 0. It is also used to open
and close the doors.
n
avv033gb
CAUTION: BEFORE STARTING THE TRACTOR, CHECK ITS

CONDITION FOR OPERATING SAFETLY ON THE PUBLIC HIGHWAY.
n
CAUTION: CAREFULLY READ ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CONTAINED IN THE OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS LISTED ON THE TRACTOR’S
DECALS. avv008gb
Seat belts *
Seat belts, which are a legal require-

ment in certain countries, are fitted
as optional equipment. If your tractor
is not originally equipped with seat
belts, retrofit seat belt kits can be A
ordered from our Parts Service.
B C
Contact your local Dealer for further
information.
To fasten the seat belt, insert the
blade A into the slot B.
To relase the seat belt, press button 7181-433
C.
Sezione 3.pmd 9 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
To adjust the seat belt: pull end D to

shorten the belt
7181-434
or end E to lengthen the belt.
7181-435
n
CAUTION: ALWAYS FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT. THE USE OF A SEAT
BELT REDUCES THE RISK OF SERIOUS INJURY IN CASE OF AN
A C C I D E N T. avv016gb
n
WARNING: ONLY FIT SEAT BELTS TO SEATS FOR WHICH THEY ARE
INTENDED.
THE CORRESPONDING SEATS HAVE TO BE TESTED TOGETHER
WITH THE SAFETY BELT. avv170gb
10
Sezione 3.pmd 10 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
7216-8
Cab without multi-function armrest
Survey - in-cab controls

1 = Ignition lock
2 = Shift lever GEAR
3 = Auxiliary controller operation
4 = Power take-off shaft operation
5 = Engine speed/storage
6 = AGROTRONIC -hD operator panel
7 = Heating/air/conditionating system
8 = Armrest
9 = Hand throttle
10 = AGROTRONIC -hD operating lever
11 = Ashtray and cigarette lighter
12 = Fresh air regulator
13 = Hand brake
14 = Electrical switch
15 = Multifunction switch
16 = Travel direction switch F–N–R
17 = INFOCENTER
18 = Compressed air gauge *
19 = Powershift / Powershuttle display
20 = Power take-off shaft operation. Norm-Econ
21 = Radar switch
11
Sezione 3.pmd 11 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
7216-9
Cab with multi-function armrest

Survey - in-cab controls
1 = Ignition lock
2 = Shift lever GEAR
3 = Auxiliary controller operation
4 = Power take-off shaft operation
5 = Engine speed/storage
6 = AGROTRONIC -hD operator panel
7 = Heating/air/conditionating system
8 = Armrest
9 = Hand throttle
10= AGROTRONIC -hD operating lever
11 = Ashtray and cigarette lighter
12 = Fresh air regulator
13 = Hand brake
14 = Electrical switch
15 = Multifunction switch
16 = Powershuttle Travel direction switch F–N–R
17 = INFOCENTER
18 = Compressed air gauge *
19 = Powershift display
20 = Power take-off shaft operation Norm-Econ
21 = SHML – controller. This controller has the same function as the +/- pushbutton
on the gearshift lever: Lever forward = +, lever back = -.
22 = Radar switch
12
Sezione 3.pmd 12 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
5 6
P
bar
2 4 6
0 8
10
VDO
km/h
mph
4 L
N
3 7
11
13 12 11 10 9 7179-17
Survey – instrument console

1 = Air outlet nozzles
2 = Electrical switches
3 = Multi-purpose switch lever
4 = Powershuttle Travel direction switch F–N–R
5 = Air outlet nozzles
6 = INFOCENTER
7 = Powershuttle display
8 = Pressure gauge – air brake system *
9 = Accelerator pedal
10 = Service break
11 = Steering wheel tilt adjustment *
12 = Steering wheel height adjustment
13 = Clutch pedal
13
Sezione 3.pmd 13 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
4 5
3 6
1 2
P
EMC
14 16
12 18
km/h
mph
10 econ 20
1/min
8 22 rpm
1/min
6 24 rpm
X100 %
1/min
5 10 15 20 25 30
2 1 9 8 7
7214-4
INFOCENTER 2
Page
1 = Engine speed .................................................................................. 17

2 = Fuel level in tank ............................................................................ 16
3 = Engine teperature ........................................................................... 16
4 = Warning and pilot lights ....................................................... ....... 21
5 = Hours in operation .......................................................................... 17
6 = Ground speed ................................................................................. 19
7 = Front P.T.O. speed ........................................................................... 18
8 = Rear P.T.O. speed ............................................................................ 18
9 = Wheel slip (only when tractor is equipped with a radar sensor) ...... 19
14
Sezione 3.pmd 14 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
4 5 6
3 7
8
1 2
14 16
12 18
km/h
mph
10 econ 20
1/min
8 22 rpm
1/min
6 24 rpm
X100 %
1/min
5 10 15 20 25 30
2 1 11 10 9
7179-224
INFOCENTER 3 *
Page
1 = Engine speed .................................................................................. 17

2 = Fuel level in tank ............................................................................ 16
3 = Engine temperature ........................................................................ 16
4 = Warning and pilot lights .................................................................. 23
5 = Central warning light ...................................................................... 21
6 = Warning and servicing display.. ................................................... .. 21
7 = Hours in operation .......................................................................... 17
8 = Ground speed ................................................................................. 19
9 = Front P.T.O. speed ........................................................................... 18
10 = Rear P.T.O. speed .......................................................................... 18
11 = Wheel slip (only when tractor is equipped with a radar sensor) .... 19
n
CAUTION: NEVER LEAVE THE TRACTOR WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING,
UNLESS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. IN THIS CASE, PUT ALL TRANSMISSION
SHIFT LEVERS IN THE NO LOAD POSITION, SWITCH ON THE ALL-WHEEL
avv036gb ver 2
DRIVE AND PULL THE HAND BRAKE UP TO THE STOP.
15
Sezione 3.pmd 15 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Fuel level in tank

Never run the fuel tank completely
empty.
NOTE: If the needle is in the

blue section of the scale, the
temperature is too low; wait
until the needle enters the 7193-32
white section before putting
the engine under load.
Engine temperature
blue field = engine cold green field = operating temperature range
red field = engine temperature high
With cold engine – pointer in the
blue field – do not run the engine
under full load but at medium
speed. Once operating temperature
has been reached, the indicator may
move slightly within the green field
depending on engine utilisation.
If the indicator is in the red field, the
engine must be run for a while long-
er without loading to balance the 7193-33
temperature. Then clean / flush the
radiator and check the coolant level. If the cause cannot be eliminated,
have the tractor checked by a SAME DEUTZ-FAHR service dealership.
NOTE: If the arrow goes into the red zone, take the engine
down to idling speed straight away and leave it idling briefly in
order to cool it down. Then switch it off.
n
CAUTION: BY LOW TEMPERATURE, AFTER STARTING KEEP THE
ENGINE NOT ABOVE 1800 REV/MIN, UNTIL IT HAS REACHED THE
NORMAL WORKING TEMPERATURE. avv060gb
n
CAUTION: DURING TRACTOR REFUELING, ALWAYS TURN THE
ENGINE OFF AND CLEAN ANY FUEL SPILLED ON THE TRACTOR.
avv041gb
16
Sezione 3.pmd 16 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Engine speed
Displays the momentary engine 14 16
speed. 12 18
10 econ 20
The engine speed display also has
marks with P.T.O. symbols indicating 8 22
when the standard speed for a spe-
cific P.T.O. speed is reached. 6 24
X100
1/min
7193-34
Hours in operation
When the ignition is switched on the
number of hours in operation is dis-
played.
km/h
mph
7193-35
n
WARNING : KEEP THE TRACTOR LOCKED, USING A CHOCK, WHEN
PARKING ON SLEEP GROUND, REPAIRING OR MAINTENANCE
OPERATING. avv162gb
n
CAUTION: BEFORE USING THE TRACTOR, TAKE TIME TO
FAMILIARISE YOURSELF WITH ALL THE CONTROLS. avv007gb
17
Sezione 3.pmd 17 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Front P.T.O. speed *
When the front P.T.O. is engaged the 1/min

front P.T.O. speed is displayed in rpm
r.p.m.
1/min
rpm
5 10 15 20 25 30
7193-36
Rear P.T.O. speed

1/min
rpm
When the rear P.T.O. is engaged the
P.T.O. speed is displayed in r.p.m. 1/min
rpm
5 10 15 20 25 30
7193-37
n
DANGER: THE DRIVEN IMPLEMENTS COULD ROTATE FOR SOME
TIME AFTER P.T.O. HAS BEEN DISENGAGED. PLEASE STOP THE
TRACTOR ENGINE AND WAIT UNTIL ALL THE MOVING PARTS OF
IMPLEMENT HAVE COME TO A COMPLETE STANDSTILL, BEFORE
TO START ANY SERVICING OPERATION. avv068gb
n
DANGER: DO NOT CONNECT, DISCONNECT OR ADJUST PTO
WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING AND THE IGNITION KEY NOT
REMOVED. avv070gb
n
CAUTION: BEFORE DISMOUNTING, ALWAYS DISENGAGE THE
P.T.O., LOWER ALL ATTACHMENTS AND IMPLEMENTS TO THE
GROUND, ENGAGE PARKING BRAKE, SHUT OFF THE ENGINE,
ENGAGE THE LOWEST GEAR (IF MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION)
AND REMOVE THE KEY. WITH HYDRAULIC TRANSMISSION OR
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION OR POWERSHUTTLE, ALWAYS
CHOCK THE TRACTOR WHEELS. avv038gb
18
Sezione 3.pmd 18 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Ground speed
When you start driving the tractor
the ground speed is displayed in
km/h or mph.
NOTE: Only engage creep

speeds after having first
selected the slow range L, at a
maximum speed of 2 km/h
km/h
(1,24 mph), and with the mph
clutch pedal depressed or with 7193-38
the shuttle control lever in
neutral position.
Wheel slip *
Wheel slip is displayed up to 30%.
1/min
Above 15 km/h (9.3 mph) there is rpm
no more wheel slip display.
1/min
Only when tractor is equipped with rpm
a radar sensor.
%
5 10 15 20 25 30
7193-39
NOTE: Before starting the tractor, the shuttle control lever must
be in neutral position.
NOTE: When working on steep gradients, take care to ensure
that all moving parts receive adequate lubrication.
n
WARNING: YOUR TRACTOR IS A ONE-PERSON MACHINE. DO
NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO RIDE ON THE TRACTOR OR THE
IMPLEMENT. IN SOME TERRITORIES A PASSENGER SEAT MUST BE
FITTED TO CARRY PASSENGERS. DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO
RIDE ON THE IMPLEMENTS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT INCLUDING
TRAILERS, EXCEPT ON CERTAIN HARVESTING EQUIPMENT,
SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR RIDERS DURING THE ACTUAL
HARVEST OPERATION ONLY (NOT DURING TRANSPORT). SUCH
EQUIPMENT MUST HAVE PROVISION FOR A SAFE RIDING AREA.
DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN ON THE TRACTOR. avv151gb
19
Sezione 3.pmd 19 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Calibrating the ground speed
For the calibration, a straight refer-
ence track of 100 m (328 ft) length
has to be measured and marked out
on a paved road. Call up calibration:
– Ignition is “OFF”.
– Switch on the hazard warning
system.
– Road lights are off.
– Depress the high beam switch
while switching on the ignition and
starting the engine.
– Remove finger from the switch 7193-40
when the word “CAL” appears in
Display 1.
Start running the tractor. When the

tractor passes the 0 m mark quickly
press the high beam switch (calibra-
tion START signal). Drive the tractor
over the 100 m (328 ft) measuring
track and when passing the 100 m
(328 ft) mark press again the high 2
beam switch (calibration STOP signal).
While the tractor is running over the
100 m (328 ft) measuring track the
1
counting pulses of the speed sensor
km/h
appear in Display 2. mph
After the calibration, the INFOCENT- 7193-41
ER performs a self-check and is then
ready again for operation.
Note:
The calibration is for the speed range between 0 and 15 km/h (0 to 9.3
mph).
Important:
During calibration:
– Run the tractor at a minimum speed of 2 km/h (1.2428 mph).
– Do not exceed a speed of 15 km/h (9.3 mph).
If an error was made during calibration, “ERR” will appear in Display 1. Re-
peat the calibration procedure.
Important: If tractors are fitted with radar sensor, calibration must be un-
dertaken after every wheel change.
20
Sezione 3.pmd 20 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Warning and servicing display *
Only for INFOCENTER 3.
The following hints may appear in

the warning and servicing display.
14 16
12 18
km/h
mph
econ 20
TB-0618
NOTE: Fault codes are signalled by a sequence of flashes on

the lamp with the hazard warning symbol. In some fault
conditions, an audible signal will be emitted as well.
Message:
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
STOP ENGINE NOW
LOW PRESSURE IN THE STEERING SYSTEM
ALTERNATOR NO FUNCTION
NO GEARBOX OIL PRESSURE
ATTENTION: GEARBOX OVERSPEEDING
REAR P.T.O. SPEED OVER 1200 RPM
21
Sezione 3.pmd 21 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
LOW AIR PRESSURE
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
AIR FILTER BLOCKED
Engine air filter
CLEAN AIR FILTER
Engine air filter
AIR FILTER CLEANED
Engine air filter
FUEL TANK LOW
PREHEAT
START
SLIP GREATER THAN 20%
ATTENTION: SERVICE
22
Sezione 3.pmd 22 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Survey – Warning and pilot lights
Green function display
Turn signal pilot light – tractor
1 Turn signal pilot light – 1st trailer
2 Turn signal pilot light – 2nd trailer
Front P.T.O. engaged
Rear P.T.O. engaged
Road range switched on
Field range switched on
Differential lock engaged
4-WD engaged
EMC Electronic engine speed control (INFOCENTER 2)
Blue function displays
High beam, headlight flasher
Yellow displays
Heater plug indicator. Lights up when ignition key is in Position I. A

temperature-controlled relay terminates preheating, and the light
comes off.
Dry-type air filter requires cleaning or renewal.
Red warning lights
Alternator no function
Low engine oil pressure. Stop engine now!
Gearbox oil pressure low. Gearbox overspeeding
Brake fluid level and Parking brake is applied (INFOCENTER 2)
Hydraulic trailer brakes
Pressure test in the engine hydraulic circuit supply system
Low steering circuit pressure
23
Sezione 3.pmd 23 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Turn signal pilot light

1 2 3
Green pilot light 1 flashes; tractor
turn signal light is on.
Green pilot light 2 flashes; turn sig-
nal light on first trailer is on. 1 2
Green pilot light 3 flashes; turn sig-
nal light on second trailer is on.
7193-43
High beam pilot light

The blue pilot light goes on with the
high beam switched on or when
actuating the headlight flasher.
1 2
7193-44
n
CAUTION: WHEN TRAVELLING ON PUBLIC ROADS, ALWAYS KEEP
THE REQUIRED SAFETY LIGHTS TURNED ON. IF NECESSARY,
EQUIP THE TRACTOR WITH REFLECTING BANDS OR OTHER
REFLECTING DEVICES. DO NOT USE THE WORKING LIGHTS ON
PUBLIC ROADS. avv050gb
n
WARNING: DO NOT ENGAGE THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK IN THE
FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:- ON TRAVELLING AT SPEED ABOVE 15
KM/H (9,32 MPH), ON STEERING, WHEN THE TWO BRAKE PEDALS
ARE NOT LOCKED TOGETHER. avv053gb
24
Sezione 3.pmd 24 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
4-WD pilot light

The green pilot light goes on to sig-
nal that the 4-WD is engaged.
1 2
7193-45
Differential lock pilot light

The green pilot light goes on to sig-
nal that the differential lock is en-
gaged. Simultaneously the 4-WD is
engaged automatically – the green 1 2
pilot light for the 4-WD comes on as
well.
7193-46
Shifting range pilot light 1

The telltales (1) and (2) are not used
in these tractors.
2
7216-10
25
Sezione 3.pmd 25 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
Charge warning light

Lights up when the ignition is
switched on and must come off with
the engine running.
In case the red charge warning light
stays on with the engine running,
the battery is not being charged. If
the trouble cause cannot be elimi-
nated, have the tractor checked at a
DEUTZ-FAHR workshop.
7179-232
Engine oil pressure pilot light

The red light goes on when the en-
gine oil pressure is insufficient.
If the trouble cause cannot be elimi-
7179-233
Gearbox oil pressure pilot light

POWERSHIFT
The red pilot light is illuminated
upon excessively low gearbox oil
pressure.
When the pilot light flashes, the
gearbox is overspeeding.
If the trouble cause cannot be elimi-
7179-234
26
Sezione 3.pmd 26 20/12/2004, 10.24

CHAPTER 3 Use
n
WARNING: IF THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT STAYS ON
WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING, SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE
IMMEDIATELY. avv049gb
NOTE: The „limited operation“ program allows you to continue

working. However we recommend that you contact your
specialised service centre as soon as possible.
NOTE: The „replacement operation“ program allows you to
complete the task in hand. Contact your specialised service
centre immediately afterwards.
Electronic engine speed control (EMC)
Failure indications:
Failure indications of the system are
signalized as follows:
Pilot light flashing:
- System can be operated to a limited 1
degree, i.e. one of the three components
accelerator pedal, hand throttle or
keyboard EMC is out of function. EMC
The work can be continued; however,
it is recommended to contact a
7214-5
Pilot light lighted:
- System cannot be operated, engine stops. Inform DEUTZ-FAHR after-sales
service.
Preheating pilot light

This yellow light comes on when the
ignition key is in Position I.
A temperature-controlled relay ter-
minates preheating, and the light 2
comes off. The engine is ready to
start.
7179-237
27
Sezione 3.pmd 27 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Parking brake warning light

The red warning light is on to signal
P
that the parking brake is applied.
To drive off, release the parking
brake.
When this indicator lights up on re-
leasing the handbrake, top up the
level of brake fluid in the reservoir to
MAX and have the braking system km/h
tested by a DEUTZ-FAHR dealer. mph
7214-7
Parking brake warning light *

(for Italy only) (INFOCENTER 2)
P
When this indicator lights up on re-
leasing the handbrake, it warns that
there is a fault in the hydraulic trailer
braking system. Stop the tractor im-
mediately, switch off the engine and
contact DEUTZ-FAHR customer serv-
ice. km/h
mph
7214-8
Inadequacy oil pressure in the

idraulic steering system warning
light
Steering system indicator. When the
red steering indicator lights up, it
warns that there is a fault in the 1
hydraulic steering system. The steer-
ing will still function but is harder to
operate. (Emergency steering) Stop EMC
the tractor immediately, switch off
the engine and contact DEUTZ-FAHR
customer service. 7214-6
28
Sezione 3.pmd 28 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
P.T.O. shaft pilot lights

1
The green P.T.O. display symbol light
comes on to signal that the P.T.O. is
engaged.
1 = Front P.T.O. *
2 = Rear P.T.O.
2
7179-238
Dry-type air filter pilot light
When the yellow pilot light is illumi-

nated, the dry-type air filter must be
cleaned or renewed, see chapter
“Maintenance”.
7179-235
Pressure test in the engine hy-

draulic circuit supply system
warning light
7179-240
29
Sezione 3.pmd 29 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
P.T.O. shaft speeds

2
The exact P.T.O. speed is additionally 14 16
indicated digitally in the display: 12 18
1
1 = Standard speed: 10 econ 20
– 540/1000/min rear P.T.O.
– 1000/min front P.T.O. 8 22
2 = econ = energy-saving rear P.T.O.

6 24
– 540 econ/min 1000 econ/min
rear P.T.O. only X100
1/min
7193-48
Air pressure gauge for air brake system *

For filling the air accumulator, start
the engine and keep it running at
medium speed until the pointer is in
the yellow-green field, 5–9 bar
(72,52-130,52 psi).
Also during driving, the pointer 0
2
4 6
8
should be in the yellow-green field,

10
5–9 bar (72,52-130,52 psi).

Upon permanent braking, the pointer
may leave the yellow-green field for
a short time below 5 bar (72,52 psi).
If, however, the pointer should per- 7193-49
manently leave the yellow-green
field below 5 bar (72,52 psi), the air brake system must be checked in a
For tractors whose air pressure gauge is not colour-marked, the values indi-
cated in parantheses are valid.
n
WARNING: DIESEL ENGINE EXHAUST AND SOME OF ITS
CONSTITUENTS ARE KNOWN TO SOME STATES TO CAUSE
CANCER, BIRTH DEFECTS AND OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM. avv142gb
n
CAUTION: ALWAYS RESPECT THE NATIONAL RULES AND THE
ROADWAY LEGISLATION. avv010gb
30
Sezione 3.pmd 30 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Multi-purpose switch lever
7181-114
Activating the turn signal – without automatic resetting

1 = Turn signal, right – engage lever upward
2 = Turn signal, left – engage lever downward
Activating the turn signal – with automatic resetting *

This additionally permits a short activation of the turn signal by TOUCHING
– not enganging – the lever.
The automatic turn signal resetting takes place as a function of driving
speed and distance. The higher the speed, the greater the distance passed
until the turn signal is reset.
Functional description:
By shortly touching – less than 0.7 seconds –, the turn signal is switched on.
Disconnection takes place automatically.
By shortly touching – less than 0.7 seconds – into the opposite direction, the
turn signal can also manually be switched off.
If touching should last for more than 0.7 seconds, the turn signal is imme-
dieately switched off after having released the lever.
n
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT ANY IMPLEMENTS ATTACHED TO THE
TRACTOR DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOADS
INDICATED BY THE MANUFACTURER. avv086gb
31
Sezione 3.pmd 31 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
3 = Horn – press button

4 = Headlight flasher – briefly actu-
ate lever toward steering wheel
5 = High beam – actuate lever to-
ward steering wheel
3
4
5
7181-115
6 = Windscreen washer – press on

ring
7 = Windscreen wiper stages – turn
ring: J
0 – Wiper off I
J – Intermittent wiping
I – Continuous wiping O
7
7181-116
Hazard warning lights
Also functioning with engine shut off

and ignition key removed.
When this switch is pressed, all lights
also those of any attached trailers TOP
flash. The hazard warning lights are

shut off by pressing again the func-
tion switch.
7193-53
32
Sezione 3.pmd 32 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Control switches located on left of dashboard under the steering
wheel
On the left of the dashboard under
the steering wheel there are three TOP
switches that control the tractor 1 3 2

lights.
1 - side lights / low beam / high

beam headlamps
Position 1: tractor side lights on.
Position 2: side lights and low
beam headlamps (the head-
7214-50
lamps can be switched from low
beam to high beam and vice
versa using the steering column
switch). When the ignition is
switched off, only the parking
light remains illuminated. 7214-9
2 - front work lights

Position 1: the 2 corner lights (rh
and lh) and the two work lights
on top of the cab.
Position 2: the 5 work lights posi-
tioned on the front grille only.
3 - Changeover switch for top/bottom headlights *

When in the TOP position, the headlights in the front grille are switched
off.
The duplicate set of headlights over the side marker lights function.
They serve as additional headlights when front-mounted implements are
fitted. They function in the same way as parking / dipped beam / main
beam headlights.
These headlights may only be used if implements cover the lower
headlights.
n
CAUTION: ON TRAVELLING ON THE PUBBLIC ROAD WITH FRONT
IMPLEMENTS, IF THE VISIBILITY IS NOT ENOUGH (TRAFFIC LIGHTS
COVERED BY THE ATTACHED IMPLEMENT), PLEASE SWITCH ON
THE WORKING LIGHTS. avv121gb
33
Sezione 3.pmd 33 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Suspended front axle *
Depending on the version, the trac-

tor is provided with a suspended 1
front axle. ASM
1 = Switch front axle suspension.

The front axle may be equipped with
an optional electronically controlled
suspension.
On axles equipped with this system,
the steering angle and oscillation
angle are exactly the same as on a 7193-57
conventional axle. The electronic

control system ensures that the sus-
pension is always maintained at the
optimum level regardless of the load
applied to the front of the tractor,
even when the front axle is in condi-
tion of maximum oscillation. For
tasks where increased traction is
required, the suspension system can
be disabled to obtain a rigid front
axle and improved weight distribu-
tion. To activate the suspension,
press pushbutton 7193-58
Functional description
For connecting and disconnecting the front axle suspension, the spring-load-
ed tumbler switch must be operated. The connected condition is indicated
by the lighted symbol in the switch. Additionally, with the tractor standing
still connection of the suspension may be recognized by a slightly raised
engine cowling.
When the system is disengaged, the front axle is automatically lowered to
the minimum height position.
The front axle suspension system is activated when the tractor speed ex-
ceeds the programmed value of 2 km/h (1.2428 mph).
If the suspension control is activated when the engine is started, the suspen-
sion will be engaged automatically. The symbol on the switch will light up.
If with connected front axle suspension the ignition is shut off and the trac-
tor is then newly started, the front axle suspension is automatically connect-
ed again – the symbol in the switch is lighted
For works to be performed at the draft control of the AGROTRONIC -
hD, we recommend to disconnect the front axle suspension.
NOTE: In the event of a fault, the symbol on the front axle
suspension control switch will flash and the suspension will be
disengaged. In this case, the system should be checked by an
authorised service centre.
34
Sezione 3.pmd 34 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
1 2
ASM
7193-59
Front axle drive, differential lock, driveline management (ASM)

The front axle drive and the differential lock serve for improving the driving
power e.g. on rough ground, on slippery fields or upon cross ploughing on
the slope.
The ASM automatically engages/disengages front axle drive and differential
lock in response to ground speed, steer angle and wheel slip.
Engaging/disengaging takes place upon activating the respective switch.
The operating condition is indicated by pilot lights in the respective LED in
the INFOCENTER.
NOTE: If front-wheel drive is selected and the diff lock is
engaged when the ASM system is deactivated, the front-wheel
drive and diff lock will operate independently of the steering
angle and the ground speed. We therefore recommend
disengaging front-wheel drive and the diff lock before
switching off the ASM system.
35
Sezione 3.pmd 35 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Front axle drive

If activated, the symbol light in the
switch as well in the INFOCENTER
come on. Shifting under load is pos-
ASM
sible.
If with engaged front axle drive the
ASM switch should not be activated,
the front axle drive remains engaged
irrespective of steering angle or driv-
ing speed.
7193-60
Differential lock
When activated, the symbol light in the switch comes on for monitoring. At the
same time, the symbols for the differential lock as well as for the front axle drive
are lighted in the INFOCENTER. Shifting under load is possible.
Upon activation, the multi-disc dif-
ferential locks in the rear axle and in
the front axle are engaged. At the
same time, the front axle drive is
ASM
engaged automatically. If with en-

gaged differential lock the ASM
switch should not be activated, the
differential lock and the front axle
drive always remain engaged irre-
spective of the steering angle or the
driving speed. 7193-61
n
WARNING: DO NOT ENGAGE THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK IN THE
FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:- ON TRAVELLING AT SPEED ABOVE 15
KM/H (9,32 MPH), ON STEERING, WHEN THE TWO BRAKE PEDALS
ARE NOT LOCKED TOGETHER. avv121gb
36
Sezione 3.pmd 36 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
1 2
ASM
7193-59
ASM*
Driveline Management
The ASM automatically engages/disengages 4-WD and differential lock in
response to ground speed, steer angle and wheel slip.

37
Sezione 3.pmd 37 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
ASM – Four wheel drive
Note: If only the ASM switch is

switched on, neither the front axle
drive nor the differential locks
work.
ASM and 4-WD switches are pressed

– display symbol lights in the switch- ASM
es come on.
The following functions are automat-
ically switched
7193-62
Four wheel drive On Off

Ground speed < 13 km/h (8,07 mph) x
Ground speed > 15 km/h (9,32 mph) x
Steering angle < 30° x
Steering angle > 30° x
Differential lock On Off

Wheelslip < 20° x
Wheelslip > 25° x
Brake pedal actuated x
Brake pedal not actuated x
< = less than

> = greater than
38
Sezione 3.pmd 38 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
ASM – Differential lock
ASM and differential lock switches

are pressed – display symbol lights in
the switches come on.
The following functions are automat-

ically switched, regardless of whether
the all-wheel drive is switched on or ASM
off.
7193-63
Four wheel drive On Off

Differential lock On Off

Brake pedal actuated x
Brake pedal not actuated x
Despite the built-on Radarsensor* the differential locks are not switched
wheelslip-dependent.
With the built-on Radarsensor*, in the case of wheelslip greater than 25%,
the differential locks are automatically switched on. For a wheelslip of less
than 20% the differential locks are switched off again.
39
Sezione 3.pmd 39 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Switchs on right side for additional electric devices

Rotary flashlight *
The switch for the rotary flashlight *
is arranged in the right control con-
sole.
When operating the rotary flashlight,
the symbol in the switch is lighted.
7216-3
Rear screen wiper *

The switch for the rear screen wiper *
is arranged in the right control con-
sole.
When operating the wiper, the sym-
bol in the switch is lighted.
Stage 1: Wiping
Stage 2: Washing and wiping
7216-4
n
CAUTION: WHEN TRAVELLING ON PUBLIC ROADS, ALWAYS KEEP
THE REQUIRED SAFETY LIGHTS TURNED ON. IF NECESSARY,
EQUIP THE TRACTOR WITH REFLECTING BANDS OR OTHER
REFLECTING DEVICES. DO NOT USE THE WORKING LIGHTS ON
PUBLIC ROADS. avv050gb
40
Sezione 3.pmd 40 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Worklights, rear *
Functioning only with ingition on.
If activated, the symbol in the switch
comes up for monitoring.
They serve for large-space illumina-
tion in the dark.
Lamp position depending on the
version:
– Cab roof, rear and/or
– Fender/cab, rear
7216-5
Automatic P.T.O.
The AUTOMATIC P.T.O. is designed so
that the rear P.T.O. shaft can be
stopped when the UP control of the
hydraulic lift is operated to raise the
links.
The system is activated by pressing a
dedicated switch with a built-in indi-
cator that lights up to confirm the
ON status of the automatic declutch-
7216-6
ing device.
The device will cut in automatically
to shut off the rear P.T.O. whenever
the lift links UP control is operated.
To restore operation of the rear
P.T.O., the clutch button must be
pressed again
AUTOMATIC P.T.O. remains activated OFF
as long as the indicator remains
alight, and in this situation the rear
P.T.O. shaft will stop turning immedi- ON
ately every time the UP control of
the hydraulic lift is selected.
To deselect the AUTOMATIC P.T.O.
system, return the switch to the OFF
position (built-in indicator no longer 7216-7
alight).
41
Sezione 3.pmd 41 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Service brake – steering brake

1 = Brake pedal acting on left rear
wheel 3
2 = Brake pedal acting on right rear
wheel
3 = Interlocking pin
1 2
7193-70
Main clutch
To operate the clutch fully depress

pedal. For starting slowly release
pedal.
7193-71
n
CAUTION: APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE AFTER THE ENGINE HAS
STOPPED AND BEFORE LEAVING THE TRACTOR. avv017gb
n
CAUTION: AVOID KEEPING THE CLUTCH PEDAL DEPRESSED
WHEN THE TRACTOR IS STATIONARY. SELECT NEUTRAL, EVEN
WHEN STOPPING FOR BRIEF PERIODS. avv056gb
n
WARNING: REMEMBER THAT STEERING, BRAKING AND TRACTOR
PERFORMANCE IN GENERAL WILL BE GREATLY AFFECTED BY THE
IMPLEMENTS ATTACHED, THE TRAILERS TOWED OR THE BALLAST
APPLIED. avv051gb
42
Sezione 3.pmd 42 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Accelerator pedal
For on-road tractor operation and
working at variable speeds.
7193-72
Manual throttle
For operation of implements working
at constant speed.
Infinitely adjustable.
+ -
7193-73
n
CAUTION: TRAVELLING ON ROAD, USE THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL
ONLY AND NOT THE HAND THROTTLE LEVER. avv058gb
n
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO CARRY OUT ANY
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ON THE TRACTOR OR AN ATTACHED
IMPLEMENT UNLESS THE ENGINE IS SWITCHED OFF, THE
GEARBOX IS IN NEUTRAL, THE PTO IS DISENGAGED, THE
HANDBRAKE IS APPLIED AND ANY ATTACHED IMPLEMENT IS
avv104gb
LOWERED TO THE GROUND.
43
Sezione 3.pmd 43 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
7179-40
Actuating elements right
1 = Gear shift lever 9 = Electronic engine speed/storage

2 = SHML – controller 10 = Switch for electrical supplemen-
3 = Hand throttle tary devices *
4 = Auxiliary control gear 11 = Operator panel: AGROTRONIC
5 = Front power take-off* -hD *
6 = Rear power take-off 12 = Operating lever: AGROTRONIC
7 = Rear power take-off speeds se- -hD *
lector lever 13 = Shift lever for Powershift
8 = P.T.O. econ. selector lever
7179-243
Actuating elements right (wihtout adjusta-

ble multi-function arm rest)
44
Sezione 3.pmd 44 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
7179-43
Transmission gear shifting with PowerShuttle
The powershift transmission with PowerShuttle is operated with an electro-

hydraulically controlled clutch. Such, starting and changing the driving direc-
tion is possible with or without operating the clutch pedal.
While the driver initiates the change of the driving direction with the com-
mutator switch, the electronic control automatically reverses the vehicle.
1 = Commutator switch F–N–R

2 = POWERSHIFT display
3 = Transmission shifting lever
4 = Shifting lever creeper speeds
The creeper speed range must only be selected for driving speeds of up to
2 km/h (1,24 mph) and with the commutator switch in the neutral position
or disengaged clutch.
45
Sezione 3.pmd 45 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Commutator switch F–N–R
F = Forward
N = neutral
R = reverse
S F
With the commutator switch, the H N
driving direction can be changed with M
or without activating the clutch. Draw L
the lever towards the steering wheel R
and select the desired driving direc-
N
tion. The selected driving direction is
indicated in the POWERSHIFT display. 7214-51gb
n
RISK OF INJURY: WHEN CHANGING OVER AT A LOW TRANSMISSION
RATIO, VERY HIGH RETARDATION AND ACCELERATION FORCES OCCUR.
46
Sezione 3.pmd 46 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Powershift Display
When the ignition is switched on the
transmission symbol 1 lights up.
S
H 1
M
L
3 2
7214-16
Acoustical warning signal
An acoustical warning signal is re-

leased upon:
– excessively rapid reversing
S
– reversing at a sped of more than
H 1
10 km/h (6,21 mph)
M
L
– an error indication, e.g. E...
3 N 2
7214-17
Failure code display
To avoid damage to the drive system, the occurring failures will be indicated
as follows:
– The failure indication 3 lights up.
– The failure is displayed by a two-digit code 2.
– Depending on the severety of the failure the transmission shifts to neutral
or to the standby driving program.
47
Sezione 3.pmd 47 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
POWERSHIFT display
1 = Indication forward/reverse driv-

ing
2 = Transmission symbol S 1
3 = Indication “neutral”/failure code 5 H 2
number M
4 = Failure indication L
5 = Indication 4-range POWERSHIFT
4 3
TB-0146
Gear shifting
- Commutator switch into neutral 1 3 5
position or activate clutch pedal
- Select desired gear 2 4 6
- Use Powershuttle lever to select

direction of travel. The tractor
moves in the direction selected.
TB-0450
The driving speed is changed under

load via the two switches.
The selected powershift range is
indicated as follows in the POWER-
SHIFT display:
S
S = rapid H
H = high + M
M = medium L
-
L = slow
+ = select higher gear
– = select lower gear
When changing the driving direction
to “reverse”, this is done in the same TB-0627
powershift range as “forward”. The

powershift ranges can be shifted.
48
Sezione 3.pmd 48 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Shifting with splitter gear

Depress the clutch pedal and move
the range shift lever to the desired
splitter range.
H = Fast (high) range
M = Medium range
L = Slow (low) range
STOP
R = Reverse range
The 4 Powershift ranges are availa-

ble for each of the 6 transmission TB-0622
gears.
Creeper range
1 = desengage creeper
2 = engage creeper
2
Creep gears and creeper range may
be used under full load within the
permissible axle load limits and un-
der normal agricultural working con-
ditions.
Do not use the creep gears to in-
crease the traction. 1
7193-80
Instructions for shifting the creep gear:

Engaging:
- Commutator switch into neutral position or activate clutch pedal
- Creeper engage (Maximum tractor speed for engaging the creep gear: 2
km/h (1,24 mph))
Disengaging:
- Commutator switch into neutral position or keep clutch pedal depressed
- Wait – bring creeper range lever to OFF position
NOTE: Only engage creep speeds after having first selected the
slow range L, at a maximum speed of 2 km/h (1,24 mph), and
with the clutch pedal depressed or with the shuttle control lever
in neutral position.
49
Sezione 3.pmd 49 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Standby driving program

In case of failure codes starting with the letter E, for example E9, the trans-
mission shifts automatically to the standby driving program.
Unhindered driving is further ensured, however a limitation of powershifting
may be noticed (driving only possible in range L)
For reversing (change of the driving direction), 3 of the following conditions
must be fulfilled at the minimum:
– Tractor standing still – tractor speed = 0 km/h (0 mph).
– Gear shift lever in neutral.
– Fully depress clutch pedal for 1 second at a minimum.

50
Sezione 3.pmd 50 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Failure indications
1 = Indication forward/reverse driv-

ing
2 = Transmission symbol S 1
3 = Indication “neutral”/failure code 5 H 2
number M
4 = Failure indication L
5 = Indication POWERSHIFT range
4 3
TB-0146
Acoustical warning signal

An acoustical warning signal will sound upon:
– too rapid reversing,
– reversing at a speed of more than 12.5 km/h (7,77 mph),
– a failure indication.
Failure indications
At specified intervals, the control system performs a check of the tractor
operation. To avoid damage to the drive system, the failures occurring will
be indicated as follows:
– The failure indication 4 is illuminated.
– An acoustical warning signal is sounding.
– The failure is indicated as 2-digit code 3.
– Depending on the severity of the failure, the control system will
automatically switch over to another driving program.
Failure codes
The failures are indicated in the POWERSHIFT display as 2-digit code. The
meaning of the failure code numbers may be taken from the table on page
52.

51
Sezione 3.pmd 51 20/12/2004, 10.25

52
Sezione 3.pmd
Failure Driving program Meaning/function
code
10 - 20 Normal driving Minor failure, tractor continues to work normally.
Starting/changing the driving direction delayed or possible only with jerks.
CHAPTER 3
21 Normal driving Driving speed too high. Reduce tractor speed until the failure code is extinguished.
If the failure code should not become extinguished, consult a
52
22 Normal driving Transmission oil temperature too high.
Reduce load on the tractor until failure code is extinguished.
If the failure code should not become extinguished, consult a
27 - 41 Limited driving Powershifting blocked.
47 - 58 Stand-by driving Powershifting blocked.
program Conditions for starting and changing the driving direction:
– Upon tractor standstill, commutation switch in neutral position for at least
1 second
Have failure eliminated in a DEUTZ-FAHR workshop.
64 - 70 Emergency driving Powershifting blocked.
program No function of the service clutch - driving only possible via commutation switch.
Conditions for starting and changing the driving direction:
– Upon tractor standstill, commutation switch in neutral position for at least
1 second
Contact a DEUTZ-FAHR workshop without delay and have the failure
20/12/2004, 10.25
eliminated.
Meaning of the failure code numbers in the POWERSHIFT display
76 - 99 Driving impossible Contact DEUTZ-FAHR workshop.

Use
CHAPTER 3 Use
NOTE: In the case of failure code numbers 47, 48 and 49, the driving
direction can be changed also upon speeds above 12.5 km/h (7,77
mph) – risk of accident.
Absolutely ensure that, upon a change of the driving direction, the
speed of 12.5 km/h (7,77 mph) is not exceeded.
NOTE: When driving in the emergency program (failure code 64–70),

the power flux cannot be interrupted via the clutch pedal. This is only
possible with the aid of the commutator switch – risk of accident. Im-
mediately have the defect eliminated in a DEUTZ-FAHR workshop.
This information must absolutely be notified to all users of the tractor.
NOTE: In the case of failure code 21, the driving speed is too high.
Reduce tractor speed until the failure code is extinguished. If the fail-
ure cannot be eliminated by reducing the speed, consult a DEUTZ-
FAHR workshop.
NOTE: In the case of failure code 22, the transmission oil temperature
is too high.
Reduce load on the tractor until the failure code is extinguished. If the
failure cannot be eliminatd by reducing the load, consult a DEUTZ-
FAHR workshop.
n
WARNING: REDUCE YOUR SPEED, ENGAGING A LOWER GEAR,
WHEN TRAVEL DOWNHILL OR OVER ROUGH GROUND AND
BEFORE TO TURN. avv052gb
53
Sezione 3.pmd 53 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Electronic engine speed controller (EMR)
1 = Key maximum speed (MAX)
2 = Memory key (MEMORY)
3 = Key minimum speed (MIN)
With the electronic engine speed 1 2 3
controller, three alternatives for ad-
justing the engine speed are given:
– Accelerator pedal
M
A
X
M
D
E
M
N
I
– Hand throttle
– Keyboard EMR
7179-01a
Cab with multi-function armrest
Pilot light EMR

DEUTZ
The pilot light for the electronic en- FAHR
gine controller is arranged on the
right operating bracket. 1 + MAX
When connecting the ignition, the

2 MEM
pilot light is repeatedly flashing
shortly.
3 MIN
During normal operation of the sys-
tem, the pilot light extinguishes with Tb-0960
running engine.
Failure indications
Failure indications of the system are signalized as follows:
– Pilot light flashing:
System can be operated to a limited degree, i.e. one of the three
components accelerator pedal, hand throttle or keyboard EMR is out of
function.
The work can be continued; however, it is recommended to contact a
– Pilot light lighted:
System cannot be operated, engine stops. Inform DEUTZ-FAHR after-sales
service.
54
Sezione 3.pmd 54 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Functional description
The engine speed controller has a
tempomat function. For example
with increasing engine load the
speed controller automatically per-
forms a re-adjustment. Such, con- 1 2 3
stant engine and P.T.O. speeds are
ensured during the work.
Moreover, the engine speed control-
M
A
X
M
D
E
M
N
I
ler permits to store different engine
speeds preselected via the accelera-
tor pedal which can be recalled, if
required. 7179-01a
When shutting down the engine, the
speeds stored last remain stored. Cab with multi-function armrest
Storing and recalling the upper speed
Storing of the upper desired speed is

only possible from 1500 min-1. DEUTZ
FAHR
– With the accelerator pedal, set the
desired upper speed (at least 1 + MAX
1500 min-1)
– Keep key 1 (MAX) pressed for
2 MEM
about 5 seconds
– Release key 1
– Release accelerator pedal 3 MIN
Tb-0960
The desired upper speed is now stored. To reach again the idle speed,
shortly press key 2 (MEM).
When again shortly pressing the MAX key, the engine is automatically con-
trolled to the upper stored speed.
The MAX store can only be recalled, if the hand throttle is in the “0” posi-
tion. When operating the hand throttle, the speed cannot be stored.
By storing a new upper speed, the actual store is overwritten.
55
Sezione 3.pmd 55 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Storing and recalling the lower speed
The lower desired speed can only be stored in the speed range between
800 min-1 and 1500 min-1.
– Set the desired lower speed with the accelerator pedal (min. 800 min-1,
max. 1500 min-1)
– Keep key 3 (MIN) pressed for about 5 seconds
– Release key 3
– Release accelerator pedal
The desired lower speed is now stored. To reach again the idle speed,
shortly press key 2 (MEM).
When again shortly pressing the key MIN, the engine is automatically set to
the lower stored speed.
The MIN store can only be recalled, if the hand throttle is in the “0” posi-
tion. When operating the hand throttle, the speed cannot be stored.
When storing a new lower speed, the actual store is overwritten.
Changing over between MIN and MAX stored speeds

The electronic engine speed controller permits to change over between the
stored upper and the stored lower speed, if the hand throttle is in the “0”
position. When pressing key 1 (MAX), the controller changes over to the
upper stored speed.
If key 2 (MIN) is pressed, the controller automatically changes over to the
lower stored speed.
This procedure can be repeated as often as desired.
Speed over-control
If a stored speed (MIN or MAX) is recalled, it can be over-controlled by acti-
vating the accelerator pedal.
The engine speed remains at the stored value until this speed has been
reached via the accelerator pedal. Then, the engine reacts on the accelerator
pedal. When releasing the accelerator pedal, the stored speed is set again.
Upon activating the manual throttle, the speed memory is put out of function.
Actual speed storing

It permits to maintain the actual engine speed selected via the accelerator
pedal.
The actual engine speed selected via the accelerator pedal is maintained by
pressing key 2 (MEM). Upon every new activation of key 2, this value is
overwritten. This speed is not stored, that means, it cannot be repeatedly
recalled.
n
CAUTION: WHEN TRANSPORTING HEAVY LOADS (EXCEEDING
THE TRACTOR’S WEIGHT) REDUCE THE SPEED TO UNDER 15 KM/H
(9.32 MPH). avv083gb
56
Sezione 3.pmd 56 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
P.T.O. control
Activation front and rear P.T.O.
1
1 = Pressure switch front P.T.O.
2 = Pressure switch rear P.T.O.
2
Front and rear P.T.O. can only be
engaged with running engine. 1
When starting the engine, the
P.T.O.’s are always disengaged.
2
Connection and disconnection is
done by pressing the respective
switch.
7179-46
P.T.O. type and speed are indicated

in the INFOCENTER. For monitoring, 1
the symbol in the switch is lighted. 1/min
rpm
1 = Indication front P.T.O. speed 2
2 = Indication rear P.T.O. speed 1/min
rpm
5 10 15 20 25 30
7193-84
Rear P.T.O. clutch control (Version for N.A. only)*
In the tractor for N.A. the above

shown switch 2 for the rear PTO is
replaced by a button as in this pic-
ture.
Pressing the top half of the button
engages the rear P.T.O.; pressing the
bottom half disengages.
The button is interlocked to a safety
catch to prevent the P.T.O. clutch
being engaged by accident.
On engaging the P.T.O. clutch is op-
7216-50
erated by rocking the selector button
while pressing and holding the safety
catch toward the driver seat.
57
Sezione 3.pmd 57 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
External operation of rear P.T.O.

(Version with standard mud-
guards)
To engage/disengage the rear P.T.O.

press switch 1.
TB-0142

(Version with wide mudguards)
press switch 1. 4D
1BV
1
7193-85
Rear P.T.O. speed selector lever 1

1000
For preselecting the P.T.O. speed. 0
540
lever 1= 540/1000 with 2 in Norm
lever 2= 750/1400 with 2 in Eco
540
0
1000
econ
norm
2
0
7179-48
58
Sezione 3.pmd 58 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Rear power take-off shaft selector 4 6
lever 2 8
4 6
Norm/eco power take-off shaft.

4 6
2 8 0 2 8
0 = Neutral position. A
A = Econ.
B = Norm
B
7179-87
n
DANGER: AS SOON AS THE CARDAN SHAFT (SHAFT WITH
UNIVERSAL JOINT(S)) IS REMOVED, ALWAYS INSTALL THE PTO
OUTPUT SHAFT CUP. avv069gb
n
DANGER: UTILIZING THE „PUSH BUTTONS“ LOCATED ON THE
REAR MUDGUARDS, TO OPERATE THE REAR LIFTING DEVICE,
NEVER STAND BETWEEN THE ATTACHED IMPLEMENT AND THE
TRACTOR. ALWAYS HAVE THE PARKING BRAKE ENGAGED. avv076gb
n
REMOVED. avv070gb
n
DANGER: THE DRIVEN IMPLEMENTS COULD ROTATE FOR SOME
TIME AFTER P.T.O. HAS BEEN DISENGAGED. PLEASE STOP THE
TRACTOR ENGINE AND WAIT UNTIL ALL THE MOVING PARTS OF
IMPLEMENT HAVE COME TO A COMPLETE STANDSTILL, BEFORE
TO START ANY SERVICING OPERATION. avv068gb
n
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATATE ENGINE UNTIL FUEL TANK IS
ENPTY. IF ENGINE IS RUN OUT OF FUEL, IT WILL BECOME
NECESSARY TO BLEED AIR FROM FUEL SYSTEM. avv039gb
59
Sezione 3.pmd 59 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Checks before start-up

Each time before moving off check:
– Oil level in engine and transmission
– Coolant level
– Tires and wheels
– Air brake system *
– Lighting system
– Trailer equipment
– Brake fluid
n
DANGER: TAKE CARE NOT TO CAUSE DANGEROUS SPARKS WHEN
WORKING IN PROXIMITY TO FUEL DEPOSITS OR OTHER
FLAMMABLE MATERIAL. avv042gb
Refuelling
For suitable fuels see chapter ”Tech-
nical Data”.
7193-86
Rear view mirrors telescopic *

The telescopic rear view mirrors are
infinitely adjustable to personal
needs.
To adjust the mirror relax screw, pull
out mirror holder and tighten screw.
Then swing mirror holder into the
front-most detent.
Prior to start driving or working, set
mirror such that road and rear work-
ing area can completely be seen. 7193-87
60
Sezione 3.pmd 60 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Starting the engine
n
DANGER: NEVER START THE ENGINE BY SHORT-CIRCUITING THE
STARTER ENGINE’S TERMINALS. THIS MAY CAUSE SUDDEN TAKE-
OFFS WHICH COULD BE VERY DANGEROUS TO THE OPERATOR.
avv011gb
n
DANGER: DO NOT USE AEROSOL CANS OF STARTING AID ON
TRACTORS WITH THE THERMOSTART CONNECTED TO THE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. ETHER COMBINED WITH THERMOSTART CAN
CAUSE AN EXPLOSION WITH DAMAGE TO ENGINE, PERSONAL avv106gb
INJURY, OR BOTH.
Ignition lock
I
0 = Ignition off
II
I = Ignition on / preheating
O
II = Start engine
The ignition lock is located in the B-

spar on the right-hand side.
7193-28
Warning and servicing display *
PREHEAT
Indication “PREHEAT”
START
14 16
12 18
km/h
Indication “START” econ 20
mph
7193-42
61
Sezione 3.pmd 61 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Starting without preheating
– Parking brake is activated.
– Gear shifting lever in “neutral” position.
– Commutator switch in “neutral” position.
– Ignition key to position II – start engine.
Max. operating time about 10 sec.
As a function control, in the INFOCENTER shortly all pilot lights are lighted
and an acoustical signal sounds. In the POWERSHIFT display, the
transmission symbol 2 is illuminated as well as the selected driving
direction/neutral 1/3 as well as the selected POWERSHIFT range 5.
If the engine should be started by mistake with selected driving direction,
the POWERSHIFT display 3 will indicate the symbol “N”. Prior to starting, set
commutator switch into the “neutral” position.
Starting with preheating

– Operate parking brake.
– Gear shifting lever to neutral position.
– Ignition key to position I.
As a function control, in the INFOCENTER shortly all pilot lights are
lighted. In the case of INFOCENTER 2 , the yellow pilot light “preheating”
lights up; in the warning- and maintenance display of the INFOCENTER 3
“PREHEAT” is displayed.
At the same time an acoustical signal sounds. In the POWERSHIFT-display,
the transmission symbol 2 as well as the engaged powershift range 5 are
lighted. The symbol “N” (3) for neutral and the selected driving direction
1 are flashing.
– After preheating, start engine – ignition key to position II.
Maximum operation time about 10 seconds.
If the engine should be started by

mistake with selected driving direc-
tion, the POWERSHIFT display 3 will
indicate the symbol “N”. Prior to
starting, set commutator switch into
the “neutral” position.
S 1
After starting, keep the engine rev- H
5
ving in the medium range for a short 2
period, until the red charging control
M
lamp goes out. L
If the engine fails to start, repeat the 4 N 3
starting operation earliest after 1 7193-88
minute has passed.
62
Sezione 3.pmd 62 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Starting the tractor

Only move off when the required transmission pressure and reserve pres-
sure of the compressed-air brake system * have been reached.
When starting with clutch, operate the clutch only shortly and do not have it
slip for a longer time.
When starting with F-N-R commutator switch (tractors with PowerShuttle),
the tractor will start moving after having engaged the driving direction.
NOTE: When working on steep gradients, take care to ensure

that all moving parts receive adequate lubrication.
Starting with clutch

– Activate clutch pedal,
– Select driving direction (F=forward /R=reverse),
– Select working range (S=road /F=field),
– Select gear with gear shifting lever,
– Select POWERSHIFT range,
– Increase engine speed, slowly leave clutch pedal, at the same time
relieving the parking brake
To avoid unnecessary slipping of the clutch, select a synchronous gear suit-

ing the load.
After starting, always relieve the clutch pedal.
n
CAUTION: BY LOW TEMPERATURE, AFTER STARTING KEEP THE
ENGINE NOT ABOVE 1800 REV/MIN, UNTIL IT HAS REACHED THE
NORMAL WORKING TEMPERATURE. avv060gb
n
avv052gb
WARNING: REDUCE YOUR SPEED, ENGAGING A LOWER GEAR,

WHEN TRAVEL DOWNHILL OR OVER ROUGH GROUND AND
BEFORE TO TURN.
n
CAUTION: WITH A COLD ENGINE YOU MAY NOTICE ABNORMAL
COMBUSTION. THIS SHOULD CLEAR UP ONCE THE ENGINE HAS
REACHED NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE. avv020gb
63
Sezione 3.pmd 63 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Starting without clutch on plain ground (automatic)
– Commutator switch “neutral”
– Select gear with gear shifting lever,
– Release parking brake, select driving direction simultaneously pressing
shortly the release key (F/R). Increase engine speed. When selecting the
driving direction, the tractor will automatically start.
Generally, upon automatic starting, select a synchronous gear suiting the

load. Otherwise, the engine will be killed.
Starting without clutch on the hill (automatic)

– Commutator switch “neutral”
– Select gear with gear shifting lever – always select gear suiting the slope,
– Pre-select engine speed with the hand throttle,
– Release parking brake and stop the tractor with the brake pedal,
– Select driving direction simultaneously pressing shortly the release key (F/
R). As soon as the power flux from the engine starts, release the brake
pedal. The tractor will automatically start.
In case of external temperatures below –10 °C (14°F), neutral shiftings can

occur after a cold automatic start. In this case, the first starting operations
must be performed via the clutch pedal until the driving system has been
run warm.
Safety information for driving

The following safety and warning information must absolutely be observed.
The non-observance will exclude the liability of the manufacturer for result-
ing accidents as well as damage to the machine.
64
Sezione 3.pmd 64 20/12/2004, 10.25

CHAPTER 3 Use
Changing the driving direction

For changing the driving direction,
pull lever towards the steering wheel
and activate it to the opposite driv-
ing direction.
S F
H N
The driving direction can only be M
changed up to a driving speed of L
12.5 km/h (7,77 mph). R
Upon a change of the driving direc- N
tion above 12.5 km/h (7,77 mph),
the drive system is set to “NEUTRAL”.
7214-51gb
This is indicated to the driver in the
POWERSHIFT display. In addition, an
acoustical signal will sound.
Changing the driving direction with clutch

– Driving speed below 12.5 km/h (7,77 mph),
– Activate clutch,
– Activate commutator switch to the opposite driving direction,
– Slowly release clutch,
– Tractor will change the driving direction.
Changing the driving direction without clutch

– Driving speed below 12.5 km/h (7,77 mph),
– Activate commutator switch to the opposite driving direction,
– Tractor will change the driving direction.
When changing the driving direction, generally select a synchronous gear

suiting the load. Otherwise, the engine will be killed.
For the tractors the driving direction is changed to “reverse” always in the
same powershift range as to “forward”. The powershift ranges can be shift-
ed.
If, upon a mistaken change of the driving direction above 12.5 km/h (7,77
mph), the original driving direction is immediately selected again, the pow-
er flux from the drive system is generated again.
In case of external temperatures below –10 °C (14° F), after a cold start
upon reversing, neutral shifting may occur also below 12.5 km/h (7,77
mph). In this case, do not fully load the tractor and have it run warm at
medium speed.
65
Sezione 3.pmd 65 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Stopping the tractor

– Slow down tractor,
– Disengage clutch
– Stop tractor with the service brake
– Move gear shifting lever to neutral
position,
– Actuate parking brake
7193-89
Stopping the Motor

I
After stopping the tractor, switch off
II
the engine by turning the key onto
O
0.
Check parking brake

Check the parking brake daily for
correct operation and effectiveness
before driving or starting work.
7193-28
n
WARNING: DO NOT DISENGAGE THE CLUTCH OR ATTEMPT TO
SHIFT GEAR AFTER YOU HAVE STARTED DOWNHILL. avv153gb
n
CAUTION: THE PARKING BRAKE SHOULD ALWAYS BE APPLIED
WHEN TRACTOR IS PARKED OR LEFT UNATTENDED. avv115gb
n
CAUTION: NEVER LEAVE THE TRACTOR WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING,
UNLESS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY. IN THIS CASE, PUT ALL TRANSMISSION
SHIFT LEVERS IN THE NO LOAD POSITION, SWITCH ON THE ALL-WHEEL
avv036gb ver 2
DRIVE AND PULL THE HAND BRAKE UP TO THE STOP.
66
Sezione 3.pmd 66 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Leaving and securing the tractor

During driving, do never leave the cab.
Never leave the tractor without supervision with the engine running.
Leave the tractor only after having convinced yourself that all functions are
switched off or shut down.
Always completely lower implements.
Completely operate the parking brake fully pulling it.
Always insert the creep speed.
Shut down engine.
Withdraw ignition key and lock cab.
Additionally secure tractor with a wedge against rolling.
Wheel chock 2 1
The wheel chocks 1 are stowed be-
sides the battery box 2 (at right).
To remove the wheel chocks, pull out
to front.
7193-90
n
CAUTION: AFTER SOME HOURS OF HEAVY WORK, LET THE
ENGINE IDLE FOR A FEW MINUTES BEFORE STOPPING IT. THIS IS
TO PREVENT THE TURBINE FROM ROTATING THROUGH INERTIA
WITHOUT SUFFICIENT LUBRICATION. avv061gb
n
OPERATING. avv062gb
67
Sezione 3.pmd 67 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
P.T.O. shaft operation

– Keep the P.T.O. stub slightly greased and clean it before fitting the
universal joint shaft.
– When working with P.T.O.-driven implements select the speed gear
corresponding to the speeds of these implements.
– Set a constant engine speed with the manual throttle control lever.
– Direction of rotation and speed of the universal joint shafts must always
correspond with those of the P.T.O.-driven implement. Non-compliance
with these instructions may cause severe damage or personal injury.
– Observe maximum permissible torques. For implements with high peak
loads, the P.T.O. shall be protected on the implement side by means of a
slipping safety clutch to be set in accordance with the loads involved.
– Disengage the P.T.O. clutch prior to making sharp turns and before raising
or lowering P.T.O.-driven three-point hitch implements.
– When running the tractor without P.T.O.-driven implements do not forget
to fit the protective cap.
– Always disengage the P.T.O. shafts when they are not needed.
n
WARNING: DO NOT STAND, OR ALLOW ANYONE ELSE TO STAND,
BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT UNLESS THE ENGINE IS
TURNED OFF AND THE PARKING BRAKE IS ENGAGED, ONE
TRANSMISSION GEAR IS ENGAGED, THE KEY IS REMOVED, AND
ALL ATTACHMENTS OR IMPLEMENTS ARE LOWERED TO THE
G R O U N D. avv035gb
n
DANGER: AS SOON AS THE CARDAN SHAFT (SHAFT WITH
UNIVERSAL JOINT(S)) IS REMOVED, ALWAYS INSTALL THE PTO
OUTPUT SHAFT CUP. avv069gb
n
CAUTION: WHEN OPERATING STATIONARY P.T.O. DRIVEN
EQUIPMENT (FOR EXAMPLE WATER PUMP, ETC.), DO NOT LEAVE
THE TRACTOR SEAT UNTIL ALL GEAR LEVERS ARE IN „NEUTRAL“,
THE PARKING BRAKE IS FULLY ENGAGED, THE CAB DOOR LOCKED
WITH THE KEY AND THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT WHEELS ARE
CHOCKED. avv037gb
68
Sezione 3.pmd 68 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Starting work with the P.T.O.

To save clutch and P.T.O.-driven implement engage the P.T.O. shaft at a
slightly increased idling speed. Only after engagement of the P.T.O. shaft
bring the implement to the required operating speed by increasing the en-
gine speed.
To prevent damage
- Do not try to work loose any stuck implements by repeated switching on/off.
- Use universal joint shafts only with overriding or appropriately adjusted
slipping clutch.
- Pay attention to correct universal shaft length.
- In stationary operation limit the power take-off to a maximum of 75% of
the engine output.
Length of the universal joint shaft

A = overlap
B = sliding length
The universal shaft length must be
matched to the respective P.T.O.- A B
driven implement. Pay attention to
sufficient tube overlap and sliding
length, and shorten the universal
joint shaft according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions, if necessary.
7193-91
n
DANGER: WHILE THE PTO IS IN OPERATION, NO-ONE MUST
STAND IN THE VICINITY OF THE PTO OUTPUT SHAFT OR THE
DRIVE SHAFT. avv066gb
n
DANGER: KEEP PROTECTIVE SHIELD IN PLACE OVER PTO SHAFT
AT ALL TIMES. ALWAYS DISENGAGE POWER TAKE-OFF AND STOP
ENGINE BEFORE DISMOUNTING TRACTOR EXCEPT WHEN
PERFORMING STATIONARY PTO OPERATIONS. avv064gb
69
Sezione 3.pmd 69 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Changing PTO shaft stub
To ensure operation with various
types of propshafts, the PTO shaft
stubs can be changed.
As standard, the tractors are fitted
with a 1 3/4” involute (fine toothing
with 20 teeth) PTO shaft stub.
- Replacement stub 1 3/8” - 6 –
spline and
- Replacement stub 1 3/8” - involute
(fine toothing with 21 teeth)
TB-0569
To replace the PTO shaft stub, release the hex bolts.

Before fitting the new stub, clean screw-on face and PTO shaft stub. When
fitting, ensure that stub is seated correctly. Evenly tighten M12 x 60 12.9
screws to 110 Nm.
Check screws after the first 10 oper-
ating hours and tighten if necessary.
The maximum power ratings which
can be delivered by the PTO shaft are:
- PTO shaft stub 1 3/4” involute
(close-pitch gearing with 20 teeth),
1000 rpm: full power.
- PTO shaft stub 1 3/8” involute
(close-pitch gearing with 21 teeth),
1000 rpm: full power.
7193-93
- PTO shaft stub 1 3/8” 6 spline,
1000 rpm: full power and 540 rpm:
60 kW (82 bhp).
IMPORTANT: ONCE SPEED IS SELECTED THE CORRECT PTO STUB
SHAFT MUST BE INSTALLED AND DRAWBAR LENGTH ADJUSTED. 540
RPM USES 6 SPLINES SHAFT, 1000 RPM USES 20/21 SPLINES SHAFT.
n
CAUTION: AFTER ANY P.T.O. OPERATION, ENSURE THAT THE
P.T.O. CLUTCH LEVER (OR PUSH BUTTON) IS DESENGAGED; THEN
PUT IN „NEUTRAL“ THE P.T.O. RPM SELECTOR DEVICE (540/1000,
ECO, GROUND SPEED; IT’S DEPENDING FROM TRACTOR
CONFIGURATION). avv063gb
n
REMOVED. avv070gb
70
Sezione 3.pmd 70 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
A identification device * for the PTO shaft spline and PTO shaft speed is
requested for the NA. Therefore it‘s mandatory to use PTO shaft stubs hav-
ing external profile with cam. If:
- 540 stub shaft is installed and the PTO shaft speed exceeds the 630 rpm,
- 1000 stub shaft is installed and the PTO shaftspeed exceeds the 1170 rpm
PTO clutch will automatically disengage and the associated symbol on the
button (see picture at page 57) flashes six times every 1.5 seconds to signal
the overspeed.
Before to active again the PTO by pressing the corresponding button, it is
necessary to verify to have the correct PTO stub installed and to have se-
lected the correct PTO speed by the proper lever.
If the associated symbol on the button flashes in different way as six times
every 1.5 seconds, please contact immediately your DEUT-FAHR customer
service.
n
DANGER: BEFORE FITTING OR REMOVING THE IMPLEMENT DRIVE
SHAFT, ENSURE THAT THE ENGINE IS SWITCHED OFF AND THE
PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED. avv065gb

(not for N.A. market)*
press switch 1. 4D
1BV
1
7193-85
P.T.O. type and speed are indicated

in the INFOCENTER. For monitoring, 1
the symbol in the switch is lighted. 1/min
rpm
1 = Indication front P.T.O. speed 2
2 = Indication rear P.T.O. speed 1/min
rpm
5 10 15 20 25 30
7193-84
71
Sezione 3.pmd 71 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Lifting AGROTRONIC -hD *

Function Agrotronic-hD
1 - Draft control
2 - Position control
3 - Draft/position intermix
4 - Floating position
5 - External control
6 - Vibration damping
7 - Wheel slip control
n
WARNING: THE IMPLEMENTS MUST ALWAYS BE LOWERED TO THE
GROUND WHENEVER THE TRACTOR IS NOT OPERATING OR
WHEN ADJUSTMENT, MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OPERATIONS ARE
TO BE CARRIED OUT. avv024gb
Main control lever

1 = Rapid implement return for rap-
id engagement of the plough at
the beginning of the furrow
2 = Lowering – working position
3 = Stop 4
5
4 = Raising/Transport or carry position
5 = Interlock for transport journeys 3
The main control lever can be locked
in the raising position by means of 2
the red tumbler switch – for trans- 1
port. The lift mechanism can be low- 7214-18
ered also when the engine is stand-
ing still.
Activation
The AGROTRONIC-hD * is interlocked:
7193-95
- after engine start-up
- after actuation of remote control
- after the pre-set speed limit has
been exceeded
This is signalled by the yellow diag-
nosis LED. To activate the AGRO-
STOP
TRONIC, move main control lever to

the stop position and leave it there
until the yellow diagnosis LED comes
off – after about 2 seconds. If the
main control lever is in the stop posi-
tion, it must first be moved to the raising position and then to the stop po-
sition for activation of the system.
72
Sezione 3.pmd 72 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
7214-19
Rear lift controls
1 - Draft/position control
2 - Yellow LED - illuminates when the lift lock is engaged (STOP condition)
3 - Red LED – raising rear lift
4 - Green LED – lowering rear lift
5 - Lowering speed control
6 - Maximum lift height control
7 - Working depth control - scale 0 - 10 and FLOAT rapid soil engagement
8 - Adjustment ring with detent mark
NOTE: When operating the lift manually using the pushbutton

located on the hydraulic control valve, always ensure that the
engine is running at low revs and never on any account raise
the lift to its maximum height.
73
Sezione 3.pmd 73 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Control type selector

Serves to set the type of lift control. 2
Turn the knob fully to the left to ob-
tain pure
position control. In this control mode,
the system will maintain the linkage
at the set height
Turn the knob to the right to the
1
draft control sector to obtain draft
control.
In this control mode, the system will 7193-97
maintain the load on the linkage at
a constant level.
100 % Draft control

In this position the implement in
raised – with increasing soil resist-
ance – and lowered as the soil resist-
ance decreases; the preselected trac-
tion power remains unchanged.
In the case of tractors with suspend-
ed front axle, we recommend to
disconnect the front axle suspension
when using the draft control.
7193-98
n
WARNING: HYDRAULIC FLUID UNDER PRESSURE CAN PENTRATE
THE SKIN OR EYES AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY, BLINDNESS OR
DEATH. FLUID LEAKS UNDER PRESSURE, MAY NOT BE VISIBLE.
LOOSEN CONNECTIONS SLOWLY, KEEPING HANDS AND
FINGERS CLEAR OF LOOSENED FITTINGS. USE A PIECE OF
CARDBOARD OR WOOD TO LOCATE LEAKS, DO NOT USE YOUR
FINGERS OR HANDS. WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES FOR EYE
PROTECTION. IF ANY FULID IS INJECTED INTO THE SKIN, SEEK
MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. avv148gb
NOTE: When coupling and uncoupling implements, turn the

control type selector fully counterclockwise.
74
Sezione 3.pmd 74 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Draft/position intermix
The combined draft/position control
is infinitely variable and allows the
draft and position of the implement
to be optimally matched to the
ground conditions.
7193-99
Position control
This funcion keeps the implement
hydraulically in the preset position.
The desired working depth/height of
the implement is preselected with
the preselector knob.
7193-100
LEDs
red = raising
green = lowering
yellow = diagnostic system/inter-
locked
When trouble occurs, this is signalled
by flashing of the yellow LED. The
flashing code is to be interpreted as
follows:
Long pause – 1 flash
Short pause – 9 flashes = Error 19
7193-101
In case of trouble check into your
DEUTZ-FAHR service workshop.
75
Sezione 3.pmd 75 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Lowering speed control

Serves to set the lift arm lowering
speed.
This function is only active the when
the lift is being lowered, not in "con-
trol" condition.
Turn the knob to the left (tortoise
symbol) to reduce the lowering
speed.
Turn the knob to the right (hare sym- 7193-102
bol) to increase the lowering speed.
Maximum lift height control

Serves to set the maximum height to
which the lift arms can be raised.
This function is activated both in
"control" condition and when the lift
is raised.
This setting has priority over the
maximum depth setting.
Tun the knob to the left to obtain the
minimum height setting;
when the knob is turned fully to the
right, the lift arms can be raised to 7193-103
the maximum height.
Maximum working depth control

Serves to limit the maximum plough- 6
8
ing depth on a scale of 1 to 10

When the knob is turned fully to the
4
left, the lift can be lowered to the

10
maximum possible depth (limiting

disabled); turning the knob to the
right reduces the maximum depth. 2
Turn the pointer of the control to
FLOAT to obtain rapid soil engage-
F
7193-104
ment.
76
Sezione 3.pmd 76 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Floating position
Turn preselector knob to position F. In
the floating position all control func-
tions are switched off. The lower
links of the three-point hitch are
freely movable up and down.
The floating position control is used
for implements guided on the
ground by their wheels or running on
skids. The implement follows the soil
profile independently of the tractor. 7193-105
Remote control
TB-0548
1 = Lower
2 = Raise
After having used the remote control

2
1
4D
it is necessary to reactivate the 1BV
AGROTRONIC -hD *.
7193-107
77
Sezione 3.pmd 77 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
n
WARNING: WHEN OPERATING THE LIFT CONTROLS, STAND WELL
CLEAR OF THE OPERATING RADIUS OF THE LIFT ARMS AND ANY
ATTACHED IMPLEMENTS. THIS IS TO AVOID THE RISK OF INJURY
IN THE CASE OF INCORRECT MANOEUVRES. avv071gb
n
DANGER: UTILIZING THE „PUSH BUTTONS“ LOCATED ON THE
REAR MUDGUARDS, TO OPERATE THE REAR LIFTING DEVICE,
NEVER STAND BETWEEN THE ATTACHED IMPLEMENT AND THE
TRACTOR. ALWAYS HAVE THE PARKING BRAKE ENGAGED. avv076gb
Flow controls for hydraulic control valves *

only on AGROTRONIC -hD *
During on-road transport service with mounted implement uneven road
surface may cause pitching movements of the tractor which impair the driv-
ing safety and comfort of the tractor operator.
The pitching movement is actively dampened by slight movements of the
lift mechanism. The vibration damping feature is automatically switched on
when
– the AGROTRONIC-hD is activated
– the main control lever is in the transport position
– the ground speed exceeds 8 km/h (4,97 mph)
Wheel slip control *

Only provided on AGROTRONIC-hD
N
and in conjunction with a radar sen-

sor.
Switching on the wheel slip control:
Operate tumbler switch in the sym-
bol direction – tumbler switch light-
ed.
The wheel slip control can be
switched on/off any time.
It is active from a wheel slip of 8%. It 7193-108
works independently of the setting of
the function selector knob.
78
Sezione 3.pmd 78 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Benefits of wheel slip control:

– improved unit area output
– better fuel economy
– reduced soil compaction
At 40% wheel slip the lift mechanism = implement is automatically lifted to
avoid the risk of the tractor getting stuck.
External remote control * only with AGROTRONIC-hD
1 = 31 ground
2 = Signal from external sensor 3 2
3 = Power supply
4 = Not occupied
Implements which are carried by the 4 1
three-point hitch and must keep a
preselected working position, e.g.
beet toppers, can be operated using
the external remote control.
TB-0167.1
The sensor on the implement is connected to the external socket.

When this connection is made, the AGROTRONIC-hD is interlocked – and
must be reactivated to be ready again for operation.
Turn the function selector knob to 100% draft control. The effect of the ex-
ternal control can be reduced by turning the knob more toward position
control (combined draft/position control).
79
Sezione 3.pmd 79 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Remote valves
To operate implements with own
consumers – hydraulic cylinders and
motors – up to four remote valves
can be mounted which can be used
as single-or double-effect units.
Depending on their equipment, the
tractors are also provided with a
Load-Sensing hydraulic system. Ac-
cording information may be taken
from pages 84.
Via the remote valves, the oil circuit
of the implements is directly con- 7179-268
nected with the transmission oil cir-

cuit of the tractor.
Therefore, it must be made sure that

only such implements are attached
the oil of which has the same specifi-
cation and viscosity as the transmis-
sion oil of the tractor.
Do not attach implements in the Powerbeyond
hydraulic system of which condensed
water or dirt have deposited. This
can result in failures and deteriorate
the oil quality of the tractor. The 1 2 3 4
consequence can be considerable
shortening of the oil change inter-
vals. 7179-269
n
OF INJURY. avv073gb
n
CAUTION: IT’S IMPORTANT TO RESPECT THE ENVIROMENT AND
TO FOLLOW THE ANTI-POLLUTION RULES. ANY FLUID (OIL, FUEL,
COOLANT) OR FILTERS AND BATTERIES HAVE TO BE WASTED, BY
FOLLOWING THE LOCAL RULES. avv099gb
80
Sezione 3.pmd 80 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
7216-11
AGROTRON 120-130
Survey
Depending on the version, the arrangement of the connections may differ
from the representation given here.
A = Block A - control valves on the left hand side of the tractor (standard)
B = Block B - control valves on the right hand side of the tractor (optional)
1 = Remote valve 1
2 = Remote valve 2
3 = Remote valve 3*
4 = Remote valve 4*
T = Pressureless oil return
C = Trailer hydraulic braking coupling
F = Trailer air braking couplings
For tractors with Load-Sensing-System, in addition:
P = Connection POWERBEYOND * (pressure connection pump)
LS = Connection LS control line * (Load-Sensing)
R = Return
NOTE: Only connect implements with hydraulic hoses that meet

ISO 7241 requirements to the POWERBEYOND* (P; LS; R)
couplers.
81
Sezione 3.pmd 81 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
7216-12
AGROTRON 150-150.7-165.7
1 = Remote valve 1
2 = Remote valve 2
3 = Remote valve 3*
4 = Remote valve 4*

C = Trailer hydraulic braking coupling
F = Trailer air braking couplings
For tractors with Load-Sensing-System, in addition:
P = Connection POWERBEYOND * (pressure connection pump)
LS = Connection LS control line * (Load-Sensing)
R = Return
82
Sezione 3.pmd 82 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Oil feed control
The hydraulic oil feed to the consum-
ers – hydraulic cylinders and motors –
determines the working speed.
For that purpose, on each of the
remote valves, a rotary knob 1 has
been provided for with the aid of
which the oil volume flowing to the
consumer can be individually adjusted. 1
Turning to the right – increasing the
oil volume
Turning to the left – reducing the oil
7179-82
volume.
As an option, linkage 2 can be placed in the cab for volume regulation. The
volume can then even be regulated from the driver’s seat during tractor
operations.
Remote couplers
Before coupling up, bring actuating
lever into the Floating position, in
order to make the coupler pressure-
2 1
less.
For coupling and uncoupling press
ring 1. 3
n
1
ONLY CARRY OUT OIL QUANTITY

ADJUSTMENT WITH THE DEVICE
TB-0267.1
LOWERED, THE ENGINE TURNED
OFF AND THE PARKING BRAKE
APPLIED.
83
Sezione 3.pmd 83 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Connection of several consumers (e.g. parallel operation)
When connecting several consumers,
we recommend to distribute them
uniformly over the remote valve
blocks A and B.
Otherwise, increased pressure losses
as well as an increased thermal load
to the oil balance can result.
Example:
Consumer 1: Connect to remote
valve 1 or 2
7216-15
Consumer 2: Connect to remote
valve 3 or 4
When using more than two consumers, we recommend to connect them

such that their volumetric flows are uniformly distributed over the control
blocks A and B..
A max of 60 l/min (15,84 U.S. gal/min) can be retrieved.
Load-Sensing System *
Depending on their equipment, the tractors AGROTRON are provided with
a Load-Sensing hydraulic system.
Cold starting
If during cold starting the pump should develop noises, this is due to an
excessively low transmission oil temperature.
In this case, do not operate the hydraulic working system, do not fully load
the tractor and run warm at medium speed.
Oil filter contaminated

If with the hydraulic oil at operating temperature the pump should develop
noise, the hydraulic oil filter is contaminated.
In this case, do not operate the hydraulic working system and immediately
replace the oil filter for the hydraulic working system/steering system – see
chapter 5 “Maintenance and care”.
If it should nevertheless be necessary to operate the hydraulic working sys-
tem, turn back the consumers until the pump noise disappears.
Non-observance will result in damage to the axial reciprocating pump.
84
Sezione 3.pmd 84 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
External connection
(POWERBEYOND)*
P = Connection POWERBEYOND*
(pressure connection pump)
LS = Connection LS control line
(Load-Sensing)
R = Return
7216-13
AGROTRON 120-130
Depending on its equipment, the

tractor with a load-sensing system is
provided with an external hydraulic
connection. Via the connection POW-
ERBEYOND P, implements can be
connected which avail on their own
control system suitable for LS. With
this hydraulic connection, imple-
ments such as pick-up loaders can
directly be supplied with oil from the
hydraulic pump.
The LS control line of the implement
must be connected with the LS con- 7216-14
trol line of the tractor.
If required, the line of the pressure- AGROTRON 150-150.7-165.7
less oil return must be connected.
To avoid exchanging by mistake, the connections POWERBEYOND and LS

control line have been executed as coupling sockets, the connection of the
pressureless oil return however as coupling plug.
To avoid pressure losses upon large volumetric flows, the size of the line
and the connector POWERBEYOND P is 1 inch.
85
Sezione 3.pmd 85 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Hydraulic control valve levers 3 4

Operating auxiliary devices. 2
The position of the operating lever 1 1
to 4 for the auxiliary control devices
is appropriately assigned to the
remote couplings. N
4
N
3
N
2
4
2
N
6
1
8
2
4
2
0
6
TB-0169
The rear hydraulic service couplers are the quick fitting type.
All remote valves can be operated in the following positions:
N = Neutral
H
H = Lifting – red N
S = Lowering – yellow S
F = Floating position – blue F
If the gear lever for the correspond-
ing auxiliary device is operated in
N
the H direction, pressure is applied

N
at the red connection R. If the gear

1
N
lever for the corresponding auxiliary

N
device is operated in the S direction,

7179-85
pressure is applied at the yellow
connection G. If the gear lever is located in the floating position F, both
connections are without pressure and the oil can circulate freely.
R = red
G = yellow
Connect consumers correctly

G
Basically connect single and double G
acting consumers so that the correct
operating sequence: lift – neutral –
lower – float position is given.
R R 7179-268a
86
Sezione 3.pmd 86 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Locking remote valves

In the neutral position, the actuating
lever is locked by means of ring 1.
To unlock – raise ring 1.
Lever can now be moved to the
Raising and Lowering positions.
When ring 1 is raised further – the
lever can be moved to the Floating
4
1
position.
3
4
2
6
4
8
7193-120
4
2
0
6
By further raising and turning ring 1 the locking function can be permanent-
ly eliminated.
To operate permanent cylinders – e.g. hydraulic motors – the actuating le-

vers can be locked in the Raising position. To do this, raise ring 1 and let go
when lever is in the Raising position.
n
DURING TRANSPORTATION, LOCK THE SHIFT LEVER IN THE NEUTRAL
POSITION.
n
DANGER OF ACCIDENT! IN THE CASE OF INVERTED REMOTE CONNEC-
TIONS, THE LIFT AND LOWER FUNCTIONS ARE ALSO INVERTED.
ESTABLISH THE CORRECT CONNECTION IMMEDIATELY.
n
WARNING: CONTROL LEVER MUST BE MECHANICALLY RETURNED
TO THE NEUTRAL POSITION ONCE THE HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS TRAVEL. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL
RESULT IN THE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT BEING PLACED UNDER A
STRAIN WHICH COULD RESULT IN OVERHEATING OF
HYDRAULICS AND DAMAGE TO TRACTOR HYDRAULIC
COMPONENTS AND/OR IMPLEMENT. avv025gb
87
Sezione 3.pmd 87 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Cross shifting lever

Depending on the version, the trac-
tor is equipped with a cross shifting
lever instead of the individual levers
for operating the remote valves 1
and 2.
7193-122
Operating the cross shifting lever F

S
Center position = neutral position
After having raised the interlocking, 1
the cross shifting lever can be oper-
ated.
FS 2 2 H
When operating the cross shifting
lever in the longitudinal shift line,
remote valve 1 is activated with the
functions of: 1
H = Raising H 7193-123
S = Lowering
F = Floating position
When operating the cross shifting lever in the transverse shift line, remote
valve 2 is activated with the following functions
H = Raising
S = Lowering
F = Floating position
The activating positions are colour-coded:
H = Lifting = red
S = Lowering = yellow
F = Floating = blue
88
Sezione 3.pmd 88 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
F
S
S2 S1 1 S1 H2
FS 2 2 H
S2 H1 1 H1 H2
H
7193-124
Parallel operation
Upon diagonal movement of the cross shifting lever, the remove valves 1
and 2 are simultaneously operated.
Position S2 S1:
Remote valves 2 and 1 with lowering portion.
Position S1 H2:
Remote valve 1 with lowering portion and remote valve 2 with raising por-
tion.
Position S2 H1:
Remote valve 2 with lowering portion and remote valve 1 with raising por-
tion.
Position H1 H2:
Remote valves 1 and 2 with raising portion.
89
Sezione 3.pmd 89 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
F
S
F V
S
1 V
FS 2 2 H
1
H 7193-125
Floating position with the cross-shifting facility in use

Insert floating position:
– Lift locking mechanism V
– Move cross shifting lever into position S = lowering
– Lift locking mechanism again and move cross shifting lever into position F
= floating
After having released the locking mechanism in position F = floating, the
floating position is engaged.
With the floating position engaged, the lower links may be moved into the
positions for raising and lowering:
– suitable for implements with own running gear.
– the implement follows ground irregularities – independent of the tractor.
90
Sezione 3.pmd 90 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Permanent consumers
With the cross shifting lever, perma-
nent consumers – oil motors – may S
be operated via the remote valves 1
and 2. 1
For operating permanent consumers,
the cross shifting lever may be
locked in the raising position.
2 H
When releasing the locking mecha-
nism in the lifting position, that posi-
tion is locked.
For operating permanent consumers, 1 1
the cross shifting lever may be
locked in the two lifting positions. H H
7193-126
If, with connected permanent con-
sumer, the other remote valve shall
be activated, the permanent con-
sumer must be connected to the
remote valve 2.
Instrument introduction flap
To open the instrument introduction

flap, open rear window.
Turn yoke 1.
1 2
Fold instrument introduction flap 2
backward.
Close rear window again.
7193-129
91
Sezione 3.pmd 91 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Hydraulic trailer brake *

H = Connection for hydraulic trailer
brake.*
The hydraulic trailer brake is applied
when applying the service brake.
The coupler to be used for connect-
ing the hydraulic trailer brake has a
special design to avoid confusion
with other couplers.
If this coupler is not used, please put 7216-17
the green cup.
AGROTRON 120-130
7216-18
AGROTRON 150-150.7-165.7
The operating lever for the hydraulic

trailer brake is arranged on the right 2
supporting pipe of the rear axle.
1 = Transport position (horizontal)
2 = Rest position (vertical) 1
When driving on the road with hy-

draulically braked trailers, move the
lever into position 1.
If the hydraulic trailer brake is not
used, move the lever into position 2.
7193-128
(Only for Italy)
92
Sezione 3.pmd 92 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Important additional information
Combination of tractor and mounted implement
The mounting of implements on the
front or rear three point linkage shall
not result in exceeding the maximum
permissible weight, the permissible
axle loads and the tyre load carrying TL
capacities of the tractor. The front GV GH
TV TH
axle of the tractor must always to be
loaded with at least 20% of the un-
laden weight of the tractor. a b c d
Determination of the total weight,
the axle loads, the tyre load carrying
7193-130
capacity and the necessary minimum
ballasting For the calculation you need the following data and see the table.
TL [kg/lb] unladen weight of tractor
TV [kg/lb] front axle load of unladen trac.
TH [kg/lb] rear axle load of unladen trac.
GH [kg/lb] combined weight of rear mounted implement/rear ballast
GV [kg/lb] combined weight of front mounted implement/front ballast
a [m/ft] distance from centre of gravity for combined front mounte dimple-
ment/front ballast to front axle centre
b [m/ft] Tractor wheelbase
c [m/ft] distance from rear axle centre to centre of lower link balls Ì
d [m/ft] distance from centre of lower link balls to centre of gravity for com-
bined rear mounted implement/rear ballast
120 130 150 150.7 165.7 var.:variable

TL 5690 5690 6110 6110 6200
(12544) (12544) (13470) (13470) (13668)
TV 2165 2165 2220 2220 2220
(4773) (4773) (4850) (4850) (4850)
TH 3525 3525 3890 3980 3980
(7771) (7771 (8575) (8774) (8774)
GH var. var. var. var. var.
GV var. var. var. var. var.
a var. var. var. var. var
b 2,767 2,767 2,767 2,767 2,767
(9.078) (9.078) (9.078) (9.078) (9.078)
c 1,190 1,190 1,190 1,190 1,190
(3.904) (3.904) (3.904) (3.904) (3.904)
d var. var. var. var. var
93
Sezione 3.pmd 93 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Consideration of rear mounted implement and front/rear combinations
1) Calculation of minimum ballasting at the front GVmin
GH x (c+d) - TV x b + 0,2 x TL x b
a+b
Record the calculated minimum ballasting which is needed at the front of
the tractor into the table.
Front mounted implement
2) Calculation of the minimum ballasting at the rear GH min
GV x a- TH x b + 0,45 x TL x b
G H min=
b+c+d
Record the calculated minimum ballasting which is needed at the rear of

the tractor into the table.
3) Calculation of the real front axle load TV real

(If with the front mounted implement (GV) the required minimum front bal-
lasting (GV min) cannot be reached, the weight of the front mounted imple-
ment has to be increased to the weight of the minimum ballasting at the
front!)
GV x (a+b) + TV x b - GH x (c+d)
T V tat=
b
Record the calculated real front axle load and the permissible front axle
load of the tractor into the table.
4) Calculation of the real total weight Gtot

(If with the rear mounted implement (GH) the required minimum rear bal-
lasting (GH min) cannot be reached, the weight of the rear mounted imple-
ments has to be increased to at least the weight of the minimum ballasting
at the rear!)
Gtat = GV + TL + GH
Record the calculated real and the permissible total weight given in the
instruction handbook for the tractor into the table.
5) Calculation of the real rear axle load TH tot
TH tat = Gtat - TV tat
Record the calculated real and the permissible rear axle load given in the
instruction handbook for the tractor into the table.
6) Tyre load carrying capacity

Record double the value (two tyres) of the permissible load carrying capacity
into the table (see for instance documentation provided by the tyre manu-
facturer).
94
Sezione 3.pmd 94 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
TABLE Real value Permissible value Double permissible

according according to tyre load carryng
to calculation instruction handbook capacity (two tyres)
Minimun
ballasting kg/lb --- ---
front/tear
Total weight kg/lb ≤ kg/lb ---
Front axle
load kg/lb ≤ kg/lb ≤ kg/lb
Rear axle
load kg/lb ≤ kg/lb ≤ kg/lb
The minimum ballasting has to be attached to the tractor either in

form of a mounted implement or ballasting weight!
The calculated values must be less or equal (≤

≤) the permissible
values!
Front towing and manoeuvring hitch
n
WARNING: FOR THE WHEELS REPLACEMENT AND FOR SOME
MAINTAINING OR REPAIRING OPERATIONS, THE TRACTOR MUST
LIFTED, USING SPECIFIC SAFETY SUPPORTS. NEVER USE AS
SUPPORT THE IMPLEMENTS ATTACHED TO THE TRACTOR . DO NOT
ALLOW ANYONE TO GET ON THE TRACTOR, WHEN LIFTED FROM
THE GROUND FOR MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OPERATIONS. avv101gb
95
Sezione 3.pmd 95 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Front towing and manoeuvring hitch
The front towing and manoeuvring hitch is provided for manoeuvring jobs
and for towing the tractor. Do not use for heavy traction work. Use the tow-
ing devices at the rear of the vehicle for heavy traction work. Use only test-
ed linkages of sufficient strength for manoeuvring and towing. Connecting
pins must be secured against loss.
Observe country-specific regulations.
Front towing and manoeuvring

hitch with bolt
For tractors without ballast carrier.
For towing and manoeuvring works.
Only use original bolts.
7181-184

hitch with ballast carrier and
ballast weights *
The towing and manoeuvring hitch
can be integrated and is arranged
between the weights.
For towing and manoeuvring
works.Only use original bolts.
7181-185
96
Sezione 3.pmd 96 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use

hitch front with front ballast
weight 600 kg (1322.76 lbs)
1000 kg (2204,60 lbs) *
The towing and manoeuvring hitch is
integrated in the ballast carrier.
7214-21

hitch with bolt
For tractors without ballast carrier.
7181-187
n
CAUTION: DO NOT USE THE FRONT HITCH FOR TOWING
EQUIPMENTS. IT’S FOR EMERGENCY ONLY. avv082gb
97
Sezione 3.pmd 97 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
4 1
7214-22
Front power lift *

1 = Lifting cylinder
2 = Lower link, category II
3 = Upper link, adjustable in length
4 = Coupling triangle
5 = Triangle locking device
6 = Release mechanism for triangle locking device
For operating the front power lift, observe the operating instructions of the
manufacturer of the front power lift.
n
CAUTION: ON TRAVELLING ON THE ROAD WITHOUT FRONT
IMPLEMENTS, PLEASE APPLY THE PULLING TRIANGLE OR LOCK
THE LOVER ARMS WITH THE SAFETY PINS. avv085gb
98
Sezione 3.pmd 98 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Coupling the catching hook
The lift arms can be attached to the

front lift in 3 different ways:
A - Position for normal working con-
ditions
B - Float position, for wide imple-
ments that rest on the ground
A
B
C - Folding position, to reduce the
overall dimensions of the tractor
when the front lift is not in use.
7181-190
To attach the lift arms in the required

position, insert the lock pins in the
corresponding holes as indicated in
the figures below.
All pins are to be secured with the

linchpins available on chains.
C
7214-23
n
99
Sezione 3.pmd 99 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Mounting the upper link
The upper link is fastened by insert-

ing the bolt 3. The bolt must be
secured by a pin.
When driving on the road without
implements or coupling triangle, the
upper link must be mounted in
place. To that end, fasten upper link
in lifted position by inserting bolt 4.
The bolt is also secured by a pin.
7181-191
Adjusting the upper link

The upper link is length-adjusted by 6
turning the center part 5. Ensure 5
there is sufficient thread overlap. The 4
screw-in depth of both threaded rods
in the center part 5 must be the 3
same on both sides.
The center part 5 should then be
secured using the lock nut 6.
7214-24
Mounting and removing front-mounted implements

Prior to attaching implements to the three-point hitch, bring system lever into
the neutral position and lock it to avoid unintended lifting and lowering.
When attaching or removing front-mounted implements, particular care
must be ensured near the tractor to avoid accidents.
Near the three-point hitch, consider the risk of injuries by squeezing and
shearing.
No persons are allowed to stay close to the implement to be attached or
lifted.
NOTE: When the front ballast is applied to the lower links of
the front lift, the top link must be applied at the lowest hole in
the bracket to prevent fouling of the front PTO.
100
Sezione 3.pmd 100 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Attaching front-mounted implements
– Totally lower the front powerlift.
– Move tractor with lowered lower 2
links close to the implement until
the catching hook is underneath
1
the coupling points of the
implement.
– Slightly lift front powerlift until the
implement is seized by the catching
hooks. The locking nose 1 of the
catching hook is pressed back.
– Suspend upper link into the upper
7181-192
coupling point of the implement.
The locking nose 1 of the catching
hook is pressed back.
Removing front-mounted implements
– Lower front-mounted implement

as far as possible until secure and
load on upper control arm is 3
reduced.
– Remove upper link from the
implement by lifting the locking
flap 2.
– Lift locking flap 2 of the catching
hooks at the lower links – catching
hook unlocked (Pos 3).
– Further lower front power lift and
7181-192a
slowly drive tractor backwards.
– Return interlock flap to pos. 2.
Mounting and removing coupling triangle

For mountig and removing the coupling triangle follow the same instruc-
tions used for front-mounted implements.
The interlock flaps should be moved into pos. 3 as a result of the low
weight.
Once fitted, return interlock flaps to pos. 2.
Fit and remove front-mounted implements with triangular coupling

When mounting and removing front-mounted implements with coupling
triangle, observe the instructions of the manufacturer of the coupling trian-
gle.
Absolutely observe the pertaining safety instructions and other directions of
the respective manufacturer – operating instructions.
101
Sezione 3.pmd 101 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
On-road travel with front-mounted implement
n
CAUTION: FOR ALL TRACTORS EQUIPPED WITH FRONT LIFTING
DEVICE AND FRONT P.T.O. AND HAVING STANDARD FRONT TIRES,
IT IS STRONGLY RECOMENDED, FOR SAFETY REASON, DO NOT
TRAVEL OVER 25 KM/H (15.54 MPH), WHEN HEAVY LOADS ARE
APPLIED AT FRONT LIFTING DEVICE. avv084gb
Safety of the front lift* travelling on-road is obtained troough a shut-off

cock. Depending from the version there are two cocks:
1 = Shut-off cock for front power lift

a = closed
b = opened
2 = Lever for reversing the front
power lift from single- to double- b
acting
a = single-acting 1
b = double-acting a
7181-193
During on-road travel with front-mounted implements, absolutely make

sure that lever 1 is closed – position a – securing of the front power lift.
Further operating information may be taken from the instructions given by
the manufacturer of the front power lift.
Absolutely, observe the use and safety instructions of the implement manu-
facturers.
102
Sezione 3.pmd 102 20/12/2004, 10.26

CHAPTER 3 Use
Dimensions with front-mounted implements

In Germany, the distance between the front edge of the front-mounted
implement and the center of the steering wheel must not exceed 3.5 m
(11.48 ft).
If in individual cases this measure is exceeded, it must be ensured that pos-
sible limitations of the field of vision are balanced. This can be realized by
an accompanying person providing the driver with information required for
safely driving the tractor.
X = 3.5 m (11.48 ft) at a maximum
When driving the tractor on public

roads at night and an adequate field
of vision cannot be obtained with the
standard head lights because of the X
front-mounted implement, it will be
necessary to switch on the auxiliary
top head lights.
7181-194a
n
WARNING: NEVER TOW IMPLEMENTS BY ATTACHING THEN TO
UPPER LINK OR UPPER LINK SUPPORT ONLY. THIS COULD IN
SOME CASES RESULT IN REAR OVERTURN. avv078gb
103
Sezione 3.pmd 103 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Front loader *
If a front loader is attached to the tractor, refer to the use and maintenance
instructions supplied with the loader.
A front loader can be operated using the «joystick» control on the multifunc-
tion armrest.
A front loader can be operated using the «joystick» control on the multifunc-
tion armrest.
The control lever can be moved diagonally to obtain the simultaneous oper-
ation of two hydraulic control valves (for two simultaneous movements of
the front loader).
For instructions on the use of the «Joystick» see page 88.
Trailer hitch, rear *

Mechanical * trailer hitch
The trailer hitch serves to couple up
heavy or nosing implements and
trailers the coupling height of which
is above the height of the swinging
drawbar.
7181-195
n
WARNING: DO NOT STAND OR PASS UNDER HYDRAULICALLY
LIFTED LOADS. avv131gb
n
WARNING: A FRONT-END LOADER (BUCKET OR FORKS) MUST BE
EQUIPPED WITH A SUITABLE RESTRAINING DEVICE TO PREVENT
THE LOAD (BALES, FENCE POSTS, ROLLS OF FENCE, WIRE ETC.)
FROM ROLLING DOWN THE LIFT ARMS INTO THE OPERATOR’S
COMPARTMENT AND CRUSHING THE DRIVER WHEN THE LOADER
IS RAISED. INADEQUATELY SECURED OBJECTS COULD ALSO FALL
AND INJURE BYSTANDERS. avv156gb
104
Sezione 3.pmd 104 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Automatic * trailer hitch
Diameter of the pivot to choice:
- 32 mm (1.26 in) 4
- 38 mm (1.50 in)
(the 38 mm (1.50 in) pin is also avail-
able with a 50 mm (1.97 in) eye)
Automatic coupling:
When inserting the trailer coupling 3 1
hook against the spring-loaded
tongue 2, the coupling pin 1 will
couple up automatically.
Manual coupling: 2
7181-196
Pull down the coupling lever 4.
The coupling pin 1 will be released.
NOTE: The maximum permissible load on the towing hitch is

20000N = 2000 kg (4409.2 lb). Only use original pins! The
tractor is equipped with a pivoting towing hitch, the height of
which can be adjusted if necessary; when using mounted
implements, remove the towing hitch to prevent interference
with the implement.
n
CAUTION: ALL IMPLEMENTS MOUNTED TO THE TRACTOR MUST
BE SAFELY ATTACHED. avv072gb
Remote control of automatic trail- 7181-197a

2
er hitch *
1 = Uncoupling
1
2 = Normal position
To open the trailer hitch clevis, pull
lever inward and move into position
1, then let lever go.
Lever returns automatically into the
normal position.
105
Sezione 3.pmd 105 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Height adjustment * with adjust-

ing rail 1
– Depress button 1.
– Move lever 2 to the rear.
The trailer hitch is released and can 2
be adjusted in height.
– To lock hitch in the desired
position, move lever 2 into the
normal position and release button
1 only when the locking bolt is
engaged. 7181-198
n
CAUTION: WHEN HITCHING AN IMPLEMENT TO DRAWBAR,
ALWAYS SECURE HITCH PIN WITH A SAFETY PIN AND ATTACH
IMPLEMENT SAFETY CHAINS. avv124gb
106
Sezione 3.pmd 106 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
PICK-UP HITCH drawbar and towing hitch
The Pick-up hitch towing hitch makes
it possible to connect the trailer to
the tractor while remaining in the
driver’s seat.
The hitch is connected to the arms of
the lift without interfering with the
use of the three-point linkage via
the brackets A (see page 108) so so
it can be lowered to the necessary
height when connecting the trailer
and then lifted into the normal work-
ing position for transportation.
This type of hitch generally has to be
used to hook single-axle trailers to
the tractor.
7181-199v
n
WARNING: NEVER ALLOW ANYONE TO RIDE ON TOW HOOK,
DRAWBAR OR LIFTING ARMS AT ANY TIME. avv098gb
107
Sezione 3.pmd 107 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Tow hook interlock
7181-197a
When raised, the tow hook is locked 2
using two hooks C.
To unlock:
1
- Fully raise and deploy rear
implement lift.
- Move lever into position 1.
- Lower rear implement lift
To lock:
- Move lever into position 2.
- Fully raise rear implement lift
- Check the hooks C. Both hooks
must be fully snapped in.
The hitch is equipped with two end-

pieces to be fitted as alternatives:
the hitch and the drawbar. A
A
Changing the hitch with the drawbar
is an extremely fast operation: sim- C
ply remove the two pins B. B
7214-25
n
WARNING: HITCHING TO THE REAR AXLE, OR ANY OTHER POINT
ABOVE THE SWINGING DRAWBAR, CAN CAUSE A REAR
OVERTURN. avv154gb
108
Sezione 3.pmd 108 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
CLASS “C” TOWING HITCH

The class “C” towing hitch is fixed to
the support brackets by two lock
pins.
To alter the height of the hitch, re-
move the pins and re-insert them in
the required position
7181-202
CLASS “C” TOWING HITCH

with automatic height adjustment
The advantage of this type of towing

hitch is that it is extremely easy to
adjust its height.
- Pull lock pin B out while gripping
and pulling handle A upwards to
disengage the pins from the
guides.
- Release the handle so that the pins 7181-203
engage the required locations.
n
CAUTION: WHEN TRANSPORTING HEAVY LOADS (EXCEEDING
THE TRACTOR’S WEIGHT) REDUCE THE SPEED TO UNDER 15 KM/H
(9.32 MPH). avv083gb
109
Sezione 3.pmd 109 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
CLASS “D2" AND ”D3" TOWING HITCHES
These towing hitches are available in
two versions:
D2 - Approved for towing trailers
with total weights of up to
14,000 kg (30864.4 lb) and
which can exert a vertical load on
the hitch of up to 2000 kg
(4409.2 lb).
D3 - Approved for towing special
trailers with total weights of up
to 20,000 kg (44092 lb) and 7181-204
which can exert a vertical load on
the hitch of up to 2500 kg
(5511.5 lb).
Both hitches can be fixed to the sup-
port brackets by inserting 2 pins A in
the required position after having
removed pins B.
Alternatively, these hitches can be
equipped with a height adjustment
device. These are adjusted as fol-
lows:
- Pull lock pin B while pulling handle
A upwards to disengage the pins
from the guides.
- Release the handle so that the pins
7181-205
engage the required locations in
the guides.
These types of hitch are used for
towing trailers equipped with hy-
draulic or pneumatic braking sys-
tems.
n
ATTENTION: WHEN TOWING TRAILERS, REMEMBER TO PUT ALL
OPERATING ELEMENTS IN THE NEUTRAL POSITION BEFORE LEAVING THE
DRIVER’S CAB, TO SWITCH ON THE ALL-WHEEL DRIVE, TO APPLY THE
HAND BRAKE, TO SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE, TO ENGAGE THE LOWEST
GEAR (WITH MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION) AND TO REMOVE THE
IGNITION KEY. IN THE CASE OF HYDRAULIC OR POWERSHIFT
TRANSMISSION OR POWERSHUTTLE THE TRACTOR AND TRAILER WHEELS
MUST ALWAYS BE BLOCKED. avv157gb ver 2
110
Sezione 3.pmd 110 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Drawbar* and Piton Fix* towing hitch
Adjusting swinging drawbar in
length
The swinging drawbar length can be
adjusted if required. For this pur-
pose, pull out pin with spring cotter
below tractor body, move drawbar
into desired position, then refit pin
and secure with spring cotter as fol-
lows:
Insert spring cotter from the right so
that the short spring yoke is at the 7181-206
rear.
Fixing the swinging drawbar

1
With the bolts 2 the swinging draw-
bar 3 is centrally fixed.
Bolts 2 must be secured by the re- 3
taining bolt 1 as well as by the linch
pin fixed to the chain.
Reference dimensions and sup-
ported loads
2
7181-207
Distance hitching point Maximum supported loads

to end of power take-off shaft at hitching point
830 mm/32.70 in 1500 kg/3306.9 lb

680 mm/26.79 in 2000 kg/4409.2 lb
510 mm/20.09 in 3000 kg/6613.8 lb
n
WARNING: NEVER ALLOW ANYONE TO RIDE ON THE DRAWBAR
OR THE LOWER LIFT ARMS WHEN THE TRACTOR IS IN MOTION.
avv027gb
111
Sezione 3.pmd 111 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Adjusting swinging drawbar
sideways
Remove one of the bolts 2, move
drawbar 3 sideways to the desired 1
direction.
For fixing in the new position, secure 3
again the swinging drawbar with one
of the bolts 2.
Then, secure bolt 2 by the retaining
bolt 1 and the linch pin fixed to the
2
chain.
Free swinging of the drawbar is 7181-208
achieved by removing the bolts 2.
n
WARNING: NEVER TOW IMPLEMENTS USING LOWER LINK ARMS.
PULL ONLY FROM THE APPROVED DRAWBAR OR TOW HITCH.
TOWING OR ATTACHING TO OTHER LOCATIONS MAY CAUSE THE
TRACTOR TO OVERTURN. avv029gb
n
CAUTION: WHEN OPERATING PTO DRIVEN EQUIPMENT OR WHEN
TOWING HEAVY EQUIPMENT AT TRANSPORT SPEEDS, LOCK THE
DRAWBAR IN ITS CENTER POSITION WITH RETAINING PINS AND
ATTACH IMPLEMENT SAFETY CHAINS. avv030gb
112
Sezione 3.pmd 112 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Piton Fix *
– Coupling
To couple, unlock linch pin arranged
at the retaining pin and withdraw
retaining cotter and pull out pin. 3
1
Lift butt strap 3 and lower drawbar
onto Piton Fix 2.
Lower butt strap 3 again onto Piton
Fix, press home pin and secure with
linch pin.
The maximum permissible Piton Fix 2
supported weight is 3000 kg (6613.8 7181-209
lb).
– Uncoupling
After uncoupling, press home again pin 1 and secure with linch pin.
Only suspend implements and trailers with the provided drawbar.
n
CAUTION: WEIGHT OF TOWED EQUIPMENT, WITHOUT BRAKES,
SHOULD NOT EXCEED WEIGHT OF TRACTOR. avv125gb
n
WARNING: WHEN OPERATING THE LIFT CONTROLS, STAND WELL
CLEAR OF THE OPERATING RADIUS OF THE LIFT ARMS AND ANY
ATTACHED IMPLEMENTS.
THIS IS TO AVOID THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE CASE OF
INCORRECT MANOEUVRES. avv031gb
n
SECTION.
113
Sezione 3.pmd 113 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
2 1 2
3 3
4
4
7 7
6 6
5 K 5
7181-211
Three-point hitch
1 = Upper link – adjustable with catching hook, ball and cable control
2 = Lift arms
3 = Lifting cylinders
4 = Lift linkages – adjustable
5 = Lower links, standard
6 = Lower links with catching hooks and balls, or balls with catching cones
and linch pins *
7 = Lateral stabilization
To control side sway of the lower links and to set coupling width
K = Coupling width
- with Cat. II = 870 mm/34.28 in
- with Cat. III = 1010 mm/39.79 in
114
Sezione 3.pmd 114 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Mounting implements - standard design
Move the tractor towards the imple-
ment such that the coupling balls of
the lower links are positioned under-
neath the coupling pins of the imple-
ment.
Operate parking brake.
Couple lower link to the implement
and secure with linch pins. In case of
unilaterally supported implements,
e.g. plough, first couple the support-
ed side.
TB-0646
Coupling implements - with rapid couplers *
– Completely lower the lower link of

the powerlift. 2
– Drive tractor back to the

implement with lowered lower links 1
until the catching hook is
underneath the coupling points of
the implement.
– Slightly lift powerlift until the
implement is seized by the catching
hooks. The locking nose1 of the
7181-192
catching hook is pressed back.
- Attach upper control arm to upper

attachment point of attachment
device. To do this, briefly raise 3
lever 3. The locking lug must then
return to its lock position.
7181-437
115
Sezione 3.pmd 115 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Removing implements – with rapid couplers *
Rope must be fitted in the eyes of 7181-214a
interlock flaps 2 and 3. 3
- Lower implement such that it is
safely standing. 4
- Dismantle upper link from the 6
7
implement by lifting the locking
flap 2.
- Use bracket 7 to attach upper
control arm in holder 8. 5 8
- Lift locking flap 2 of the catch 2

hooks at the lower links – catch
hook unlocked.
1
- Further lower power lift and slowly
advance tractor.
7181-192
n
WARNING: IF MORE THAN ONE PERSON IS INVOLVED
ATTACHING AN IMPLEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN. WHEN
MAKING ANY ADJUSTMENT TO THE HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM, THE
PERSON(S) IN THE AREA MUST STAND CLEAR. SERIOUS INJURY
CAN RESULT BY BEING CRUSHED. avv028gb
n
CAUTION: ON BALLASTING THE TRACTOR, VERIFY THAT THE
FRONT AXLE WEIGHT IS AT LEAST THE 20% OF THE TOTAL
TRACTOR WEIGHT. IT’S TO GUARANTEE A SAFE STEERING. avv102gb
n
WARNING: NEVER ENTER THE AREA BETWEEN THE TRACTOR AND
THE IMPLEMENT WHEN THE TRACTOR IS IN MOTION. ALWAYS
LOWER THE IMPLEMENT WHEN THE TRACTOR IS STATIONARY.avv081gb
116
Sezione 3.pmd 116 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Safety measures for coupling and uncoupling of implements
If it should become necessary to leave the tractor during coupling and un-
coupling of implements, always set the gear shift lever to “Neutral” and
operate the parking brake.
Prior to uncoupling implements, observe the following:
– Tractor standing still
– Gear shift lever in neutral position
– Engine running
– Operate parking brake
Lower implement until it is secure and load on upper control arm is re-
duced.
Disconnect upper control arm and attach in holder 8.
Raise interlock flap 2, pull to left and snap into place. Lower implement lift
further and slowly drive the tractor forwards.
Upper link
Remove upper link with yoke 3 from
2
the holder.
By twisting the center part 4, the 3
1
upper link is length-adjusted. Turn 1
out only up to the basic marking.
Then counter with wheel 5. 5
During on-road travel without imple-
ment, the upper link must always be 4
fastened by suspending the yoke 3
to the holder at the tractor rear. TB-0657
Adjusting upper link

You must adjust the length of the
top link after you finish hitching the
3
implement to the tractor.
For length-adjustment, fold upward
4
the retaining yoke 4.
6
Then, the upper link can be brought 7
to the desired length by twisting the
center part 5. Take care that the
upper link is turned out maximally up
to the basic marking of the thread. 5 8
Then, secure the upper link against
twisting by folding the yoke 4 onto 7181-214a
pin 6.
117
Sezione 3.pmd 117 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Adjusting lift rods
Adjusting the lift rods renders it pos-
sible to raise or lower the entire lift-
ing range of the three-point hitch.
Depending on the implement in-
volved, the lift rods can be adjusted
uniformly – e.g. for rotary ploughs –
or unilaterally – e.g. for mouldboard
ploughs.
Shortening the lift rods = high lift-

out level, e.g. for the carry or trans-
7181-215a
port position, and low working depth
of implements.
Lengthening the lift rods = low

lift-out level and increased working
depth of implements.
For the purpose of adjusting the lift
rods, lift adjusting sleeve over torsion
lock 1.
Adjust lift rods by turning adjusting
sleeve. After the adjustment, lower
adjusting sleeve back into position so
that it is flush on the torsion lock 1.
1
7181-216
NOTE: When adjusting the length of the top link of the 3-point
hitch, take care that it does not come apart and ensure that a
sufficient length of the threaded end of the turnbuckle is
screwed into the turnbuckle housing to withstand the tractive
force applied when working.
n
WARNING: NEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES USE THE 3-
POINT LINKAGE TO TOW TRAILERS. avv126gb
n
avv122gb
WARNING: DO NOT DRIVE WHERE TRACTOR COULD SLIP OR TIP.
118
Sezione 3.pmd 118 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Implement Stabilization
Side stabilisation, right
The right-hand stabilisation is spring-

loaded.
It can be adjusted between catego-
ries II and III.
- Pull out spring connector

- Set category required
- Re-secure rod with spring connector 1
7181-218
Lateral stabilization, automatic *
The lateral stabilization controls the

1
side sway of the lower links during
transport and in working position.
Swinging position = claw 1 up.
With short stabilizing chains:
– Lower links in the raised position
are rigid.
– Lower links in the lowered position
are freely movable.
With long stabilizing chains:
7181-219
– Lower links are rigid in all
positions.
Lateral stabilization, length adjustable *
For example:
To change from cat. II to cat. III: 1 2
Lift the catch 1, raise bracket 2 from

the locked position and turn the
sleeve to adjust the length of the
stabiliser to obtain the correct width
between the lower links for the cate-
gory of implement.
- for cat. II = 870 mm/34.28 in
- for cat. III = 1010 mm/39.79 in 7181-220
Then bring stirrup 2 back into its

locking position.
119
Sezione 3.pmd 119 20/12/2004, 10.27

CHAPTER 3 Use
Adapt side stabiliser *

1
Pull flap connector 1, set length re-

quired. Fit flap connector 1 and se-
cure.
TB-0187
Pendulum compensation – rigid setting
Lifting mechanisms and lower con-

trol arms are connected by a bolt.
If the bolt is fitted in bore A, the
lower control arms are set to rigid.
If the bolt is fitted in long slot B, the
lower control arms can swing in the
air. The towing lug must be rotated
through 180° for this to be possible.
A
7181-222a
- Pendulum position
- Gentler connection available.
- Implement can adapt itself to
ground profile.
7181-223a
120
Sezione 3.pmd 120 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Cab
Climate control
The climate control system is control-
1
led by way of three knobs on the
panel to the left of the driver: 2 3
4
2
1 - blower control (4 speed)
1
3
2 - air conditioning (on - off)
0
0
1
3 - temperature control - heating
system - (mixes warm air with
cool air to obtain the desired
temperature and humidity level)
7181-128
Ventilation
Blower control
The blower control has four speed 2 3
settings. 4
1
Turn the knob to select the required
speed.
0
Position 0 = blower off
Position 1 = minimum speed
Position 2 = low speed
Position 3 = medium speed
Position 4 = maximum speed
7181-129
n
CAUTION: THE CAB IS IN FULL CONFORMITY WITH THE
INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS AS TO THE CAB’S
SOUNDPROOFING.BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN OPERATING IN SMALL
SPACES AND ALWAYS PROTECT YOUR EARS WHENEVER OTHER
WORKING EQUIPMENT IS GENERATING DANGEROUS NOISE
LEVELS. avv089gb
n
WARNING: IF THE ROPS/CAB HAS BEEN DAMAGED OR MODIFIED,
THE ROPS/CAB MUST BE REPLACED TO PROVIDE THE ORIGINAL
DEGREE OF PROTECTION.AFTER AN ACCIDENT, CHECK FOR
DAMAGE TO THE ROPS/CAB, OPERATOR’S SEAT, SEAT BELT AND
SEAT BELT MOUNTINGS.BEFORE YOU OPERATE THE TRACTOR,
REPLACE ALL DAMAGED PARTS. avv145gb
121
Sezione 3.pmd 121 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
7181-130a
The air is drawn in through two filters incorporated in the cab uprights and
distributed inside the cab through adjustable and directable outlet vents.
The air flow for windscreen demisting is distributed through the slot along
the top of the instrument console; for rapid demisting, temporarily close all
other air vents.
Outlet nozzles
Outlet nozzles for personal comfort (in the driver area, particularly for
hands, feet and face):
A - 5 nozzles are located on the front of the dashboard.
B - Inside the wing, outlet nozzles for the cab ventilation (for uniform tem-
perature distribution and for defrosting):
C - 4 outlet nozzles at the side of the instrument panel.
D - 1 outlet nozzle behind at left hand.
F - 2 defrost slots in the front of the dashboard and 2 above it.
E - 2 inlet nozzles underneath (on the inside of the wing).
G - 2 inlet nozzles above (on the cab uprights).
H - Fresh air filter.
122
Sezione 3.pmd 122 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning control

The air conditioning system operates
with R134a refrigerant (ecological)
The refrigerant circulates in a closed

pressuried circuit. C
Under no circumstances must the

user open the refrigerant circuit.
7181-131
C – Outlet nozzles to the side of the

instrument panel
- The air conditioning system
operates with engine running only.
- To obtain maximum efficiency from
the system, close all the windows.
E
- The temperature of the air inside
the cab should not be more than
6-8°C (42.8-46.4°F) below the
outside air temperature.
- With greater temperature
differences there is a risk of
physical discomfort.
7181-132
E – Inlet nozzles underneath
- If the system does not seem to be 7181-133a

operating efficiently, contact a
specialist service centre.
- All servicing of the air conditioning
system must only be carried out by
specially trained personnel.
F1 - Adjustment nozzles at front top F1

of instrument panel (also for door
defrosting). F2
F2 - Defrost slots for front wind-

screens.
123
Sezione 3.pmd 123 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
B - Outlet nozzles on the inside of 7181-385

the wing.
B
6 4
1000
540
N
E
A - 3 nozzles are located on the front

of the dashboard. A
7181-135
A - 2 nozzles are located underneath 24

1/min
rpm
the dashboard. 1/min

X100 %
5 10 15 20 25 30
A
7181-136
124
Sezione 3.pmd 124 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Air conditioning controls
Position 1: air conditioning on

Position 0: air conditioning off
1
On switching the air conditioning on,
the blower will start operating at
minimum speed.
0
The air conditiong system can

provide cool, dehumidified air.
Heating and air conditioning
can be combined to reduce the 7181-138
humidity in warm-wet climates.
Heating system
It is designed to ensure a uniform
temperature inside the cab and is
efficient even at low-medium engine
4
3
speeds.
2
1
0
It provides effective defrosting and

0
1
demisting of all cab windows (front,

rear and side).
The air heating system utilises en-
gine coolant heat.
7181-137
n
avv088gb
DANGER: DO NOT WELD, DRILL, BEND OR MODIFY THE ROPS OR

THE CABIN. TO DO SO REDUCES THE PROTECTION IT OFFERS.
n
DANGER: SHOULD THE SYSTEM DEVELOP A VISIBLE LEAK , DO
NOT APPROACH WITH A NAKED FLAME. REFRIGERANT GAS IS
FLAMMABLE AND ON COMBUSTION PRODUCES HIGHLY TOXIC
SUBSTANCES. avv095gb
n
WARNING: CONTACT WITH REFRIGERANT CAN CAUSE SEVERE
SKIN LESIONS. IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH THE EYES, DO NOT
RUB EYES, SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ASSISTANCE. avv075gb
125
Sezione 3.pmd 125 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Manual temperature control
To select the air temperature, turn A

pointer A to the required position on
the red/blue band.
- turn clockwise (red) to increase the
temperature
- turn counter-clockwise (blue) to
reduce the temperature
7181-139
Fresh/recycled air controls

- To increase the amount of fresh air
drawn in from outside the cab,
A
move the two levers located on the
cab uprights to position A. The
fresh air will enter through the B
vents in the cab uprights.
- To reduce the amount of fresh air
obtained from outside the cab,
move the levers to position B.
When the two vents in the cab up-

rights are fully closed, the air inside 7181-140
the cab will be continuously recycled.
n
WARNING: ONLY USE THE PROTECTIVE COOLING SYSTEM AGENT
SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER. THIS CAN BE ORDERED FROM
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR OR FROM DEUTZ AG.
THE PROTECTIVE COOLING SYSTEM AGENT SHOULD BE USED ALL
YEAR ROUND AT THE SPECIFIED CONCENTRATION. avv138gb
n
WARNING: IF THE TRACTOR HAS TO OPERATE IN AREAS WITH
RISK OF FALLING OBJECTS (LIKE IN MINES, ETC.), WHERE A FOPS
IS REQUIRED, PLEASE CONSIDER THAT YOUR TRACTOR, EQUIPPED
WITH ROPS SAFETY STRUCTURE (FRAME OR CAB), IS NOT
ALLOWED TO OPERATE IN THOSE AREAS. avv146gb
126
Sezione 3.pmd 126 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Active carbon air filter
Active carbon filters are removed and fitted in the same way as normal
filters.
Warning: the filter does not provide total protection against toxic
substances.
- When handling the filter, wear protective gloves; this filter is to be fitted in
place of the standard dust filter.
- After each use, the filter must be removed and replaced in its original
packaging. The standard dust filter must then be refitted. The packaging
should be carefully sealed in order to keep the filter in good working
condition.
- This filter, if used correctly and for no longer than a total of 200 hours, has
a maximum life of 36 months from the moment the packaging is opened
(the date of manufacture is indicated on the filter).
- It is important that the filter be removed during use of the tractor for any
applications other than pesticide spraying; dust will clog the filter in a very
short time.
- Do not wash the filter or clean with compressed air.
- Used filters must be disposed of at specialised waste disposal centres.
Always follow the instructions provided by the product manufacturer.
n
CAUTION: WHEN USING CHEMICALS, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THE
CHEMICAL MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE, STORAGE
AND DISPOSAL. ALSO FOLLOW THE CHEMICAL APPLICATION
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. avv117gb
n
DANGER: REPLACE THE „ACTIVE CARBON“ FILTER AFTER 200
WORKING HOURS OR AFTER 36 MONTHS. IF YOU NOTICE SMELL
OF PESTICIDE INSIDE THE CAB, REPLACE IMMEDIATELY THE FILTER
AND LET CHECKED THE CAB GASKETS. avv092gb
n
WARNING: „PAPER“ FILTER IS NOT SUITABLE FOR THE TREATMENT
OF PESTICIDES AND SO MUST BE REPLACED BY AN „ACTIVE
CARBON“ FILTER AVAILABLE OPTIONALLY.
ONCE THE PESTICIDE TREATMENT IS FINISHED, IT IS NECESSARY
TO ONCE AGAIN REPLACE THE „ACTIVE CARBON“ FILTER WITH
THE PAPER FILTER, SINCE THIS IS THE ONLY TYPE SUITED FOR
FILTERING FOREIGN PARTICLES FROM THE AIR. avv091gb
127
Sezione 3.pmd 127 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Connector sockets (Standard)

A = Trailer receptacle
1 = Left-hand flashing and turn 7 1
indicators 2
2 = Not occupied 6 3
3 = 31 – Ground
5 4
4 = Right-hand flashing and turn
indicators
A B
5 = 58 R tail light right and number
plate light
6 = 54 brake light
7 = 58 L tail light
7181-141
B = Additional socket for exter-
nal consumers (e.g. hand
lamp)
Connector sockets (for N.A. market)*
A = Trailer receptacle
7 1
1 = Ground
2
2 = Position lamp, left-hand
3 = Left-hand flashing and turn indi- 6 3
cators 5 4
4 = +12 V direct
A
5 = Right-hand flashing and turn B
indicators
6 = Position lamp, right-hand
7 = Switched power (+12 V)
7216-52
B = Additional socket for external
consumers (e.g. hand lamp)
Arrangement of electrical
implement sockets
The standard sockets for suspended
or attached implements are in the
rear right of the cab, directly under- 1
neath the rear window.
1 = Power socket 2
2 = Signal socket
3 = External socket 3
7181-142
128
Sezione 3.pmd 128 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Power socket
1 = Not occupied
2 = 31 ground
1
3 = 30 voltage supply 12 Volt, max.
25 Ampere
3 2
7181-143
Signal socket as per ISO 11786
1 = Actual driving speed (only in

connection with radar sensor) – 4
130 lmp/m 3
2 = Theoretical driving speed 130 5
lmp/m
3 = P.T.O. speed 6 lmp/rpm 2
6
4 = Listing signal for three-point
hitch (on / off) 7 1
5 = Position signal for three-point
hitch
6 = +12V 7181-144
7 = Ground/earth
External socket
1 = Ground 3 2
2 = Signal from external sensor
3 = Power supply
4 = Not occupied
4 1
7181-145
129
Sezione 3.pmd 129 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Overhead indirect control panel

light
Is on only when road lights are on.
The overhead control panel light
sheds non-glare light onto the right-
hand control panel.
Use the slide switch to switch the
control panel light on/off.
7181-146
Cab interior light

By activating the switch, the function 3
of the cab light can be changed as 2
1
follows:
1 = Door contact – light is switched
on at opened left door
2 = Lighting off
3 = Continuous light
7181-147a
Ashtray and cigar lighter

Located on left-hand side to the rear
of the passenger seat.
To empty the ashtray B, open it and
depress the spring retainer C to dis- A C
enagage it from the catch. B
The cigar lighter A may also be used
as a 12V power socket.
7181-148a
130
Sezione 3.pmd 130 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Clock *
Adjustment:
Key 1 = h = to set the hour
Key 2 = min = to set the minutes
1 2
7181-149
Radio *
The space for the installation of a
radio is in the roof lining at the top
right-hand side.
7181-150
Loudspeakers *
The loudspeakers are in the rear part
of the cab ceiling.
A - Clock*
7181-151a
131
Sezione 3.pmd 131 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Interior rearview mirrors

The interior rearview mirrors are
located at the front of the cab on the
left and right.
They enable the driver to obtain a
clear view of the implement without
having to turn around, and better
visibility when travelling on the road.
7181-153
n
CAUTION: DO NOT PERMIT OTHERS TO RIDE ON THE TRACTOR
OR THE IMPLEMENT UNLESS AN APPROVED PASSENGER SEAT HAS
BEEN INSTALLED OR MADE AVAILABLE AS AN OPTION BY THE
MANUFACTURE(S). avv015gb
n
DANGER: TO AVOID EYE INJURY, NEVER EXPOSE EYES TO WAVE
EMISSION ZONES WHEN RADAR IS IN OPERATION. DO THE RADAR
MAINTENANCE ONLY AFTER ENGINE TURNED OFF AND
IGNITION KEY IN STOP POSITION. avv120gb
132
Sezione 3.pmd 132 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Storage compartment
Has a capacity of 70 cm3 (4.27 in3)
and can hold a DIN standard First
Aid kit.
Check periodically that the first aid
kit is complete and that the medi-
cines have not passed their expiry
date.
7181-154
n
CAUTION: IT IS IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS HAVE FIRST-AID
EQUIPMENT READ-ILY
AVAILABLE:
- EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBERS ON HAND (DOCTOR,
HOSPITAL, AMBULANCE, FIREMEN). avv018gb
133
Sezione 3.pmd 133 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Refrigerator compartment
Utilises the air conditioning system.
Can hold a 2 litre (0.53 US gal.)
bottle and a can of soft drink.
In winter, this compartment becomes
a convenient food warmer using the
heat produced by the cab heating
system.
7181-155
Doors and windows

Cab door
To unlock the door turn key to the
left.
7181-157
To open the door – press the button.
To open the door from the inside

turn the red handle in the direction
of the arrow.
Even locked doors can be opened

from the inside.
7181-158
134
Sezione 3.pmd 134 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Children’s guard * 7181-159
To lock the cabin door from inside –

children’s guard – operate lever at
the lower end of door handle.
2 1
1 = Door unlocked – may be opened
from outside and inside
2 = Door locked – may be opened
only from out side
Front window
1 2
Gap opening
Lock locking toggle in section 2 of
the lock holder.
Closing the window
Lock locking toggle in section 1 of
lock holder.
Front window can also be opened all
the way up.
7181-160
135
Sezione 3.pmd 135 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Installation of additional controls and display units
M10 threaded bores are located
under the covers 1. These can be
used to secure additional controls
and display units.
If necessary, bore 2 (Ø 7mm) can
also be used
DANGER: Do not modify the

cab in any way. Drilling or
welding on the cab is NOT PER-
MITTED!
7205-113
Rear window
Gap opening
Lift lever 1 and press it backward
(fold it) until it is engaged.
Completely opening the window
First into positon gap opening, then 1
withdraw lever 2 from groove and
open window. 2
Closing
Press lever 2 back into groove. Main-
tain lever 2 with the thumb, pull 7181-161
lever 1 and close window.
High-visibility roof (optional) 7205-56
The cab roof features a large window

allowing improved visibility when
operating a front loader.
The roof hatch opens to allow venti-
lation; a sliding sunshield protects
the cab from direct sunlight.
To open the roof hatch, turn the
lever counter-clockwise.
136
Sezione 3.pmd 136 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
Instrument introduction flap 7181-165
To open the instrument introduction

flap, open rear window.
Turn yoke 1.
Fold instrument introduction flap 2 1 2
backward.
Close rear window again.
Sunshade – roof hatch * 7205-56a
The sliding sunshade can be slid

forwards in a continuously variable
manner.
Sunshade *
The sunshade for the front window
may be steplessly extended down-
ward.
For rolling up again – press red lever
at the right side of the sunshade
upward.
The sunshade at the rear window * is
functioning in the same way.
7181-163
137
Sezione 3.pmd 137 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 3 Use
138
Sezione 3.pmd 138 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Chapter 4 - WHEELS
Track adjustment ........................................................... 140

Permissible tyre combinations ........................................ 145
Track width adjustment for wheels with
adjustable rims .............................................................. 147
Track width adjustment for wheels with fixed rims ........ 154
Ballasting * .................................................................... 161
Water ballasting ............................................................. 164
Mixed-automatic air braking system* ............................ 166
*
type of market.
n
139
Sezione 4.pmd 139 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Track adjustment
Tracks are adjusted to match the tractor to different row spacings and im-
plements, e.g. ploughs.
Tractors are delivered with disc wheels – non-track-adjusting – or track-ad-
justing wheels – at option. Depending on the size of the tires, you can
choose among up to eight different track widths.
Furthermore, bear in mind the international ruling providing that the dis-
tance between the outer edge of the illuminated face of direction indica-
tors, position lights, tail lights and top rear reflectors and the outer edge of
the tires should not exceed 400 mm (15.72 in).
Any maximum track widths which may be specified in the vehicle registra-
tion papers for the travelling on public lanes and roads must not be exceed-
ed.
After any adjustment to the track width and whenever changing the wheels,
tighten the nuts and bolts to the following required tightening torques:
- Front wheels
bolts M20x1,5: 36 kgm (350 Nm), 258.3 lbf ft;
- Rear wheels
Agrotron 120-130-150-150.7
bolts M20x1,5: 49 kgm (500 Nm), 369 lbf ft;
Agrotron 165.7
bolts M22x1,5: 50 kgm (500 Nm), 369 lbf ft;
After 20 hours of work, all the nuts and bolts fixing the front and rear
wheels have to be retightened to the previous torques.
Before changing the wheels, ensure that the tractor cannot move and use
suitable supports.
Seating the tyre on the rim using compressed air: ensure that the air
line extension between the valve and the person inflating the tyre is of
sufficient length to allow the person to stand by the side of the tyre rather
than in front of it. This operation should be carried out by specially trained
personnel only.
n
WARNING: FOR WHEELS DISASSEMBLING AND FOR
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR, LIFT THE TRACTOR, USING SPECIFIC
TOOLS ONLY. avv047gb
140
Sezione 4.pmd 140 20/12/2004, 17.04

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Tyre inflation pressures
There are significant differences between the air pressures required for the
various tyres.
This relates both to the tyre dimensions and the manufacturers.
Please contact the tyre dealer or manufacturer for the air pressure needed
for your application.
For front and back, the following apply as general guideline values:
- mainly transport work, approx. 1,9 bar (27.56psi)
- mixed applications, approx. 1,6 bar (23.21psi)
- mainly field applications, approx. 1,4 bar (20.31psi)
For the tyre bead to seat correctly on the rim, the inflation pressure must
never exceed 5 bar (72.52 psi). Higher inflations pressures may cause the
tyre/rim to explode.
We recommend the use of metal safety cages or tyre restraint bars when
carrying out operations that require tyre inflation pressures above the val-
ues for normal use.
IMPORTANT - When working on agricultural land in conditions requiring
maximum grip, the rear tyre inflation pressure may be reduced to a mini-
mum. Please contact the tyre dealer or manufacturer for the air pressure
needed for your application.
Narrow track
– at rear
Depending on the given tire size, not all of the shown track widths are suit-
able for your tractor, as tire and fender may interfere. When selecting the
track width, make sure that there is adequate clearance between fender
and tire.
– at front
If you combine a narrow front axle track width with wide tires, watch out
that this does not block too much the steer angle. Check the distance be-
tween engine hood and fenders. For this purpose, turn front wheels against
lock, then move front wheels up and down and let axle swing.
n
WARNING: FOR THE TYRE BEAD TO SEAT CORRECTLY ON THE
RIM, THE INFLATION PRESSURE MUST NEVER EXCEED 5 BAR
(72.52 PSI).
HIGHER INFLATIONS PRESSURES MAY CAUSE THE TYRE/RIM TO
EXPLODE.
WE RECOMMEND THE USE OF METAL SAFETY CAGES OR TYRE
RESTRAINT BARS WHEN CARRYING OUT OPERATIONS THAT
REQUIRE TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES ABOVE THE VALUES FOR
NORMAL USE. avv127gb
141
Sezione 4.pmd 141 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Width of front axle:
(without wheels): 1710 mm
(67.37 in)
Mechanical ratio:
(front wheel revolutions / rear wheel
revolution)
AGROTRON 120-130: 1,3625
AGROTRON X
150-150.7-165.7: 1,3172
7181-72
Width of rear axle: (without wheels):

AGROTRON 120-130-150-150.7:
1640 mm (64.16 in)
AGROTRON 165.7: 1890 mm
(74.47 in)
Row crop tires
When changing the tractor over to
row crop (bar tread) tires, observe
load rating and speed limits! X
Please turn to your DEUTZ-FAHR
dealership for more information on
registration, load rating, inflation
pressure, track widths, etc. 7181-73
The suppliers for the row crop tires

are Messrs. Grasdorf.
Running direction of tires

Tyres must always be fitted so that
the tread pattern is oriented correctly
with respect to the direction of for-
ward travel. In the case of wheels
where the rim is welded to the
wheel disc, the left and right wheels
may be swapped over to alter the
track width; in all cases, however,
the V-shaped tread pattern must
always point towards the front of the
tractor, as shown in the figure above.
Note: approved tyre combinations: 7181-225
in each market, only the approved
combinations for the specific zone
are available.
142
Sezione 4.pmd 142 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Adjusting steering stops
After every change of the front tyres, check the steering angle.
Procedure:
– Operate parking brake
– Additionally secure tractor against rolling (wheel chock)
– In the case of tractors with suspended front axle, disconnect front axle
suspension
– Jack up tractor at its front
– Turn steering wheel (to left and right).
When the front axle is in the condi-

tion of maximum oscillation and the
wheels are turned to the maximum
steering angle, there must be no
interference between the fenders
A
and engine hood. If necessary, adjust
the internal angle by way of bolts A. A A
Note: If the front axle is spring-
mounted, this work should be A A
carried out in a specialist work-
7181-226
shop.
n
WARNING: ALWAYS MAINTAIN THE CORRECT TYRE PRESSURE.
WHEN INFLATING THE TYRES MAKE SURE TO STAND TO THE SIDE
OF THE CENTRAL FLANGE. avv128gb
143
Sezione 4.pmd 143 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Adjustable track wheels

1
1 = Bracket
2 = Rim
3 = Bracket thickness
4 = Wheel disc
3 4 7181-227
The support bracket 1 on the rim 2 is fixed offset with respect to the cen-
treline of the rim (and therefore with respect to the tyre too).
During fitting, the bracket can be fitted in contact with the wheel disc 4 on
both sides.
This allows for two different track widths.
Two more track widths can be achieved by turning round the rim 2 relative
to the wheel disc 4.
This means that there are 4 possible ways of fitting the rim 2 to the wheel
disc 4.
If you then fit the assembled wheel on to the hub (or rear half-shaft) with
the bell facing inside or outside you can actually achieve 8 different config-
urations (see the figures on following pages) for distance between the cen-
treline of the wheel and the contact surface on the wheel hub or half-shaft
flange.
Note: When setting the track width, ensure that the tyres are mount-
ed in the correct running direction.
n
ATTENTION: ADJUSTABLE GAUGE WHEEL RIMS MAY ONLY BE FITTED TO
TRACTORS WITH A MAXIMUM SPEED OF UP TO 40 KM/H. TT
144
Sezione 4.pmd 144 20/12/2004, 10.28

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Permissible tyre combinations
Tyres with adjustable rim wheels
Tires Model
Id* Front/rear 120 130 1 5 0 150.7 165.7
1 9.5R32-115 A8 / 9.5R48-136 A8 • •
2 230/95R32-139 A2 / 230/95R48-147 A2 • •
3 270/95R32-146 A2 / 270/95R48-154 A2 • •
4 270/95R32-146 A2 / 300/95R46-158 A2 • •
5 14.9R24-126 A8 / 16.9R38-141 A8 • •
6 16.9R24-134 A8 / 18.4R38-146 A8 • •
7 16.9R24-134 A8 / 18.4R38-159 A8 • •
8 420/70R24-130 A8 / 16.9R38-141 A8 • •
9 420/70R24-130 A8 / 520/70R34-148 A8 • •
10 480/70R24-138 A8 / 520/70R38-150 A8 • •
11 540/65R24-140 A8 / 600/65R38-153 A8 • •
12 230/95R32-128 A8 / 230/95R48-136 A8 •
13 270/95R32-146 A2 / 270/95R48-154 A2 •
14 230/95R36-141 A2 / 270/95R48-154 A2 • •
15 270/95R32-146 A2 / 300/95R46-158 A2 • •
16 420/70R28-133 A8 / 18.4R38-146 A8 • •
17 420/70R28-133 A8 / 18.4R38-159 A8 • •
18 480/65R28-136 A8 / 600/65R38-153 A8 • •
19 16.9R28-136 A8 / 20.8R38-153 A8 • •
20 480/70R28-140 A8 / 20.8R38-153 A8 • •
21 480/70R28-140 A8 / 580/70R38-155 A8 • •
22 230/95R36-141 A2 / 270/95R48-154 A2 •
23 270/95R32-146 A2 / 300/95R46-158 A2 •
24 420/70R28-133 A8 / 18.4R38-146 A8 •
25 420/70R28-133 A8 / 18.4R38-159 A8 •
26 16.9R28-136 A8 / 20.8R38-153 A8 •
27 480/70R28-140 A8 / 20.8R38-153 A8 •
28 420/70R28-140 A8 / 580/70R38-155 A8 •
*: The letters 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on pages 149 - 153.
145
Sezione 4.pmd 145 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Permissible tyre combinations
Tyres with adjustable rim wheels
Tires Model
Id* Front/rear 120 130 1 5 0 150.7 165.7
1 9.5R32-115 A8 / 9.5R48-136 A8 • •
2 230/95R32-139 A2 / 230/95R48-147 A2 • •
3 270/95R32-146 A2 / 270/95R48-154 A2 • • •
4 270/95R32-146 A2 / 300/95R46-158 A2 • • • •
5 14.9R24-126 A8 / 16.9R38-141 A8 • •
6 14.9R24-126 A8 / 18.4R34-144 A8 • •
7 16.9R24-134 A8 / 18.4R38-146 A8 • •
8 16.9R24-134 A8 / 18.4R38-159 A8 • •
9 420/70R24-130 A8 / 16.9R38-141 A8 • •
10 420/70R24-130 A8 / 520/70R34-148 A8 • •
11 480/70R24-138 A8 / 520/70R38-150 A8 • •
12 540/65R24-140 A8 / 600/65R38-153 A8 • •
13 230/95R32-128 A8 / 230/95R48-136 A8 •
14 230/95R36-141 A2 / 270/95R48-154 A2 • •
15 420/70R28-133 A8 / 18.4R38-146 A8 • •
16 420/70R28-133 A8 / 18.4R38-159 A8 • •
17 420/70R28-133 A8 / 520/70R38-150 A8 •
18 480/70R26-139 A8 / 520/70R38-150 A8 • •
19 480/65R28-136 A8 / 600/65R38-153 A8 • •
20 16.9R28-136 A8 / 20.8R38-153 A8 • •
21 480/70R28-140 A8 / 20.8R38-153 A8 • •
22 480/70R28-140 A8 / 580/70R38-155 A8 • •
23 540/65R28-137 A8 / 650/65R38-154 A8 • •
24 540/65R28-137 A8 / 650/65R38-157 A8 • •
25 230/95R36-141 A2 / 270/95R48-154 A2 •
26 270/95R32-146 A2 / 300/95R46-158 A2 •
27 420/70R28-133 A8 / 18.4R38-146 A8 •
28 420/70R28-133 A8 / 18.4R38-159 A8 •
29 480/70R26-139 A8 / 520/70R38-150 A8 •
30 16.9R28-136 A8 / 20.8R38-153 A8 •
31 480/70R28-140 A8 / 20.8R38-153 A8 •
32 480/70R28-140 A8 / 580/70R38-155 A8 •
33 540/65R28-137 A8 / 650/65R38-154 A8 •
34 540/65R28-137 A8 / 650/65R38-157 A8 •
*: The letters 1, 2, 3, etc. refer to the tables on pages 154 - 157.
146
Sezione 4.pmd 146 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
7181-66
Track width adjustment for wheels with adjustable rims
Front wheels
This figure illustrates the 8 different fitting possibilities used to obtain the
8 possible front track width settings shown in the tables on the following
pages.
147
Sezione 4.pmd 147 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
7181-65
Rear wheels
This figure illustrates the 8 different fitting possibilities used to obtain the
8 possible rear track settings shown in the tables on the following pages.
n
WARNING: WHEN IT IS NECESSARY TO WIDEN THE FRONT TREAD,
AVOID DANGEROUS OVERLOADS. avv129gb
148
Sezione 4.pmd 148 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Table 1 Table 2
Track widths front rear Track widths front rear

see figure on 9.5R32 9.5R48 see figure on 230/95R32 230/95R48
pages 147-148 115 A8 136 A8 pages 147-148 139 A2 147 A2
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) 1460 (57.52) - 2 mm (in) 1460 (57.52) -
3 mm (in) 1540 (60.68) 1480 (58.31) 3 mm (in) 1540 (60.68) 1480 (58.31)
4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1490 (58.71) 4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1490 (58.71)
5 mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1810 (71.31) 5 mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1810 (71.31)
6 mm (in) 1860 (73.28) 1820 (71.71) 6 mm (in) 1860 (73.28) 1820 (71.71)
7 mm (in) 1940 (76.44)*1880(74.07)* 7 mm (in) 1940 (76.44)*1880(74.07)*
8 mm (in) 2000 (78.80)*1890(74.47)* 8 mm (in) 2000 (78.80)*1890(74.47)*
Table 3 Table 4

see figure on 270/95R32 270/95R48 see figure on 270/95R32 300/95R46
pages 147-148 146 A2 154 A2 pages 147-148 146 A2 158 A2
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) 1450 (57.13) - 2 mm (in) 1450 (57.13) -
3 mm (in) 1550 (61.07) 1480 (58.31) 3 mm (in) 1550 (61.07) -
4 mm (in) 1650 (65.01) 1490 (58.71) 4 mm (in) 1650 (65.01) 1520 (59.89)
5 mm (in) 1750 (68.95) 1810 (71.31) 5 mm (in) 1750 (68.95) 1780 (70.13)
6 mm (in) 1850 (72.89) 1820 (71.71) 6 mm (in) 1850 (72.89) 1820 (71.71)
7 mm (in) 1950(76.83)* 1880(74.07)* 7 mm (in) 1950(76.83)* 1880(74.07)*
8 mm (in) 2050(80.77)* 1890(74.47)* 8 mm (in) 2050(80.77)* 1920(75.65)*
Table 5
Tables 1, 2, etc. refer to the
Track widths front rear tyre combinations denoted by
see figure on 14.9R24 16.9R38 these letters on page 145.
pages 147-148 126 A8 141 A8
1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) 1440 (56.74) -
3 mm (in) 1560 (61.46) -
* Track width is only permitted for
4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) -
field applications
5 mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1700 (66.98)
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92)
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)*
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)*
149
Sezione 4.pmd 149 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Table 6 Table 7

see figure on 16.9R24 18.4R38 see figure on 16.9R24 18.4R38
pages 147-148 134 A8 146 A8 pages 147-148 134 A8 159 A8
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) 1440 (56.74) - 2 mm (in) 1440 (56.74) -
3 mm (in) 1560 (61.46) - 3 mm (in) 1560 (61.46) -
4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) - 4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) -
5 mm (in) 1800 (70.92) - 5 mm (in) 1800 (70.92) -
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92) 6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92)
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)* 7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)*
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)* 8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)*
Table 8 Table 9

see figure on 420/70R24 16.9R38 see figure on 420/70R24 520/70R34
pages 147-148 130 A8 141 A8 pages 147-148 130 A8 148 A8
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) 1440 (56.74) - 2 mm (in) 1440 (56.74) -
3 mm (in) 1560 (61.46) - 3 mm (in) 1560 (61.46) -
4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) - 4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) -
5 mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1700 (66.98) 5 mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1700 (66.98)
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92) 6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92)
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)* 7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)*
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)* 8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)*
Table 10 Table 11
pages 147-148 138 A8 150 A8 pages 147-148 140 A8 153 A8
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) 1440 (56.74) - 2 mm (in) 1440 (56.74) -
3 mm (in) 1560 (61.46) - 3 mm (in) 1560 (61.46) -
4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) - 4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) -
5 mm (in) 1800 (70.92) - 5 mm (in) 1800 (70.92) -
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92) 6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) -
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)* 7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900 (74.86)
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)* 8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)*
* Track width is only permitted for field applications
150
Sezione 4.pmd 150 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Table 12 Table 13

pages 147-148 128 A8 136 A8 pages 147-148 134 A8 154 A2
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) - - 2 mm (in) - -
3 mm (in) 1580 (62.25) 1500 (59.10) 3 mm (in) 1550 (61.07) 1500 (59.10)
4 mm (in) 1620 (63.83) 1540 (60.68) 4 mm (in) 1650 (65.01) 1540 (60.68)
5 mm (in) 1780 (70.13) 1770 (69.74) 5 mm (in) 1750 (68.95) 1770 (69.74)
6 mm (in) 1820 (71.71) 1810 (7131) 6 mm (in) 1850 (72.89) 1810 (7131)
7 mm (in) 1980(78.01)* 1850 (72.89) 7 mm (in) 1950(76.83)* 1850 (72.89)
8 mm (in) 2020(79.59)* 1890(74.47)* 8 mm (in) 2050(80.77)* 1890(74.47)*
Table 14 Table 15

pages 147-148 141 A2 154 A2 pages 147-148 146 A2 158 A2
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) - - 2 mm (in) - -
3 mm (in) 1580 (62.25) 1500 (59.10) 3 mm (in) 1550 (61.07) 1500 (59.10)
4 mm (in) 1620 (63.83) 1540 (60.68) 4 mm (in) 1650 (65.01) 1540 (60.68)
5 mm (in) 1780 (70.13) 1770 (69.74) 5 mm (in) 1750 (68.95) 1770 (69.74)
6 mm (in) 1820 (71.71) 1810 (7131) 6 mm (in) 1850 (72.89) 1810 (7131)
7 mm (in) 1980(78.01)* 1850 (72.89) 7 mm (in) 1950(76.83)* 1850 (72.89)
8 mm (in) 2020(79.59)* 1890(74.47)* 8 mm (in) 2050(80.77)* 1890(74.47)*
Table 16 Table 17

see figure on 420/70R28 18.4R38 see figure on 420/70R28 18.4R38
pages 147-148 133 A8 146 A8 pages 147-148 133 A8 159 A8
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) - - 2 mm (in) - -
3 mm (in) - - 3 mm (in) - -
4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) - 4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) -
5 mm (in) 1790 (70.53) 5 mm (in) 1790 (70.53)
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92) 6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92)
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)* 7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)*
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)* 8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)*
151
Sezione 4.pmd 151 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Table 18 Table 19

see figure on 480/65R28 600/65R38 see figure on 16.9R28 20.8R38
pages 147-148 136 A8 153 A8 pages 147-148 136 A8 153 A8
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) - - 2 mm (in) - -
3 mm (in) - - 3 mm (in) - -
4 mm (in) - - 4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) -
5 mm (in) - - 5 mm (in) 1800 (70,92) -
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) - 6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92)
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)* 7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)*
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)* 8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)*
Table 20 Table 21

see figure on 480/70R28 20.8R38 see figure on 480/70R28 580/70R38
pages 147-148 140 A8 153 A8 pages 147-148 140 A8 155 A8
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) - - 2 mm (in) - -
3 mm (in) - - 3 mm (in) - -
4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) - 4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) -
5 mm (in) 1790 (70,53) - 5 mm (in) 1790 (70,53) -
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92) 6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 1800 (70,92)
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)* 7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 1900(74.86)*
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)* 8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2000(78.80)*
Table 22 Table 23
pages 147-148 141 A2 146 A2 pages 147-148 154 A2 158 A2
1 mm (in) - 1800 (70,92 1 mm (in) - 1800 (70,92
2 mm (in) - 2000(78.80)* 2 mm (in) - 2000(78.80)*
3 mm (in) 1580 (62.25) - 3 mm (in) 1550 (61.07) -
4 mm (in) 1620 (63.83) - 4 mm (in) 1650 (65.01) -
5 mm (in) 1780 (70.13) - 5 mm (in) 1750 (68.95) -
6 mm (in) 1820 (71.71) - 6 mm (in) 1850 (72.89) -
7 mm (in) 1980(78.01)* - 7 mm (in) 1950(76.83)* -
8 mm (in) 2020(79.59)* - 8 mm (in) 2050(80.77)* -
152
Sezione 4.pmd 152 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Table 24 Table 25

see figure on 420/70R28 18.4R38 see figure on 420/70R28 18.4R38
pages 147-148 133 A8 146 A8 pages 147-148 133 A8 159 A8
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) - - 2 mm (in) - -
3 mm (in) - 1750 (68.95) 3 mm (in) - 1750 (68.95)
4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1850 (72.89) 4 mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1850 (72.89)
5 mm (in) 1790 (70,53) 1950(76.83)* 5 mm (in) 1790 (70,53) 1950(76.83)*
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 2050(80.77)* 6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 2050(80.77)*
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 2150(84.71)* 7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 2150(84.71)*
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2250(88.65)* 8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2250(88.65)*
Table 26 Table 27

see figure on 16.9R28 20.8R38 see figure on 480/70R28 20.8R38
pages 147-148 136 A8 153 A8 pages 147-148 140 A8 153 A8
1 mm (in) - - 1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) - - 2 mm (in) - -
3 mm (in) - - 3 mm (in) - -
4 mm (in) - 1850 (72.89) 4 mm (in) - 1850 (72.89)
5 mm (in) 1790 (70,53) 1950(76.83)* 5 mm (in) 1790 (70,53) 1950(76.83)*
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 2050(80.77)* 6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 2050(80.77)*
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 2150(84.71)* 7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 2150(84.71)*
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2250(88.65)* 8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2250(88.65)*
Table 28
Tables 1, 2, etc. refer to the

Track widths front rear tyre combinations denoted by
see figure on 420/70R28 580/70R38 these letters on page 145.
pages 147-148 140 A8 155 A8
1 mm (in) - -
2 mm (in) - -
3 mm (in) - -
4 mm (in) - 1850 (72.89)
5 mm (in) 1790 (70,53) 1950(76.83)* * Track width is only permitted for
6 mm (in) 1840 (72.50) 2050(80.77)* field applications
7 mm (in) 1960(77.22)* 2150(84.71)*
8 mm (in) 2000(78.80)* 2250(88.65)*
153
Sezione 4.pmd 153 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Track width adjustment for wheels with fixed rims

In this case only two fitting
methods, A and B, are possible for B
A
the front and rear wheels, as shown
in the figure.
To adjust the track, the left wheel is

swapped with the right wheel. The
correct direction is thereby retained.
7181-64
Front wheels
A B
* Track width is only permitted for

field applications
Tables 1, 2, etc. refer to the tyre

combinations denoted by these
letters on page 146. 7181-63
Rear wheels
Table 1 Table 2

9.5R32 9.5R48 230/95R32 230/95R48
115 A8 136 A8 139 A2 147 A2
A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1500 (59.10) A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1500 (59.10)
B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92) B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92)
Table 3 Table 4

270/95R32 270/95R48 270/95R32 300/95R46
146 A2 154 A2 146 A2 158 A2
A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1500 (59.10) A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1500 (59.10)
B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92) B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92)
154
Sezione 4.pmd 154 20/12/2004, 17.06

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Table 5 Table 6

14.9R24 16.9R38 14.9R24 18.4R34
126 A8 141 A8 126 A8 144 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1700 (66.98) 1700 (66.98) B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92)
Table 7 Table 8

16.9R24 18,4R38 16.9R24 18,4R38
134 A8 146 A8 134 A8 159 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92) B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92)
Table 9 Table 10

420/70R24 16.9R38 420/70R24 520/70R34
130 A8 141 A8 130 A8 148 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1700 (66.98) 1700 (66.98) B mm (in) 1700 (66.98) 1700 (66.98)
Table 11 Table 12

480/70R24 520/70R38 540/65R24 600/65R38
138 A8 150 A8 140 A8 153 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92) B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1850 (72.89)
Table 13 Table 14

230/95R32 230/95R48 230/95R36 270/95R48
128 A8 136 A8 141 A8 154 A8
A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1500(59.10) A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1500(59.10)
B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92) B mm (in) 1820 (71.71) 1800 (70.92)
Table 15
Track widths front rear

420/70R28 18,4R38
133 A8 146 A8 Tables 1, 2, etc. refer to the tyre
A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) - combinations denoted by these
B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92) letters on page 146.
155
Sezione 4.pmd 155 20/12/2004, 17.06

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Table 16 Table 17

420/70R28 18,4R38 420/70R28 520/70R38
133 A8 159 A8 133 A8 150 A8
A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92) B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92)
Table 18 Table 19

420/70R26 520/70R38 480/65R28 600/65R38
139 A8 150 A8 136 A8 153 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1800 (70.92) B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1850 (72.89)
Table 20 Table 21

16.9R28 20.8R38 480/70R28 20.8R38
136 A8 153 A8 140 A8 153 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1900 (74.86) B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1900 (74.86)
Tabe 22 Table 23

480/70R28 580/70R38 540/65R28 650/65R38
140 A8 155 A8 137 A8 154 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1900 (74.86) B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1850 (72.89)
Table 24 Table 25

540/65R28 650/65R38 230/95R36 270/95R48
137 A8 157 A8 141 A2 154 A2
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) 1800 (70.92)
B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1850 (72.89) B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 2000 (78.80)*
Table 26 * Track width is only permitted for

field applications
Track widths front rear
270/95R32 300/95R46
146 A2 158 A2 Tables 1, 2, etc. refer to the tyre
A mm (in) 1500 (59.10) 1800 (70.92) combinations denoted by these
B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 2000 (78.80)* letters on page 146.
156
Sezione 4.pmd 156 20/12/2004, 17.06

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Table 27 Table 28

420/70R28 18,4R38 420/70R28 18,4R38
133 A8 146 A8 133 A8 159 A8
A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) - A mm (in) 1600 (63.04) -
B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1814 (71.47) B mm (in) 1800 (70.92) 1814 (71.47)
Table 29 Table 30

480/70R26 520/70R38 16.9R28 20.8R38
139 A8 150 A8 136 A8 153 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1906 (75.10) B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1906 (75.10)
Tabe 31 Table 32

480/70R28 20.8R38 480/70R28 580/70R38
140 A8 153 A8 140 A8 155 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1906 (75.10) B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1906 (75.10)
Tabe 33 Table 34

540/65R28 650/65R38 540/65R28 650/65R38
137 A8 154 A8 137 A8 157 A8
A mm (in) - - A mm (in) - -
B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1854 (73.05) B mm (in) 1900 (74.86) 1854 (73.05)
Tables 1, 2, etc. refer to the tyre combinations denoted by these

letters on page 146.
157
Sezione 4.pmd 157 20/12/2004, 17.06

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Adjusting front fender – variant I
Adjust fender according to the track
such that the center part of the tyre
is covered.
For adjusting the fender, unscrew
bolt 1 and accordingly displace fen- 2
der 2.
TB-0724
Adjusting front fender – variant II
With variant II, an additional fender

adjustment in longitudinal direction
is possible. 2
1
TB-0725
Adjusting front fender – variant III (self-setting mudguard)
A large steering angle can be 7214-48

achieved with these mudguards,
even with wide tyres.
The screws 1 should be set so that
the mudguards do not touch the
bonnet with a full steering lock and
with a fully sloped front axle.
158
Sezione 4.pmd 158 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
n
WARNING:
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT FROM:
EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM/WHEEL ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER
MOUNTING – NEVER EXCEED 35 PSI (2.41 BAR) (AIR PRESSURE)
WHEN SEATING BEADS. – ALWAYS USE SAFETY CAGE OR OTHER
RESTRAINING DEVICE AND CLIP-ON EXTENSION HOSE. ONLY
SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT TIRES.
TIRE FAILURE DUE TO MISAPPLICATION/IMPROPER INFLATION/
OVERLOADING/EXCEEDING MAXIMUM SPEED – FOLLOW TIRE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE
FREQUENTLY WITH GAUGE.
EXPLOSION OF THE TIRE/RIM/WHEEL ASSEMBLY DUE TO
WELDING THE RIM WITHOUT FIRST REMOVING THE TIRE – NEVER
REWORK, WELD, HEAT OR BRAZE THE RIM OF A TIRE/RIM/WHEEL
ASSEMBLY. avv132gb
n
WARNING:
TIRE CHANGING CAN BE DANGEROUS AND SHOULD BE DONE BY
TRAINED PERSONNEL USING PROPER TOOLS AND PROCEDURES.
ALWAYS READ AND UNDERSTAND ANY MANUFACTURER’S
WARNING CONTAINED IN THEIR CUSTOMERS’ LITERATURE OR
MOLDED INTO THE TIRE SIDEWALL.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE PROCEDURES MAY RESULT IN
FAULTY POSITIONING OF THE TIRE AND/OR RIM PARTS, AND
CAUSE THE ASSEMBLY TO BURST WITH EXPLOSIVE FORCE,
SUFFICIENT TO CAUSE SERIOUS PHYSICAL INJURY OR DEATH.
NEVER MOUNT OR USE DAMAGED TIRES OR RIMS. avv133gb
n
WARNING:
STAY OUT OF THE TRAJECTORY AS INDICATED BY SHADED AREA.
ALWAYS USE A SAFETY CAGE OR OTHER RESTRAINING DEVICE IN
COMPLIANCE WITH OSHA REGULATIONS.
NOTE: UNDER SOME CIRCUMSTANCES, THE TRAJECTORY MAY
DEVIATE FROM ITS EXPECTED PATH. avv135gb
159
Sezione 4.pmd 159 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
n
WARNING: REINFLATION OF ANY TYPE OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY
THAT HAS BEEN OPERATED IN A RUN-FLAT OR UNDERINFLATED
CONDITION (80% OR LESS OF RECOMMENDED PRESSURE), CAN
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. THE TIRE MAY BE
DAMAGED ON THE INSIDE AND CAN EXPLODE WHILE YOU ARE
ADDING AIR. THE RIM PARTS MAY BE WORN, DAMAGED OR
DISLODGED AND CAN EXPLOSIVELY SEPARATE.
NEVER REWORK, WELD, HEAT, OR BRAZE THE TIRE/WHEEL/RIM.
HEATING THE RIM OF TIRE/WHEEL/RIM ASSEMBLY CAN CAUSE A
TIRE TO EXPLODE, CAUSING SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
THE USE OF ANY FLAMMABLE MATERIAL DURING TIRE SERVICING
IS ABSOLUTELY PROHIBITED. USE OF STARTING FLUID, ETHER,
GASOLINE OR ANY OTHER FLAMMABLE MATERIAL TO LUBRICATE,
SEAL OR SEAT THE BEADS OF A TUBELESS TIRE CAN CAUSE THE
TIRE TO EXPLODE OR CAN CAUSE THE EXPLOSIVE SEPARATION
OF THE TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH.
NEVER HAMMER, STRIKE OR PRY ON ANY TYPE OF TIRE/RIM
ASSEMBLY WHILE THE TIRE CONTAINS INFLATION PRESSURE. DO
NOT ATTEMPT TO SEAT ANY PART WHILE THE TIRE CONTAINS ANY
INFLATION PRESSURE. THIS COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH. avv136gb
n
WARNING: NEVER INFLATE BEYOND 35 POUNDS OF PRESSURE
TO SEAT BEADS. NEVER STAND, LEAN OR REACH OVER THE
ASSEMBLY DURING INFLATION. INSPECT BOTH SIDES OF THE TIRE
TO BE SURE THAT THE BEADS ARE EVENLY SEATED. IF TIRE IS
MOUNTED ON A MACHINE THAT DOES NOT HAVE A POSITIVE
LOCK-DOWN DEVICE TO HOLD THE WHEEL, INFLATION SHOULD
BE DONE IN A SAFETY CAGE OR OTHER RESTRAINING DEVICE. IF
BOTH BEADS ARE NOT PROPERLY SEATED WHEN PRESSURE
REACHES 35 PSI (2.41 BAR), COMPLETELY DEFLATE THE ASSEMBLY,
REPOSITION THE TIRE AND/OR TUBE ON THE RIM, RELUBRICATE
AND REINFLATE. INFLATING BEYOND 35 PSI (2.41 BAR) AIR
PRESSURE WHEN TRYING TO SEAT THE BEADS IS A DANGEROUS
PRACTICE THAT MAY BREAK A TIRE BEAD (OR EVEN THE RIM) WITH
EXPLOSIVE FORCE, POSSIBLY RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH. AFTER THE BEADS ARE FULLY SEATED, PRESSURE MAY BE
INCREASED ABOVE 35 PSI (2.41 BAR) TO OPERATING PRESSURES,
NOT TO EXCEED THE MAXIMUM MOLDED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL.
avv134gb
160
Sezione 4.pmd 160 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Ballasting *
n
WARNING: REMEMBER THAT STEERING, BRAKING AND TRACTOR
PERFORMANCE IN GENERAL WILL BE GREATLY AFFECTED BY THE
IMPLEMENTS ATTACHED, THE TRAILERS TOWED OR THE BALLAST
APPLIED. avv051gb
Ballast carrier 100 kg (220.46 lb)

To the ballast carrier 100 kg (220.46
lb) a maximum of 10 ballast weights
of 40 kg (88.18 lb) each may be
mounted.
10 ballast weights 40 kg (88.18 lb)
400 kg (881.89 lb)
7181-232

To the ballast carier 330 kg (727.52
lb) a maximum of 10 ballast weights
of 40 kg (88.18 lb) each may be
mounted.
10 ballast weights 40 kg (88.18 lb)
400 kg (881.84 lb)
7181-233
161
Sezione 4.pmd 161 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels

with intermediate plate 330 kg
(727.52 lb)
7181-237
It is possible to mount from 2 to 10

ballasts of 40 kg (88.18 lb) each on
the 330 kg (727.52 lb) ballast carrier
with a middle plate of 330 kg
(727.52 lb).
7181-236a
n
162
Sezione 4.pmd 162 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Front ballast for front hydraulic

lift
One-piece concrete ballast for trac-

tors equipped with front lift.
Total weight of ballast:

600 Kg (1322.76 lb)
Total weight of ballast:

1000 Kg (2204.60 lb)
7214-21
Rear ballast
The concrete ballast weight can also be used for the rear implement lift.
Other forms of ballast
Note: Observe the country-specific specifications.
If necessary, contact your dealer for details.

If filling with water, mix with calcium chloride.
Ballast weights on the rims are not provided for this tractor.
163
Sezione 4.pmd 163 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Water ballasting
For further ballasting the rear wheels can be additionally filled with water.
Ballasting by filling the tyres with water + antifreeze solution
To prevent the water from freezing and damaging the tyres, use additives
to obtain a neutralised solution of calcium chloride.
Proceed as follows: pour the required quantity of water into a container and
then slowly pour in calcium chloride in the proportion of approx. 30 kg
(66.14 lb) to every 100 litres (26.4 U.S. gal) of water.
N.B. - Add calcium chloride to the water, not vice versa, to prevent the risk
of a violent chemical reaction.
The amount of liquid in the tyre must not exceed 75% of the total tyre vol-
ume.
Warning: the antifreeze solution does not offer protection at temperatures
below -20°C (68°F).
Further information is obtainable from the tire trade. The antifreeze is to be

added to the water under constant stirring until it is completely dissolved.
After having filled the tires, flush all equipment with water, as the solution
is highly aggressive.
n
CAUTION: WHILE MIXING THE ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION AND
FILLING THE TYRE, IT IS ESSENTIAL TO WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES
AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. ADD CALCIUM TO THE WATER,
NOT VICE VERSA, TO PREVENT THE RISK OF A VIOLENT
CHEMICAL REACTION. avv093gb
164
Sezione 4.pmd 164 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
The liquid must be introduced into

the tyre using a special adapter spe-
cifically designed for this purpose.
(These adapters are supplied by tyre

manufacturers).
7181-239
Filling tires with water

1 = Air
2 = Water
Raise the tractor from the ground 1
Turn the wheel to bring the valve to
the highest position. Unscrew the
inner part of the valve Fit the special 2
adaptor for adding water ballast to
the valve. Connect the water hose 1
and fill until the water starts to come 2
out of the breather at the bottom of
the valve. Remove the adapter and
screw in the inner part of the valve. 7181-240
Fill the tyre with air to the specified

pressure.
Draining tires
1 = Air
2 = Water
Jack up tractor. Rotate wheel so that
the inner-tube tire valve comes
down. Screw out tire valve insert.
Allow water to drain. Screw on com- 2
bined valve.
Inflate tire. The air pressure will force
1 1
out any remaining water through the
2
bleeder bore. Screw off combined
valve. Refit tire valve insert. Inflate 7181-241
tire to specified pressure.
165
Sezione 4.pmd 165 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Mixed-automatic air braking system (optional)

3
2 E 5
4
20L
1
6
8
9
10
12
11
13
14
7181-360a
To ensure correct operation and to reduce the risk of personal injury and/or
damage to the product, read the instructions in this manual carefully.
For any maintenance or adjustment operations that require specially trained

personnel, contact the system manufacturer directly.
Diagram of the mixed-automatic air braking system (configuration for

Italy)
1 - Compressed air reservoir

2 - Air compressor
3 - Engine
4 - Pressure relief valve
5 - Quick-action trailer coupler
6 - Cab air suspension feed valve
7 - Trailer braking valve
8 - Brake control solenoid valve
9 - Relay
10 - Brake pedals switch
11 - Circuit pressure indicator
12 - Circuit pressure sensor
13 - Brake master cylinder
14 - Brake
166
Sezione 4.pmd 166 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
3
2 E 4
5
A
20L
1 5
6
7
C
5
9
10
11 8
13
12
14
15 7181-360b
When towing trailers, always fully comply with the highway code, even on
private agricultural land.
After connecting the male coupler on the trailer hose to the female coupler
on the tractor, check that there is no air leakage from the connection by
depressing the brake pedal a few times with the engine switched off.
Diagram of the mixed-automatic air braking system (other configura-

tion)
1 - Compressed air reservoir
2 - Air compressor
3 - Engine
4 - Pressure relief valve
5 - Quick-action trailer coupler
6 - Cab air suspension feed valve
7 - Trailer braking valve (2 way)
8 - Trailer braking valve (1-way)
9 - Braking solenoid valve
10 - Relay
11 - Brake pedals switch
12 - Circuit pressure indicator
13 - Circuit pressure sensor
14 - Brake master cylinder
15 - Brake
A - Red
B - Yellow
C - Black
167
Sezione 4.pmd 167 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 4 Wheels
Note: the trailer air reservoir will not receive air if the couplers are
not connected correctly.
After connecting the air couplers, make the electrical connection and check
that the lights work; check also that pressure gauge is functioning correctly
and showing a pressure reading of 8 bar (116.03 psi) (do not drive the trac-
tor until the pressure in the reservoir has reached 8 bar (116.03 psi)).
In the event of pressure loss in the control valve, it will still be possible to
operate the emergency braking system by way of the manual control on
the trailer braking valve 7.
This control is normally used for parking the trailer.
The trailer brakes must always be applied slightly in advance of the tractor
brakes.
To adjust the braking action, it is necessary to adjust trailer braking valve;
this operation should only be carried out by specially trained personnel.
Check periodically:
- the condition of the hoses,
- the operation of the pressure gauge
- the tension of the compressor drive belt
- for oil leaks from the compressor
- that the couplers are always perfectly clean and that the valves inside the
couplers function correctly (by checking that the air arrives at the air
reservoir on the trailer).
Every 30 operating hours, drain the water from the reservoir by operating
the drain valve located at the bottom of the reservoir.
WARNING: never unhitch the trailer without first making sure that it
is unloaded.
168
Sezione 4.pmd 168 20/12/2004, 10.29

CHAPTER 5 Service and maintenance
Chapter 5 - SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Service and maintenance ............................................... 170

Prescribed lubrificants and fuels .................................... 174
Checks and maintenance table ..................................... 175
Servicing of the engine .................................................. 179
Fuel storage ................................................................... 189
Engine coolant ............................................................... 191
Maintenance of the transmission ................................... 196
Maintenance of the front drive axle .............................. 203
Maintenance of front P.T.O. * ......................................... 207
Three-point hitch ........................................................... 208
Clutch ............................................................................ 209
Brakes ............................................................................ 209
Air Brake System * ......................................................... 211
Maintenance of the climate control system ................... 212
Maintenance of the air conditioning system .................. 214
General cleaning of the tractor ..................................... 218
*
type of market.
n
169
Sezione 5.pmd 169 20/12/2004, 10.29

Service and maintenance
This section of the manual deals with the lubrication and general
maintenance of the tractor.
Always switch the engine off before carrying out any maintenance
operations. For additional safety, remove the key from the ignition.
The tractor should be parked on a level surface with the handbrake applied,
and preferably with the wheel chock in position.
On completion of the work, replace the side panels, the hood and any
safety guards or covers that were removed.
For information regarding the quantities and qualities of lubricant and
fluids, refer to the “Lubricants and fluids table” on page 174.
Maintenance intervals
The recommended maintenance intervals apply to normal operating
conditions.
If the tractor is subjected to extreme working conditions and/or dusty
environments, the intervals between maintenance operations will have to
be reduced accordingly.
Scrupulously observe the recommended maintenance intervals and only use
commended lubricants and fluids.

n
DANGER: NEVER START THE ENGINE BY SHORT-CIRCUITING THE
STARTER ENGINE’S TERMINALS. THIS MAY CAUSE SUDDEN TAKE-
OFFS WHICH COULD BE VERY DANGEROUS TO THE OPERATOR. avv011gb
n
CAUTION: ALWAYS MAINTAIN THE TRACTOR IN GOOD WORKING
CONDITION. LACK OF MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE NEEDLESS
DOWN TIME AND CAN INFLUENCE NEGATIVELY ON THE
DURATION OF ITS WORK LIFE. avv009gb
n
WARNING : CONNECT ONLY TO A 12 VOLT SUPPLY TO BOOST
avv046gb
BATTERY.
170
Sezione 5.pmd 170 20/12/2004, 10.29

n
CAUTION: ALWAYS WEAR CLOTHING SUITABLE FOR THE TYPE OF
WORK TO BE PERFORMED. IF NECESSARY, USE HEARING
PROTECTION PLUGS AND WEAR EYE PROTECTION. avv090gb
n
n
DANGER: MAKE SURE YOU CONNECT THE BATTERY TERMINALS
CORRECTLY. DANGER OF SHORT- CIRCUIT! avv044gb
n
OPERATING. avv062gb
n
DANGER: BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES. KEEP FLAMES,
SPARKS AND SMOKING MATERIAL AWAY FROM BATTERIES.
VENTILATION IS REQUIRED, WHEN CHARGING OR STORING
BATTERIES. AVOID CONTACT BETWEEN ACID AND SKIN OR
CLOTHES. avv118gb
n
NOTE: Always switch off the engine before checking or

replacing fuses and relays.
NOTE: Only use original fuses. The electrical system could be

irreparably damaged by fitting an unsuitable fuse.
171
Sezione 5.pmd 171 20/12/2004, 10.29

Using inferior quality lubricants in order to save money can result in serious
damage to the tractor.
Failure to have the tractor serviced at the recommended maintenance
intervals and to use the prescribed lubricants will invalidate the manufactur-
er’s warranty.
Important notes
- Ensure that any containers used to store lubricants are perfectly clean.
Funnels and measuring cups must left covered to prevent dust settling on
them.
- Clean the areas adjacent to the parts to be lubricated.
- Grease parts when warm so that the grease flows more easily.
- Clean all plugs and caps before replacing them.
- Fuel tank capacities are indicated in the table on the page 174.
- Carry out all operations in accordance with the instructions given and the
applicable safety regulations.
- Before starting work on the tractor, make sure the engine is switched off,
the key is removed from the ignition and the handbrake is applied.
- Only work with the engine running when this is specifically indicated in
the instructions.
NOTE: Before fitting a new fuse, it is essential to switch off the
engine and remove the key from the ignition. Before changing
a blown fuse, determine the cause and rectify the problem in
the electrical system.
n
CAUTION: BEFORE STARTING THE TRACTOR, CHECK ITS
CONDITION FOR OPERATING SAFETLY ON THE PUBLIC HIGHWAY.
avv033gb
n
CAUTION: IT IS IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS HAVE FIRST-AID
EQUIPMENT READ-ILY
AVAILABLE:
- EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBERS ON HAND (DOCTOR,
HOSPITAL, AMBULANCE, FIREMEN). avv018gb
n
CAUTION: DISCONNECT THE BATTERY CABLES, BEFORE TO
VERIFY OR REPAIR THE ELECTRICAL WIRING OR BEFORE TO START
WELDING OPERATIONS ON TRACTOR OR ON ATTACHED
IMPLEMENTS. avv043gb
172
Sezione 5.pmd 172 20/12/2004, 10.29

n
WARNING: WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN CHARGING OR
BOOSTING BATTERY. avv045gb
n
WARNING: IN SOME OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS USED IN THIS
OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK, PANEL OR GUARDS MAY HAVE
BEEN REMOVED FOR CLARITY. NEVER OPERATE THE TRACTOR
WITHOUT THESE COMPONENTS IN POSITION. IF THE REMOVAL
OF PANEL OR GUARDS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE A REPAIR, THEY
MUST BE REPLACED BEFORE OPERATION. avv140gb
n
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO CARRY OUT ANY
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS ON THE TRACTOR OR AN ATTACHED
IMPLEMENT UNLESS THE ENGINE IS SWITCHED OFF, THE
GEARBOX IS IN NEUTRAL, THE PTO IS DISENGAGED, THE
HANDBRAKE IS APPLIED AND ANY ATTACHED IMPLEMENT IS
LOWERED TO THE GROUND. avv104gb
n
CAUTION: ALL IMPLEMENTS MOUNTED TO THE TRACTOR MUST
BE SAFELY ATTACHED. avv072gb
n
DANGER: WHEN HANDLING BATTERIES:
- AVOID BREATHING IN FUMES PRODUCED BY THE ACID
SOLUTION (IF THE ACID IS ACCIDENTALLY SWALLOWED, DRINK
PLENTY OF WATER OR MILK, THEN DRINK BEATEN EGGS OR
VEGETAL OIL; SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY)
- USE THE APPROPRIATE PROCEDURE WHEN CHARGING
- CLEAN ALL PARTS WHERE ACID SOLUTION MIGHT HAVE SPILLED.
IF IT SPILLS ON THE HANDS, NEUTRALIZE IT WITH HYDRATED LIME
OR SODIUM BICARBONATE. IF IT HITS THE EYES, RINSE
REPEATEDLY FOR 10-15 MINUTES, THEN SEEK MEDICAL
ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. avv119gb
173
Sezione 5.pmd 173 20/12/2004, 10.29

PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS AGROTRON 120-130-150-150.7-165.7
Sezione 5.pmd
174
The volumes specified are approx. values and may vary depending on version. The relevant measurement rod marking and/or
equipment for checking levels always takes priority.
Part to be suppled Litres Product Specification Change
(U.S. gal) SDFG hours
CHAPTER 5
14** SAE 15W40 ACEA E3-96

Engine 120-130-150 (3.69**) API CF SDFG OM 1991
AKROS TURBO MIL-L-2104 E level 500*
17.5** MB 228.3 level
Engine 150.7-165.7 (4.62**) API-CD CCMC D4
174
Radiator antifreeze 120-130-150 17.5 (4.62) Every 2
55% water
Radiator antifreeze 150.7-165.7 28 (7.39) + 45% AKROS FARM FLU SDFG EC-1548 G years
Gearbox and rear axle SAE 15W30 500

78 (20.59) API GL4
- without suspended front axle AKROS MULTI VT then every
SDFG OT 1801-B
- with suspended front axle 80 (20.60) 1000
ZF TE-ML 06B,07,12
Central axle 120 5 (1.32) SAE 80W90 500

Central axle 130-150-150.7-165.7 5.8 (1.53) AKROS GEAR EP 90 LS API GL5
then every
MIL-L-2105 D
Front side reductions SDFG OP - 1705 LS 1000
0.8 (0.21)
Front P.T.O. 0.9 (0.24)
Rear side reductions SAE 80W90

500
9x2 (2.38x2) API GL5
- AGROTRON 120-130-150-150.7-165.7 AKROS GEAR EP 90 LS then every
- AGROTRON 165.7 MIL-L-2105 D
10x2 (2.64x2) 1000
SDFG OP - 1705 LS
ISO- VG 22
Brakes 1.6 (0.42) AKROS ULTRA BRAKE
07/04/2005, 17.00
SDFG OF - 1691
AKROS GREASE T2 NGLI 2 - LITIO 50
Lubrification point SDFG GR - 1202 L
307-7249-3-6
(*) 1∞ replace after 50 hours; change at least once a year (**) With filter + 1 Litre
Sezione 5.pmd
Checks and maintenance table
Hours in operation
Take 50 250 500 750 1000* 1250 1500 1750 2000
over
Only to be performed by authorized DEUTZ-FAHR workshops
CHAPTER 5
1. Engine
1.1 Change engine oil (at least once a year)

1.2 Replace engine oil filter cartridge/oil filter element
175
1.3 Check valve clearance *** thereafter every 1500 operating hours
1.4 Check oil level every 10 operating hours or daily

1.5 Check coolant level check regularly
1.6 Replace coolant every 2 years
1.7 Check V-belt condition and tension

1.8 Single-bowl fuel filter: replace filter cartridge
1.9 Double-bowl filter: Stage 1 – replace filter cartridge
Stage 2 – replace filter cartridge

1.10 Inspect fuel oil leakage pipe incl. connectig parts, change as required at least every 2 years
1.11 Check air cleaner system, clean filter cartridge when yellow light in INFOCENTER comes on
1.12 Replace air cleaner cartridge (at least once a year)

1.13 Replace air cleaner safety cartridge
20/12/2004, 10.29
* or once a year
** the intervals must be reduced by 50% if fuel with a sulfur content above 0.5% is used
*** 2 hours after standstill of the engine at the earliest
175
Sezione 5.pmd
176
Hours in operation
Take 50 250 500 750 1000* 1250 1500 1750 2000
over
CHAPTER 5

2. Transmission and hydraulic system
2.1 AGROTRON without Load-Sensing System
2.1.1 Check transmission oil level
176
2.1.2 Change transmission oil (at least once per year) then every 1000 operating hours
2.1.3 Change transmission and hydraulic oil filters, then every 1000 operating hours
clean coarse filter

2.2 AGROTRON with Load-Sensing System
2.2.1 Check transmission oil level
2.2.2 Change transmission oil (at least once per year) then every 1000 operating hours
2.2.3 Change hydraulic oil filter
2.2.4 Change transmission oil filter then every 1000 operating hours
20/12/2004, 10.29
n
WARNING: FOR WHEELS DISASSEMBLING AND FOR MAINTENANCE
avv047gb
AND REPAIR, LIFT THE TRACTOR, USING SPECIFIC TOOLS ONLY.
Sezione 5.pmd
Hours in operation
Take 50 250 500 750 1000* 1250 1500 1750 2000
over
CHAPTER 5

3. Rear axle planetary drives
3.1 Check oil level
177
3.2 Change oil in planetary drives there after every 1000 operating hours
4. Front P.T.O.
4.1 Change oil in front P.T.O.-shaft drive (front P.T.O. operating hours)
4.2 Changing the oil filter

4.3 Check oil level
5. Front drive axle
5.1 Check oil level in differential and planetary drives

5.2 Change oil at least once a year in differential and planetary drives there after every 1000 operating hours
5.3 Check track adjustmen
5.4 Front axle suspension
* or once a year
20/12/2004, 10.29
DANGER: START THE ENGINE, WITH THE STARTER KEY, FROM THE OPERATOR’S SEAT ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT
TO START THE ENGINE BY SHORTING ACROSS THE STARTER TERMINALS. THE MACHINE WILL START IN GEAR IF
THE NEUTRAL START CIRCUIT IS BYPASSED. THIS COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO ANYONE IN
THE VICINITY OF THE TRACTOR. ENSURE THAT THE ENGINE STARTER SOLENOID COVER IS ALWAYS IN avv012i
177
POSITON.
Sezione 5.pmd
178
Hours in operation
Take 50 250 500 750 1000* 1250 1500 1750 2000
over
CHAPTER 5

6. Main clutch
6.1 Clutch – check action point (T 7200 and T7100 Poweshift)
6.2 Check fluid level in clutch and service brake
6.3 Change actuating fluid Primary and secondary circuits: at least every 2 years
178
6.4 Front axle suspension: cleaning screen filter
7. Frein/Circuit pneumatique de freinage
7.1 Brakes/Air brake system
7.2 Check actuating fluid in service brake and clutch
7.3 Change actuating fluid Primary and secondary circuits: at least every 2 years
7.4 Contrôler la soupape de purge d’eau automatique
8. Bolts and screw fasteners
8.1 Retighten all functional bolt and screw fastening elements to torque specified, on front hydraulics,
ballast carrier, trailer hitch height-adjustment facility, etc.
8.2 Retighten all wheel bolts as specified add. 20 hours after each track adjust., otherwise once a year
9. Lubrication
Three-point hitch, trailer hitch and front axle – see Instruc. Book****
10. Electrical system
20/12/2004, 10.29
10.1 Check electrical system
10.2 Check battery
* once a year **** instruction book

Servicing of the engine

Opening the engine hood
To open the hood, press the button
located on the lower part of the
hood in the position shown by the
arrow and push upwards on the
hood, which will be raised to its full
height by two springs.
7181-395
Closing the hood 7214-26
Press engine hood down and make

lock snap in.
n
CAUTION: WITH A COLD ENGINE YOU MAY NOTICE ABNORMAL
COMBUSTION. THIS SHOULD CLEAR UP ONCE THE ENGINE HAS
REACHED NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE. avv020gb
n
DANGER: RISK OF BURNS WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT; ALLOW THE
ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE SERVICE, INSPECTION OR
ADJUSTMENT. avv105gb
n
WARNING: BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE MAKE SURE THERE IS
PLENTY OF VENTILATION. DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE IN A
CLOSED BUILDING. THE EXHAUST FUMES MAY CAUSE
ASPHYXIATION. avv149gb
179
Sezione 5.pmd 179 20/12/2004, 10.29

7249-9
8 4
1
10
7
3
11b
11a
5
2
11c
Cleaning side grilles

For correctly cooling the engine, ensure that the venting and ventilation
flaps of engine cowling and side panels are clean.
Clean the inside and outside of the grille whenever necessary to ensure a
constant supply of engine cooling air.
Front engine compartment

1 - Cooling system radiator engine 8 - Locking knobs
2 - Intercooler 10 - Left damper
3 - Fuel cooler 11a - Locking bracket
4 - Gearbox oil cooler 11b - Stop screw
5 - Air conditioning condenser 11c - Guide screw
6 - Receiver-drier
7 - Radiator-coolers assembly
release/ lock lever
n
WARNING: BATTERY POSTS, TERMINALS AND RELATED
ACCESSORIES CONTAIN LEAD AND LEAD COMPOUNDS,
CHEMICALS KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE
CANCER AND BIRTH DEFECTS OR OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM.
WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING. avv143gb
180
Sezione 5.pmd 180 20/12/2004, 10.29

Cleaning the gearbox oil and fuel coolers and the engine radiator
For cleaning of the air conditioning
condenser 5 see page 212.
- Open bonnet.
- Press down radiator with one hand
(in area near arrow) to tractor and
hold down.
- Turn locking lever 7 and slowly
open radiator.
- Then lift the air conditioning system
7249-10
condenser and the engine
intercooler until they have reached
the limit position on the two shock
absorbers 10.
Now loosen screw 11b, raise bracket

11a (located on the front left side of 1 11b
11a
11c
the tractor) and move forward the
coolers 3 and 4 (fuel cooler and
gearbox oil cooler) to the point
determined by screw 11c.
Clean using a compressed air jet
and, if necessary, a steam or water
jet (do not exceed a pressure of 6.0 4
bar/87.02 psi). 3
7249-11
If you also wish to clean the engine at the same time, cover and protect the
air cleaner, the alternator and the starter motor.
After cleaning, replace all the parts by following the steps of the procedure
above in reverse order.
Start the engine and run it for a few minutes to dry off any wet compo-
nents.
n
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A STEAM JET FOR CLEANING THE COOLER.
HOWEVER, IF A STEAM JET IS USED, ONLY WORK AT AN APPROPRIATE
DISTANCE AND DO NOT SPRAY THE COOLING RIBS OBLIQUELY.
181
Sezione 5.pmd 181 20/12/2004, 10.29

Cleaning with detergents 7249-8
If you use detergents to clean the oil

cooler, use commercial products that
dissolve oil.
The detegrent can be mixed with
water for application by spray gun or
brush.
After applying the solution, wait
after few minutes, then rinse off with
clean water.
Cleaning with compressed air

This operation is only suitable for removing dust. When cleaning the grilles
or cab filter screens, make sure that the compressed air jet is directed in the
opposite direction to the normal air flow.
Important: failure to keep the oil cooler clean can lead to overheating of
the lubricated parts.
Warning: every time you clean the tractor, observe the applicable regula-
tions for environmental protection.
n
WARNING: BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE ENGINE,
WAIT UNTIL IT HAS COOLED DOWN.
DURING MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS, APPLY THE HANDBRAKE
AND POSITION THE CHOCK UNDER ONE OF THE WHEELS.
ON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, REPLACE ALL GUARDS AND
COVERS, REFIT THE SIDE PANELS AND CLOSE THE HOOD. avv159gb
182
Sezione 5.pmd 182 20/12/2004, 10.29

Checking the engine oil level
Start the engine and allow it to run

for few minutes; then switch the
engine off, wait for about one
minute, then check the oil level.
Pull the dipstick out, wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth, reinsert it and
pull it out once again to read the oil
level. Max
If the level lies between the two

Min
notches on the dispstick, it is correct. 7181-256
If the oil requires topping up, un-

screw the oil filler cap and top up
with oil of the specified quality to the
top notch on the dipstick.
NOTE: Do not use solvents or thinners to clean the radar

sensor; use water only.
n
WARNING: HYDRAULIC FLUID UNDER PRESSURE CAN PENTRATE
THE SKIN OR EYES AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY, BLINDNESS OR
DEATH. FLUID LEAKS UNDER PRESSURE, MAY NOT BE VISIBLE.
LOOSEN CONNECTIONS SLOWLY, KEEPING HANDS AND
FINGERS CLEAR OF LOOSENED FITTINGS. USE A PIECE OF
CARDBOARD OR WOOD TO LOCATE LEAKS, DO NOT USE YOUR
FINGERS OR HANDS. WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES FOR EYE
PROTECTION. IF ANY FULID IS INJECTED INTO THE SKIN, SEEK
MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. avv148gb
183
Sezione 5.pmd 183 20/12/2004, 10.29

Changing engine oil
Proceed as follows:
- Unscrew the oil drain plug located
on the sump under the filler cap.
1
- Renew the engine oil filters follow-
ing the instructions given below.
- When all the oil has drained from
the sump, inspect the drain plug
seal and, if necessary, renew it
before replacing the drain plug.
- Pour oil of the prescribed quality
7181-257
into the sump through the oil filler
until the level reaches the upper
notch on the dipstick.
- Run the engine for a few minutes and check the seals around the oil drain
lug and the new oil filter.
- Check the oil level again and top up if necessary.
n
n
DANGER: TAKE CARE WHEN DRAINING OIL FROM THE ENGINE
SUMP, AS HOT OIL CAN CAUSE SERIOUS BURNS. avv107gb
n
WARNING: COLLECT AND STORE USED OIL IN SUITABLE
CONTAINERS BEFORE TAKING IT TO AN AUTHORIZED avv108gb
COLLECTION CENTRE.
184
Sezione 5.pmd 184 20/12/2004, 10.30

Changing engine oil filter
- Clean filter housing and surround-
ing area thoroughly
- Place oil drip tray under the filter
- Unscrew cover M
- Replace filter insert
- If necessary, lubricate seal with
small amount of oil
- Hand-tighten the cover
- After running the engine briefly,
check filter for seal integrity
- Check engine oil level
7216-20
AGROTRON 120-130-150
Changing fuel filter

- Clean filter housing and surrounding area thoroughly
- Place oil drip tray under the filter
- Unscrew cover K
- Replace filter insert
- If necessary, lubricate seal with small amount of oil
- Hand-tighten the cover
- After running the engine briefly, check filter for seal integrity.
n
WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH THE ENGINE OFF BEFORE CARRYING
OUT ANY MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS. FOR ADDITIONAL
SAFETY, REMOVE THE KEY FROM THE IGNITION. avv103gb
185
Sezione 5.pmd 185 23/12/2004, 15.07

Changing engine oil filter
– Place a drain pan underneath oil
filter.
– Unscrew filter cartridge M.
– Clean sealing surface.
– Slightly oil seal of a new filter
cartridge.
– Tighten fllter cartrdige with the
hand.
– After short running of engine, M K
check filter for tightness.
– Check engine oil level.
7216-19
AGROTRON 150.7-165.7
Changing fuel filter

– Place a drain pan underneath the filter.
– Unscrew filter cartridge K. Clean sealing surface.
– Slightly oil seal of the new filter cartridge.
– Tighten new filter cartridge with the hand.
NOTE: Before fitting the fuel filters, fill the bowl with diesel
fuel.
NOTE: Never use gasoline (petrol), kerosene or cleaning

solvents to clean the element.
- do not attempt to blow the main element clean using tractor
exhaust gases.
- never add oil to the dry air filter element.
- filter must be serviced when warning indicator pilot light
comes on, otherwise engine could lose power and damage to
engine could occur.
- never use a filter that shows sign of damage.
If in doubt, replace the filter.
186
Sezione 5.pmd 186 23/12/2004, 15.07

Servicing air filter
Inside the air cleaner there are two
filter elements:
- The larger external element is the
filter cartridge;
- The smaller internal element is the
safety cartridge.
Replace air filter cartridge:
– after the fifth cleaning procedure,
– with damaged cartridge or seal,
– with sooty deposits on the cartridge
surface, 7181-260
– after 1000 operating hours,
– after one year.
Replacing air filter cartridge
Unlock clamps 1 and remove cap 2.

Remove filter cartridge 3 by slightly 2 3
turning it. Wipe out housing with a
clean cloth. Insert new cartridge and
fit cap 2 back in position.
The dust ejector valve 4 must point
downward.
Connection piece 4 must point
downwards. 1
1 - Clamps 4
2 - Cap
7181-261
3 - Cartridge
4 - Ejector valve
Vacuum switch – to monitor the air 7214-30

filter
NOTE: Periodically inspect air cleaner housing and element.
187
Sezione 5.pmd 187 20/12/2004, 10.30

Cleaning dry-type air cleaner
To clean the cartridge, blow through
with dry compressed air – not
exceeding a pressure of 5 bar (72.52
psi) – from inside to outside. For this
purpose, a 90°C (194°F) bent tube of
adequate length should be fitted
which will extend to the filter bot-
tom. Clean sealing rings of filter
cartridge with a clean cloth.
7181-262
Replacing safety cartridge
Replace safety cartridge:

– after 2000 hours in operation
– when it is damaged
– when the yellow light stays on
after cleaning and/or renewal of
the main filter cartridge
Seize safety cartridge by both straps

and remove by lightly turning
cartridge.
7181-263
NOTE: The small inner secondary safety filter must never be

used without the larger outer primary filter being in place. The
purpose of the secondary safety filter is to serve as a backup to
the primary and prevent dust or other items from entering
while the primary is being cleaned or replaced.
Air intake 1 2
Make certain that the air suction

grates 1 and 2 at the A-post are
always free to ensure an unhindered
fresh-air supply to the engine.
7181-264
188
Sezione 5.pmd 188 20/12/2004, 10.30

Fuel storage
The conditions of fuel storage are very important. The interiors of the
storage containers must be free of rust or any sediment, as any such
material could cause serious damage to the injection system.
Refueling
The tractor fuel gauge indicates the exact level of fuel in the fuel tanks.
Be careful not to run out of diesel fuel when operating the tractor, other-
wise it will be necessary to bleed the air from fuel injection system.
Refueling at the end of the working day
The tractor fuel tanks should always be filled at the end of the working day.
This is to avoid condensation forming in the tanks overnight.
Empty space in the fuel tank is a major cause of water in the fuel system.
n
WARNING: DO NOT FILL FUEL TANK WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING,
HOT, NEAR OPEN FLAME OR WHILE SMOKING. TRACTOR
REFUELING SHOULD BE PERFORMED WITH THE ENGINE TURNED
OFF AND IN OPEN AIR. avv040gb
n
WARNING: FLUIDS THAT FACILITATE ENGINE STARTING ARE
HIGHLY FLAMMABLE. WHEN USING THEM, KEEP AWAY FROM
SPARK SOURCES (BATTERIES, CONNECTORS, ETC). THESE FLUIDS
SHOULD BE KEPT IN COOL AREAS AND THE CONTAINERS
PROPERLY STORED. avv161gb
n
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATATE ENGINE UNTIL FUEL TANK IS
ENPTY. IF ENGINE IS RUN OUT OF FUEL, IT WILL BECOME
NECESSARY TO BLEED AIR FROM FUEL SYSTEM. avv039gb
189
Sezione 5.pmd 189 20/12/2004, 10.30

Fuel
Diesel engines are to be refuelled exclusively with diesel fuel of the type
normally commercially available and which conforms to the requirements of
the applicable standards.
In winter, when the temperature falls below 0° C (32 °F), it is essential to
use only winter diesel fuel, which allows the engine to run correctly at
temperatures down to -20°C (-4 °F).
If summer diesel fuel is used at low temperatures, the molecules of paraffin
contained in the fuel will be deposited on the filters which will therefore
become clogged and prevent the fuel from arriving at the injection pump.
In certain countries, diesel fuel containing special additives is available
which are suitable for temperatures even below -20°C (-4 °F).
If winter diesel fuel is not available (or if it is available but the temperature
is below -20°C (-4 °F)) kerosene (paraffin oil) may be added in the percent-
ages indicated in the diagram.
Pour the kerosene into the tank first +32 0

and then the fuel, only mixing the Y
1
+23 -5
two liquids in the fuel tank.
For further information, contact your +14 - 10
Dealer or fuel supplier. + 5 - 15
1 = summer diesel fuel - 4 - 20 2
2 = winter diesel fuel - 13 - 25

X = % of kerosene to be added
- 22 - 30
Y = external temperature in °C. X
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 %
˚F ˚C
7181-265a
n
WARNING: DIESEL ENGINE EXHAUST AND SOME OF ITS
CONSTITUENTS ARE KNOWN TO SOME STATES TO CAUSE
CANCER, BIRTH DEFECTS AND OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM. avv142gb
n
avv041gb
CAUTION: DURING TRACTOR REFUELING, ALWAYS TURN THE

ENGINE OFF AND CLEAN ANY FUEL SPILLED ON THE TRACTOR.
190
Sezione 5.pmd 190 20/12/2004, 10.30

Engine coolant
Water quality
The values stated below must not be exceeded.
Water quality min max

l U.S. gal l U.S. gal
pH-value at 20°C (68°F) 6,5 1.72 8,5 2.24
Content of chloride ions (mg /dm3) – – 100 26.4
Content of sulfate ions (mg /dm3) – – 100 26.4
Total hardness (°dGH) 3 0.79 12 3.17
Liquid-cooled engines require that the coolant is prepared and controlled

with special care, as otherwise premature engine damage due to corrosion,
cavitation and freezing may occur.
The coolant is prepared by adding antifreeze to the cooling water.
The cooling system requires steady checking. In addition to the coolant
liquid level checks this also includes a regular check of the antifreeze
concentration in the cooling water.
To check the antifreeze concentration commercial testing equipment (for
example: gefo glycomat®) may be used.
The Original-DEUTZ-FAHR cooler antifreeze (free of nitrite, amine and
phosphate) effectively protects the cooling system against corrosion, cavita-
tion and freezing.
The percentage of antifreeze in the coolant must be as specified below for
the various temperatures:
n
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE RADIATOR CAP WHILE ENGINE IS
HOT. RADIATOR IS PRESSURIZED AND IF OPENED WHILE HOT,
STEAM AND BOILING LIQUID WILL BE SPRAYED OUT, WHICH MAY
INJURY YOU AND OTHERS WHICH MAY BE CLOSE BY. THERE CAN
ALSO BE A EXCESSIVE AMOUNT OF COOLANT LOSS. avv162gb
191
Sezione 5.pmd 191 20/12/2004, 10.30

Cooling system
Temperature –22 °C –28 °C –35 °C

Percentage of
antifreeze 35 % Vol. 40 % Vol. 45 % Vol.
Quantity of antifreeze litres (U.S. gal)
AGROTRON
120-130-150 6.2 (1.63) 7.0 (1.85) 7.9 (2.09)
150.7-165.7 9.8 (2.59) 11.2 (2.96) 12.6 (3.33)
Total quantity in litres (U.S. gal) of the cooling system:

AGROTRON 120-130-150 17.5 (4.62)
AGROTRON 150.7-165.7 28 (7.39)
For temperature below -35°C (-31°F), contact DEUTZ-FAHR
192
Sezione 5.pmd 192 23/12/2004, 15.07

Checking the coolant level

The coolant level is in order, if the
2
coolant level is between the mark- 1
ings MIN and MAX.
1 - Coolant tank
2 - Cap
7181-389
Topping up coolant
To fill the coolant expansion tank 1, turn the filler cap 2 anti-clockwise.
This operation must always be carried out when the engine is cold.
Always use the original coolant AKROS FARM FLU from DEUTZ-FAHR
together with pure clean water with the same characteristics as drinking
water (for the correct percentage values see the table on page 174).
In the event of frequent and/or considerable losses of coolant, contact your
DEUTZ-FAHR service centre to eliminate the cause.
n
REQUIRED. avv048gb
n
CAUTION: IF THE BELT IS BROKEN DO NOT RUN THE ENGINE AS
THE COOLING FAN IS INOPERATIVE. avv112gb
n
DANGER: FLUIDS THAT ARE UNDER PRESSURE CAN PENETRATE
HUMAN TISSUE CAUSING SERIOUS INJURY. IT IS RECOMMENDED
TO ALWAYS STOP THE ENGINE AND RELIEVE THE PRESSURE
BEFORE CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING LINES. avv074gb
193
Sezione 5.pmd 193 23/12/2004, 15.07

Poly-V belt
The following are driven by belt 1
- the coolant pump,
- the alternator,
- the fuel pump and
- the fan.
The belt is always tensioned correctly

by spring-loaded tension roller 2.
7216-21
Changing poly-V belt

- Attach hex wrench to 3
- Rotate tension roller 2 so that
bores 4 and 5 overlap
- Mark bores with an appropriate pin
- Change belt
- Relieve tension on tension roller
and remove pin
7216-23
Fan with air conditioning system

1 = Compressor air conditioning
system
2 = Fan
To tighten the belt, unfasten screws

3 and 4. Use screw 5 to tighten the
belt by clamping the compressor.
After this belt tensioning process,
tighten the screws 3 and 4 back
down.
Air conditioning system: ( R134 a ) 7216-22

1425 g (503.03 oz).
194
Sezione 5.pmd 194 23/12/2004, 15.07

Checking the drivebelts
To check the tension of the radiator
fan drivebelt, press with your finger
at the mid-point of the longest belt 1
run between pulleys.
The tension is correct if the belt
deflection does not exceed 5-10 mm
(0.20-0.39 in).
2
To adjust the tension, loosen bolts 1
and 2 and move the bracket fixed by
bolt 2 to obtain the correct belt
tension. 7181-269
Tighten bolts 1 and 2.

Fuel supply pump, water pump and generator
1 = Fuel supply pump

2 = Water pump
3 = Generator
Relax bolts 4 and 5. The belt is 2

tensioned by moving the fuel supply 4
pump. 3
After tensioning, tighten bolts again. 5
1
7181-271
Fan with air conditioning system 7181-388
1 = Compressor air conditioning

system
Relax bolts 2 and 3 and tension V- 3

belt by moving the compressor.
After tensioning, tighten bolts again.
2
Air conditioning system: ( R134 a ) 1
1950 g (688.35 oz).
195
Sezione 5.pmd 195 23/12/2004, 15.07

Maintenance of the transmission
n
An increased oil level is only necessary, if the external consumers

should require it. The extra volume for the increased oil level is about
8.0 to 9.0 litres (2,12-2,38 U.S. gal).
Checking oil level

The inspection glasses are arranged
on the rear of the transmission.
To check the oil level:
– Park the tractor on level ground.
– The engine must be shut off for at
least 15 minutes.
– The three-point hitch must be
lowered to the ground.
– All consumers (working cylinders)
must be retracted. TB-0670
The display has two references:
“NORMAL“ for the oil level in normal

reference conditions.
“HIGH“ reference for operation with

applications requiring a considerable NORMAL
amount of oil.
7179-285
196
Sezione 5.pmd 196 20/12/2004, 10.30

Draining oil
1-2-3 = oil drain plugs
1 2 3
7179-260
Filling in oil
The filling socket is arranged be-
tween cab and rear power lift.
Fill in oil of specified grade through
the oil filler neck until the oil level
becomes visible in the inspection
glass.
For oil specifications and filling OIL
volume see Technical Data.
Check drain plugs and filter for
tightness after the engine has run for
a short period. Check transmission 7179-284
oil level again.
Changing intervals for the hydraulic oil filter
– The first change after 50 hours of operation;

– The second change after 500 hours of operation;
– Then every 500 working hours or if the pump is noisy when the hydraulic
lift has reached its working temperature.
– After any oil filter change, check the oil level.
197
Sezione 5.pmd 197 20/12/2004, 10.30

Oil filter for transmission oil pump
1 - Suction filter for transmission oil
pump
The oil taken in by the transmission
oil pump is cleaned by this filter.
Changing oil filter:
- Place collecting pan underneath
filter.
- Unscrew filter housing.
- Replace filter strainer.
- Clean sealing surfaces and screw-
type flange. 7214-31
- Tighten filter housing with the
hand.
1 - Adjustment pump
2 - Suction filter
3 - Upstream filter
LS system pump
The displacement volume of this
pump is variable and depends on
the corresponding oil requirements.
The higher the level of consumption,
the more the displacement volume
increases.
7214-32
Changing oil filter

- Place collecting pan underneath filter.
- Unscrew filter housing.
- Replace filter strainer.
- Clean sealing surfaces and screw-type flange.
- Screw in filter housing until firmly home
- Unscrew filter housing by 1/6 of a revolution
Changing upstream filter
- Place container under filter.
- Loosen hose connectors
- Remove upstream filter
- Fit new upstream filter taking the flow direction into account
- Tighten hose connectors
Cleaning upstream filter
The upstream filter may not be cleaned any more than 5 times. Then it
must be replaced.
- Only use suitable solvent or clean oil for cleaning purposes.
- Fill with cleaning agent in direction opposite to flow direction.
- Shake filter dry after cleaning
198
Sezione 5.pmd 198 20/12/2004, 10.30

Steering system
1 - Steering pump
2 - Steering pump suction filter
If tractors are fitted with a constant
pump, the steering system is always
supplied by this pump.
If tractors are fitted with a not
constant delivery pump (LS-*system),
the steering system is supplied by
the not constant delivery pump
during normal drive operations. This
pump only supplies the steering 7214-33
system if other consumers need a
very large volume of oil.

- Unscrew filter.
- Clean sealing surfaces. Put oil the sealing surface of the new filter.
- Tighten new filter with the hand.
NOTE: Always park the tractor on a level surface when

changing the oil or checking the level.

NOTE: If the filter is dirty, the hydraulic system pump will start
to get noisy; in this case renew the filter immediately.
NOTE: Make sure that different types of oil are never mixed.
Ensure the utmost cleanliness when making the hydraulic
coupling between the implement and tractor. Cover any
couplers not in use with their protective caps.
199
Sezione 5.pmd 199 20/12/2004, 10.30

Constant pump
1 - Suction filter for tractor hydraulics

2 - Pump
The constant pump supplies the

consumers with a constant volume of
oil.
7214-34

- Unscrew filter.
- Clean sealing surfaces. Put oil the sealing surface of the new filter.
- Tighten new filter with the hand.
n
OF INJURY. avv073gb
200
Sezione 5.pmd 200 20/12/2004, 10.30

Transmission housing breather
TB-0659
Planetary drives - rear drive

– Checking oil level
The oil control plugs are arranged on
the rear of the transmission. 1
1
Screw out oil control plug 1.
The oil level must come up to the
lower edge of the oil level control
bore.
Top up oil of specified brand as
necessary, then tighten oil control
plug using a new sealing ring.
TB-0660
– Changing transmission oil

The oil drain plug is arranged on the
lower side of the transmission.
Turn out oil drain plug 2. When all
used oil has drained, tighten oil
drain plug using a new sealing ring.
Fill in oil of specified brand up to the
lower edge of the oil control bore,
then tighten oil control plug using a
new sealing ring. 2 2
TB-0661
201
Sezione 5.pmd 201 20/12/2004, 10.30

Clean installed mesh filter for front axle suspension
Note: This work must be carried out
in a specialist workshop.
- Disengage the front suspension

- Place a oil collection vessel under
the suspension accumulator block
on the front axle
- Clean the accumulator block and
connections.
P
P
7205-95
- Unfasten screw plug 1 opposite

connection P
- Unfasten mesh filter with an
appropriate screwdriver and
remove it.
- Clean mesh filter and reinstall it
Always replace damaged mesh filters

(never reuse them)!
1
7205-96
202
Sezione 5.pmd 202 20/12/2004, 10.30

Maintenance of the front drive axle
n
WARNING: FOR THE WHEELS REPLACEMENT AND FOR SOME
MAINTAINING OR REPAIRING OPERATIONS, THE TRACTOR MUST
LIFTED, USING SPECIFIC SAFETY SUPPORTS. NEVER USE AS
SUPPORT THE IMPLEMENTS ATTACHED TO THE TRACTOR . DO NOT
ALLOW ANYONE TO GET ON THE TRACTOR, WHEN LIFTED FROM
THE GROUND FOR MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OPERATIONS. avv101gb
Differential

Depending on the design, the oil 1
control plug 1 is arranged on the left
or right front of the front axle.
Turn out oil control plug.
The oil level must come up to the
bore. Top up oil of specified brand as
necessary, then tighten oil control
plug using a new sealing ring.
7193-221
– Changing oil
The oil drain plug is arranged on the
lower side of the front axle.
Turn out oil drain plug 2. When all
used oil has drained, tighten oil
drain plug using a new sealing ring.
lower edge of the oil level control 2
bore.
Then tighten oil control plug using a
new sealing ring. 7193-222
203
Sezione 5.pmd 203 20/12/2004, 10.30

Planetary drives
Turn oil level control bore so that it is
horizontally in line with the hub
center and screw out the oil control
plug.
Top up oil of specified brand as
necessary so that it comes up to the
bore.
Pull oil control plug tight using a new
sealing ring. 7193-223
– Changing oil
Rotate RH and LH wheel hubs so
that the oil control plugs are verti-
cally down.
Screw out oil control plugs.
When all used oil has drained, turn
oil level control bore so that it is
horizontally in line with the hub
center.
bore.
Then tighten oil control plug using a 7193-224
new sealing ring.
n
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR LIGHT MATCHES WHEN
SERVICING OR BLEEDING FUEL SYSTEM. avv160gb
204
Sezione 5.pmd 204 20/12/2004, 10.30

2 2 1 - 50h
2 - 50h
3 - 250h
4 - 250h
1 1
3
3
1 2 3
7249-4
Grease lubrication for front axle and cardan shaft

Lubricant nipples 1 need to be regreased with approx. 1 cm3 (0,061 in3) of
multigrade grease (AKROS GREASE T2) every 500 operating hours or once a
year. Stop the greasing operation as soon as a film of grease appears at
the sealing lip.
Apply more grease to lubricant nipples 2 and 3 every 250 hours or once a
year. The cardan shaft protection has to be removed to reach lubricant
nipple 2. Apply more grease to lubricant nipples 4* and 5* every 500 hours
or once a year.
Note: Once the tractor has been cleaned using high-pressure

cleaners, all open lubrication points should be lubricated to
remove any dampness which may have penetrated.
205
Sezione 5.pmd 205 20/12/2004, 10.30

Grease nipple 4
7216-26
Grease nipple 5
7214-36

206
Sezione 5.pmd 206 20/12/2004, 10.30

Maintenance of front P.T.O. *

Checking oil level
To check the oil level, screw out plug
1.
Check oil level.
Top up with oil of specified grade as
necessary until the oil level comes up
to the lower edge of oil level control
bore.
For specifications see maintenance
and inspection schedule.
7181-277
Changing oil 7214-37
For the oil change, unscrew drain

plug 2 at bottom of front P.T.O.
housing. Collect used oil in a con-
tainer specifically reserved for this
purpose and arrange for disposal
according to the official regulations.
Screw plug back in position.
Fill in oil of the specified grade up to
the lower edge of oil level control
bore.
Cleaning P.T.O. housing breather

A clogged breather may cause pressure rise in the P.T.O. shaft drive, there-
fore always keep clean the P.T.O. breather 3.
n
avv113gb
CAUTION: FOR USE AND MAINTENANCE OF FRONT PTO (IF

FITTED), READ THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL OF THE P.T.O. MAKER.
n
DANGER: BEFORE DOING ANY JOB ON THE P.T.O. DRIVE LINE
AND P.T.O. END SHAFT, ENSURE THAT PTO IS DISENGAGED, THE
ENGINE SHUT OFF AND THE KEY REMOVED. avv067gb
207
Sezione 5.pmd 207 20/12/2004, 10.30

3 3
1 1
1 2 3 4
7214-38
Three-point hitch - lubrication intervals

1 = Lifting cylinder bottom, top 50 operating hours
2 = Lifting arm 50 operating hours
3.= Lifting bar * 250 operating hours
4 = Drawbar coupling ** 250 operating hours with appropriate utilization
*) Depending on the version, there may be 2 grease nipples on each lifting rod.
**) Depending on the version of tow bar coupling, 2 to 4 grease nipples may be present
per lifting rod.
Note: Once the tractor has been cleaned using high-pressure cleaners, all
open lubrication points should be lubricated to remove any dampness which
may have penetrated.
NOTE: When adjusting the length of the top link of the 3-point
hitch, take care that it does not come apart and ensure that a
sufficient length of the threaded end of the turnbuckle is
screwed into the turnbuckle housing to withstand the tractive
force applied when working.
n
WARNING: THE IMPLEMENTS MUST ALWAYS BE LOWERED TO THE
GROUND WHENEVER THE TRACTOR IS NOT OPERATING OR
WHEN ADJUSTMENT, MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OPERATIONS ARE
TO BE CARRIED OUT. avv024gb
208
Sezione 5.pmd 208 20/12/2004, 10.31

Clutch
Checking the main clutch
During driving, check whether the
clutch correctly separates the trans-
mission from the engine with
pressed pedal. Otherwise, immedi-
ately contact a DEUTZ-FAHR work-
shop to avoid increased transmission
wear.
7181-280
Brakes
For reasons of safety in public road traffic, it is absolutely necessary to have
the function of all brake systems checked most thoroughly at regular
intervals. This kind of work is required to be carried out at a DEUTZ-FAHR
service workshop.
Adjusting and repair work on parking (hand) and service (foot) brake
systems must be left to a DEUTZ-FAHR dealership or an authorized brake
servicing shop. Only genuine DEUTZ-FAHR replacement brake linings shall
be used, in order to maintain the vehicle’s operating license and the
manufacturer’s product liability.
All checking and maintenance operations on the trailer air braking

system must be performed with the tractor unhitched from the trailer,
parked on level ground, with the parking brake applied and with
the engine switched off.
Checking the service brake

Daily before your start work or move
off check service brake for proper
function and braking effect.
3
NOTE: During road travel, both

brake pedals must be locked 1 2
using bolt 3. 7181-124
209
Sezione 5.pmd 209 20/12/2004, 10.31

Checking brake fluid for service

brake and main clutch
The container is located under the
bonnet in front of the cab.
7181-281
Checking service brake

Daily before your start work or move
off check service brake for proper
function and braking effect.
7181-169
Safety goggles and protective gloves must be worn throughout all

maintenance work on the trailer air-braking system.
n
CAUTION: INSPECT PERIODICALLY THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL IN
THE TANK. THE BRAKE FLUID TANK MUST BE ALWAYS FULL. avv116gb
n
CAUTION: APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE AFTER THE ENGINE HAS
STOPPED AND BEFORE LEAVING THE TRACTOR. avv017gb
210
Sezione 5.pmd 210 20/12/2004, 10.31

Air Brake System *
Automatic dewatering valve
The compressed air tank is fitted on
the transmission, located underneath
the cab. The automatic dewatering
(i.e. drain) valve 1 is located under-
neath this tank. This automatic
dewatering valve is a zero-mainte-
nance item. However, it is still
advisable to check it occasionally if
sub-zero temperatures occur.
7181-282
Note: Before carrying out mainte-
nance work, compressed air should
be drained off from this tank. To do
this, with the engine stationary and
the ignition switched on, pump the
brake pedal repeatedly until pressure
drops below 2 bar (29.0 psi).
This pressure level can be read off

the pressure gauge.
Clean the contact surfaces on all line
connections between tractor and
trailer thoroughly before operation. If
the seals are not working properly,
either replace the seals or the
connections.
7205-68
Checking gladhands of air brake

system
Always keep clean the gladhands of

the air brake system – cover them
with protective caps.
In case of leakage – renew seals or
gladhands!
7181-285
211
Sezione 5.pmd 211 20/12/2004, 10.31

Maintenance of the climate control system (Cab Heating and Ventila-
tion Systems)
The system utilises the heat of the engine coolant to produce warm air.
The heating system should be flushed out along with the engine cooling
system when the coolant is changed.
During this operation, the heating control located on the left the driver
should be turned fully to the red section.
Periodically check the heater supply and return pipes for leaks.
Before using the system, make sure that the air intakes and outlet vents
are not obstructed.
IMPORTANT - Do not carry out any work on the system when the engine is
running.
Renewing the cab air filter

The cab air filter is located in the cab
1
uprights.
To exchange the cab air filter loosen
bolts 2 and remove air filter 1.
When replacing the cab air filter,
ensure correct disposal.
2
7181-286
n
DANGER: REPLACE THE “ACTIVE CARBON” FILTER AFTER 200
WORKING HOURS OR AFTER 36 MONTHS. IF YOU NOTICE SMELL
OF PESTICIDE INSIDE THE CAB, REPLACE IMMEDIATELY THE FILTER
AND LET CHECKED THE CAB GASKETS. avv092gb
212
Sezione 5.pmd 212 20/12/2004, 10.31

Cleaning the filter
Clean the filters as follows:

- Remove filters.
- Blow compressed air (max 6 bar (87.02 psi)) through the filter in the
opposite direction to the normal air flow in order to comletely remove all
dust;
- Wash with a solution of water and detergent solutoon at 40°C (59°F) for
about 15 minutes.
- Rinse with running water;
- Leave to dry at ambient temperature.
IMPORTANT: the filter must be

replaced if damaged and, in any
case, after 6 washes.
When refitting the filter, make sure
that it reaches up to the top and
bottom edges of the filter housing.
7181-287
n
WARNING: “PAPER” FILTER IS NOT SUITABLE FOR THE TREATMENT
OF PESTICIDES AND SO MUST BE REPLACED BY AN “ACTIVE
CARBON” FILTER AVAILABLE OPTIONALLY.
ONCE THE PESTICIDE TREATMENT IS FINISHED, IT IS NECESSARY
TO ONCE AGAIN REPLACE THE “ACTIVE CARBON” FILTER WITH
THE PAPER FILTER, SINCE THIS IS THE ONLY TYPE SUITED FOR
FILTERING FOREIGN PARTICLES FROM THE AIR. avv091gb
213
Sezione 5.pmd 213 20/12/2004, 10.31

Maintenance of the air conditioning system
The air conditioning system consists of an evaporator, a compressor driven
by the engine and a condenser and electric fan located in the front com-
partment under the engine hood.
Inspecting the radiator-condenser

Remove the safety grille and check that the radiator- condenser is not dirty
or clogged.
The fins should always be kept clean.
Clean with a water jet or air jet directed from the inside out (take care not
to damage the fins - straighten any bent fins using the special comb).
n
WARNING: CONTACT WITH REFRIGERANT CAN CAUSE SEVERE
SKIN LESIONS. IN CASE OF CONTACT WITH THE EYES, DO NOT
RUB EYES, SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ASSISTANCE. avv075gb
Cleaning the air-conditioning 7249-7

condenser:
– Open front engine hood
– Release the lock knobs 2.
– Unlock air-conditioning condenser
(1) and fold it upwards
– Blow out from the rear with
compressed air
N.B. - Should any of the fittings of

the air conditioning circuit become
loose, the system will have to be
recharged using special equipment.
Have the system recharged at a
specialised service centre.
Should the air conditioning system
require further servicing or repair,
contact your DEUTZ-FAHR service
centre.
7249-5
214
Sezione 5.pmd 214 20/12/2004, 10.31

Air conditioning system check
- To be carried out every year at a
specialised service centre
Any air and water in the refrigerant
circuit will impair the efficiency of the
system:
- the air is compressed unnecessarily
and does not produce any refriger-
ating effect.
- water tends to freeze in the coldest
parts of the circuit and thereby
create obstructions that impair the 7249-6
cooling action.
The system check begins by inspecting the condition of the refrigerant
through the inspection window on top of the receiver-drier.
The refrigerant, as seen through the inspection window, should be clear and
free of bubbles.
There are 2 balls in the sight glass. The provide information about the
condition of the system.
- White ball - filling
- Blue ball – indicator for humidity
The system is filled correctly if the white ball is floating in the sight glass
when the air conditioning compressor is on.
The dryer (humidity container) should be replaced if it is soaked through.
This is indicated by the blue ball being discoloured (violet).
Have maintenance work undertaken in a specialist workshop!
Check that the compressor is firmly fixed to the tractor and that the pulleys
are perfectly aligned.
IMPORTANT - Should it be necessary to remove the receiver-drier or the

air conditioning unit, immediately plug the ends of the inlet and outlet
pipes to prevent the ingress of dust or humidity.
n
CAUTION: REPAIRS TO THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM MUST
ONLY BE CARRIED OUT BY A SPECIALIZED SERVICE CENTRE. avv094gb
n
DANGER: WHILE MIXING THE ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION AND
FILLING THE TYRE, IT IS ESSENTIAL TO WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES
AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. STAY CLEAR OF RAISED BOOM AND
B U C K E T. avv130gb
215
Sezione 5.pmd 215 20/12/2004, 10.31

Air conditioning system compressor
The compressor must be securely
fixed to the tractor.
The refrigerant circuit is pressurised
and therefore must never be
opened.
The ecological refrigerant R 134a is
non-toxic and odourless, and is not
inflammable.
However, there are certain essential
safety precautions when handling
refrigerant:
7214-41
- Avoid direct contact with skin, as this can cause lesions similare to chilblains
- Avoid contact with eyes; should the refrigerant enter your eyes, seek
medical assistance immediately.
- Any welding either directly on the refrigerant circuit or in the immediate
vicinity is strictly prohibited. The refrigerant must not be be exposed to
temperatures in excess of 80°C (176°F).
n
CAUTION: INSPECT THE DRIVE BELTS OVER THEIR ENTIRE
LENGTH. IF DAMAGED OR CRACKED, RENEW IMMEDIATELY. avv110gb
n
DANGER: SHOULD THE SYSTEM DEVELOP A VISIBLE LEAK , DO
NOT APPROACH WITH A NAKED FLAME. REFRIGERANT GAS IS
FLAMMABLE AND ON COMBUSTION PRODUCES HIGHLY TOXIC
SUBSTANCES. avv095gb
n
SECTION.
216
Sezione 5.pmd 216 20/12/2004, 10.31

Service valves of the air condi-

tioning system
System recharging (valves 1 and 2)

must be carried out at a specialised
service centre.
7216-25
7214-40

NOTE: The hydraulic coupler fittings must be kept clean and

fitted with their protective caps.
n
DANGER: USE ONLY APPROVED NON-FLAMMABLE, NON-TOXIC
SOLVENTS FOR CLEANING PARTS. NEVER USE PETROL, SOLVENTS
OR OTHER FLAMMABLE FLUIDS. avv109gb
217
Sezione 5.pmd 217 23/12/2004, 15.06

General cleaning of the tractor
Clean the tractor with a steam or water jet (do not exceed 6 bar (87.02
psi)).
Protect all the data plates containing safety or service information. Should
any of the data plates become illegible, have them replaced immediately.
If you intend to clean the engine at the same time, protect the air filter,
alternator and starter motor.
After replacing any parts you removed prior to cleaning, run the engine for
a few minutes to dry off any wet components.
Cleaning with detergents
Choose commercial products that dissolve oil.
The detergent/water solution can be applied by spray gun or brush.
After applying the solution, wait a few minutes then rinse with clean water.
Cleaning with compressed air
This cleaning method is only suitable for removing dust.
When cleaning the grilles in the engine compartment or the cab filters,
always direct the air jet in the opposite direction to the normal air flow.
218
Sezione 5.pmd 218 20/12/2004, 10.31

CHAPTER 6 Electrical system
Chapter 6 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery ........................................................................... 220

Fuse box ......................................................................... 221
Relay .............................................................................. 224
Exchanging bulbs ........................................................... 227
Headlight alignment ...................................................... 230
Adjusting auxiliary top headlights * ............................... 232
*
type of market.
n
219
Sezione 6.pmd 219 20/12/2004, 10.31

Battery
Always disconnect battery terminals
before starting with any work on the
electrical system.
Battery maintenance
The battery is located under the fuel
tank on the right-hand side.
The top of the battery must always
be kept perfectly clean and dry.
Remove any sulphate deposits using
a rag soaked in ammonia solution. 7181-292
The terminal clamps must be kept

tight and coated with vaseline.
Even if the battery is the mainte-
nance-free type, we advise periodi-
cally checking the electrolyte level,
which should approximately 10 mm
(0.39 in) above the tops of the
plates.
If necessary, top up the level using
distilled water only. The electrolyte
level should checked more frequently 1
during summer months than in
7181-293
winter, at least once a week.
To access the battery, remove the
screws and the cover 1.
n
WARNING: WEAR EYE PROTECTION WHEN CHARGING OR
BOOSTING BATTERY. avv045gb
n
WARNING: BATTERY POSTS, TERMINALS AND RELATED
ACCESSORIES CONTAIN LEAD AND LEAD COMPOUNDS,
CHEMICALS KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE
CANCER AND BIRTH DEFECTS OR OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM.
WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING. avv143gb
n
CAUTION: DISCONNECT THE BATTERY CABLES, BEFORE TO
VERIFY OR REPAIR THE ELECTRICAL WIRING OR BEFORE TO START
WELDING OPERATIONS ON TRACTOR OR ON ATTACHED
IMPLEMENTS. avv043gb
220
Sezione 6.pmd 220 20/12/2004, 17.08

Connection/disconnection the battery to the tractor's electrical system
To avoid short circuits and damage to the battery, proceed in the following
order:
– Connecting battery
First connect positive lead to positive terminal of battery.
Then connect ground cable to negative terminal of battery.
– Disconnecting battery
First disconnect ground cable from negative terminal of battery.
Then disconnect positive cable from positive terminal.
Keep terminals and pole tips clean and apply a film of corrosion protection
grease to the surface.
Always take care that the battery is securely fastened!
NOTE: Before fitting a new fuse, it is essential to switch off the
engine and remove the key from the ignition. Before changing
a blown fuse, determine the cause and rectify the problem in
the electrical system.
Fuse box and fuses

Access to the fuse box is through the 1
cover 1 on the right of the driver’s
seat.
To open the cover, pull knob 2
upwards.
Always switch the electrical power off
2
before carrying out any work on the
fuses or relays.
Both the fuses and the relays are
mounted on printed circuit board
7181-294a
fixed inside the compartment
There is a diagram showing the 7181-295a

positions of the fuses and relays on
the underside of the fuse box cover.
Once you have identified the fuse to

be replaced, switch off the power
supply, eliminate the fault that
caused the fuse to blow and then
renew the fuse.
221
Sezione 6.pmd 221 20/12/2004, 17.08

F1 F2 F17
F30
F18 F35
F99
F31
7214-49
F1 = Main fuse; 100A

F2 = Rotary flasher, rear wiper; 30A
F3 = Fan blower, air-conditioning system; 30A
F4 = Rear worklights (RH/LH); 30A – also see F10
F5 = Not occupied
F6 = Front worklights; 30A – also see F10
F7 = Radio, CB-radio, clock, roof, terminal 15; 20A
F8 = Clock, interior lighting, radio, CB-radio, roof – terminal 30; 5A
F9 = High/low beam incl. switch lighting; 7.5A – also see F21/F22/F23

n
222
Sezione 6.pmd 222 20/12/2004, 10.31

F10 = Board computer, lighting switches: aux. top headlights, worklights
front on flashing sidelights, worklights front on cab roof, worklights
rear, ASM, 4-WD; 7.5A
F11 = Brake light, RL8; 15A
F12 = Front windscreen wiper/washer, horn; 15A
F13 = 4-WD, differential lock; 15A
F14 = Worklights front on sidelight; 15A
F15 = Turn signal light; 15A
F16 = INFOCENTER, radar-/speed sensors, rear P.T.O., powershift display,
compressed air generator, lighting switches: rear wiper, rotary
flasher; 3A
F17 = Suspended front axle; 7.5A – also see F11
F18 = Cigarette lighter, single-pole socket rear; 30A
F19 = Power socket; 30A
F20 = Parking light incl. switch, high beam; 30A – also see F24/F25
F21 = Low beam, top left; 7.5A – also see F23/F9
F22 = Low beam, top right; 7.5A – also see F23/F9
F23 = Low beam, overall; 15A
F24 = Control panel light, LH sidelight, LH number plate light, LH tail light,
trailer socket terminal 58 L; 7.5A – also see F20
F25 = RH sidelight, RH number plate light, RH tail light, trailer socket –
terminal 58 R; 7.5A – also see F20
F26 = Hazard warning light; 15A
F27 = INFOCENTER, POWERSHIFT; 1A
F28 = Active lock via relay 13, driver’s seat; 15A
F29 = P.T.O. control, P.T.O. key; 7.5A
F30 = Shut-down solenoid, electronic engine speed controller; 7.5A
F31 = Low beam, bottom left; 7.5A – also see F23
F32 = Low beam, bottom right; 7.5A – also see F23
F33 = High beam top/bottom; 15A – also see F20
F34 = AGROTRONIC; 7.5A
F35 = POWERSHIFT terminal 15; 7.5Abox; 30 A (Maxi Fuse)
F99 = Fan blower stage 4 – in the fan box; 30 A (Maxi Fuse)
n
DANGER: WHEN HANDLING BATTERIES:
- AVOID BREATHING IN FUMES PRODUCED BY THE ACID
SOLUTION (IF THE ACID IS ACCIDENTALLY SWALLOWED, DRINK
PLENTY OF WATER OR MILK, THEN DRINK BEATEN EGGS OR
VEGETAL OIL; SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY)
- USE THE APPROPRIATE PROCEDURE WHEN CHARGING
- CLEAN ALL PARTS WHERE ACID SOLUTION MIGHT HAVE SPILLED.
IF IT SPILLS ON THE HANDS, NEUTRALIZE IT WITH HYDRATED LIME
OR SODIUM BICARBONATE. IF IT HITS THE EYES, RINSE
REPEATEDLY FOR 10-15 MINUTES, THEN SEEK MEDICAL
ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. avv119gb
223
Sezione 6.pmd 223 20/12/2004, 10.31

RL1 RL2 RL3
RL4
RL5 RL6 RL7
RL8 RL9
RL10 RL11
RL14
7193-242
Relay assignment
1 = Diagnosis plug
RL 1 = Terminal 15; 40A
RL 2 = Worklights rear; 40A
RL 3 = Worklights front; 40A
RL 4 = Interval wiper front; 10A
RL 5 = Parking light; 10A
RL 6 = Reversing low beam bottom/top; 10A
RL 7 = Low beam; 10A
RL 8 = Brake light; 10A
RL 9 = Solenoid valve 4-WD; 10A
RL 10 = High beam; 10A
RL 11 = Reversing high beam bottom/top; 10A
RL 14 = Direction indicator, hazard flashlight; 10A

224
Sezione 6.pmd 224 20/12/2004, 17.09

Fuse box
1 - Starter relay
2 - Air-conditioning capacitor fan
3 - Front working headlamp
4 - Fuse front working headlight
5 - Fuse fan
6 - Preheat control unit 100 amp
7216-27
Fuse box AGROTRON 120-130-150
The engine preheating control unit and the engine’s electrical equipment
relays are located to the left of the engine, protected by a metal partition.
1 - Preheat control unit

2 - Air-conditioning capacitor fan
3 - Front working headlamp
4 - Starter relay
5 - Fuse F100 30-amp air-condition-
ing capacitor fan
6 - Fuse front working headlight
7214-42
n
DANGER: BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES. KEEP FLAMES,
SPARKS AND SMOKING MATERIAL AWAY FROM BATTERIES.
VENTILATION IS REQUIRED, WHEN CHARGING OR STORING
BATTERIES. AVOID CONTACT BETWEEN ACID AND SKIN OR
CLOTHES. avv118gb
n
DANGER: MAKE SURE YOU CONNECT THE BATTERY TERMINALS
CORRECTLY. DANGER OF SHORT- CIRCUIT! avv044gb
225
Sezione 6.pmd 225 23/12/2004, 15.05

Radar sensor *
– Cleaning radar sensor
A clean radar sensor is essential for

reliable and exact radar measure-
ment. Washing the cap with clean
water will do.
7181-298
Cleaning front and rear 7181-299

headlights 1
NOTE: Switch off the front

and rear lights before
cleaning them.
NOTE: Always switch off the engine before checking or

replacing fuses and relays.
n
DANGER: TO AVOID EYE INJURY, NEVER EXPOSE EYES TO WAVE
EMISSION ZONES WHEN RADAR IS IN OPERATION. DO THE RADAR
MAINTENANCE ONLY AFTER ENGINE TURNED OFF AND
IGNITION KEY IN STOP POSITION. avv120gb
n
WARNING : CONNECT ONLY TO A 12 VOLT SUPPLY TO BOOST
avv046gb
BATTERY.
226
Sezione 6.pmd 226 20/12/2004, 17.09

Exchanging bulbs
Headlights front grille 7214-43

2
1 = Top headlight
H4 12V 60/55W
2 = Workslight
ECE 37 HB3 2V 55W
1
Workslights * 7181-299
1
1 = Workslight
H30 12V 55W
227
Sezione 6.pmd 227 20/12/2004, 17.09

Headlights rear * 1 7181-301
1 = Worklights
H3 12V 55W
2 = Worklights
H3 12V-55W 24V-70W
Lighting flashing sidelight with 7181-302

auxiliary top headlight * 3
1 = Sidelight
DIN 72601-R19/5 12V 5W 2
2 = Turn signal light, front

DIN 72601-P25-1 12V 21W
1
3 = Auxiliary top headlight *
H4 12V 60/55W
DIN 72601-T8/4 12V 4W
n
CAUTION: ON TRAVELLING ON THE PUBBLIC ROAD WITH FRONT
IMPLEMENTS, IF THE VISIBILITY IS NOT ENOUGH (TRAFFIC LIGHTS
COVERED BY THE ATTACHED IMPLEMENT), PLEASE SWITCH ON
THE WORKING LIGHTS. avv121gb
228
Sezione 6.pmd 228 20/12/2004, 17.09

Lighting rear fender
1 = Turn signal 1
DIN 72601-P25-1 12V 21W 2
2 = Brake light/rear light

DIN 72601-P25-2 12V 21/5W
TB-0714
Overhead control panel light
DIN 72601-TB/4 12V 4W
7193-175
Cab interior light

3
DIN 72601-K 12V 10W 2
1
7181-147a
229
Sezione 6.pmd 229 20/12/2004, 17.09

H
A
m
10
h = 0.10 m
x=
H
7214-44
Headlight alignment
The tractor must be in normal road-going conditions and parked on a level

surface at a distance of 10 m (32.81 ft) from a wall (tyres must be inflated
to the correct pressures and the front wheels must be positioned for travel
in a straight line).
Switch on the dipped beam headlights.
1 - points on the wall corresponding to the centres of the headlights

A - distance apart of headlights
H - height of headlights
h - distance of the centre of the beam from the horizontal axis
X - distance between headlights and wall
230
Sezione 6.pmd 230 20/12/2004, 10.31

Turn the adjuster screws indicated by the arrows in the figure to move the
beam in a vertical or horizontal direction.
NOTE: in order to determine the points on the wall corresponding to the

centres of the headlights, we recommend that you bring the tractor up to
the wall with the dipped headlights on, mark the centres on the wall and
then move back to a distance of 10 m (32.81 ft) from the wall.
Horizontal adjustment
With the headlights switched on, the centres of the beams should be apart
the distance A indicated in the figure.
Vertical adjustment
With the headlights on, the lines delimiting the light and dark zones on the
wall should 10 cm (3.94 in) apart as shown in the figure.
IMPORTANT: The figure refers to headlight alignment for driving on the
right-hand side of the road. For driving on the left-hand side of the road,
the dark beam zone projected on the wall must be symmetrical to that
shown in the figure (i.e. the points of the dark zone that penetrate the light
zone must always be directed towards the edge of the road).
231
Sezione 6.pmd 231 20/12/2004, 10.31

3/3
m
10
x=
2/3
7214-45
Adjusting auxiliary top headlights *

The adjustment of the headlights should be carried out on absolutely level
ground and with the tractor loaded - i.e. with an implement mounted.
The tires must be correctly inflated and the front wheels moved precisely
into the straight-forward driving position.
Switch on low beam.
A = Headlight center-to-center distance
3/3 = Height of headlight centers above ground
2/3 = Adjusting dimension low-beam cut-off line = 2/3 of the height of the
headlight centers above ground
X = Distance between headlights and wall = 10 m (32.81 ft)
To adjust the auxiliary top headlights on the flashing sidelights, use the
same distances and measures as described above.
232
Sezione 6.pmd 232 20/12/2004, 10.31

Horizontal adjustment
The distance between the centers of the high intensity zones on the wall
must be identical with the distance A between the headlights.
Vertical adjustment
Position the tractor so that the distance X between auxiliary top headlights
and wall is 10 m (32.81 ft).
Example:
Measure height of auxiliary top headlights above ground surface, e.g. 2.82
m - 9.25 ft.
The low-beam cut-off line should reach up to two thirds of the height of the
auxiliary top headlights above the ground surface.
Height of auxiliary top headlights above ground (2.82 m - 9.25 ft) : 3 x 2 =
Low-beam cut-off line = 1.88 m (6.17 ft) above ground.
233
Sezione 6.pmd 233 20/12/2004, 10.31

234
Sezione 6.pmd 234 20/12/2004, 10.31

CHAPTER 7 Storage of the tractor
Chapter 7 - STORAGE OF THE TRACTOR
Cleaning ........................................................................ 236

Operations prior to garaging the tractor for
a long period ................................................................. 236
Storing the tractor ......................................................... 237
Preparing the tractor for use after a long
period of storage ............................................................ 238
*
type of market.
n
CAREFULLY DURING OPERATION OF THE TRACTOR. avv001i
235
Sezione 7.pmd 235 20/12/2004, 17.10

Cleaning
Soften dirt with well distributed jet of water and rinse off.
When using high-pressure cleaners or steam jets, avoid pointing directly at
safety, information, operation and product boards.
Protect electrical components from water. Do not point steam or water jet
directly at bearing points to prevent water ingress. Protect the sheet metal
parts with preserving agent after cleaning.
Operations prior to garaging the tractor for a long pe-

riod
(for example, before winter)
If the tractor is not to be used for a long period, we recommend that you
carry out the following operations to prevent certain components from
deteriorating during storage.
Engine
Run the engine until it warm, then stop the engine and drain all the oil
while still warm; refill with corrosion preventive engine oil type MIL-C-
21260B (or 642).
Fuel tank
Drain the fuel and refill with diesel fuel mixed with 10% corrosion preven-
tive oil.
Start the engine and run for about 15 minutes to allow the corrosion pre-
ventive mixture to reach all the fuel pipes, filters, pumps and injectors.
Coolant
See the instructions given in section 5 on maintenance operations.
Gearbox and hydraulic system

Drain off the oil contained in the gearbox. Refill with corrosion preventive
oil type MIL-C-21260 B or 642 (mixture).
Start the engine and drive the tractor for about one minute.
Stop the engine and drain off the corrosion preventive oil.
Refill the transmission with oil of the specified type. Do not start the tractor
during the protection period.
Rear axle and epicyclic reduction units

Drain the oil.
Refill with corrosion preventive oil type MIL-C-21260 B ore 642.
Drive the tractor for one minute. Stop the engine and drain off the corro-
sion preventive oil. Refill with oil of the specified type (see maintenance
table).
Do not start the tractor during the protection period.
236
Sezione 7.pmd 236 20/12/2004, 10.31

Inlet manifold and exhaust pipe

Plug both the air inlet hole and the exhaust pipe hole to form a perfect
seal.
Battery
Remove the battery from the tractor and have it checked and charged by a
SPECIALISED SERVICE CENTRE.
If the tractor owner has battery charging equipment, he/she may service
the battery provided they follow the indications of the manufacturer.
Storing the tractor

The tractor must be perfectly clean. Touch up any chipped paintwork to pre-
vent rust.
Coat bare metal surfaces with grease to prevent rust from forming.
The tractor must be stored in a suitable garage and should not be exposed
to excessive dust. If the tractor has to be stored outdoors, cover it with a
sheet.
IMPORTANT: never leave the tractor idle for long periods without having
carried out the operations described above.
237
Sezione 7.pmd 237 20/12/2004, 10.31

Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of

storage
- Remove the tractor from the wheel stands (if used).

- Remove the cover sheet (if any);
- Remove the plugs from the exhaust pipe and air inlet manifold.
- Charge and refit the battery (observe all the instructions and warnings
given in this manual).
- Start the engine and allow it run at low rpm for a few minutes.
- Do not accelerate until you are sure the engine is running smoothly.
- Carry out the operations prescribed for the start of the working season as
follows:
Put the tractor into service (before or after 50 operating hours), drain the
protective oil mixture from the engine and refill with oil of the specified
type.
Switch on the air conditioning and run the engine under no-load conditions
for approximately 10 minutes in order to lubricate the system compressor.
238
Sezione 7.pmd 238 20/12/2004, 10.31

CHAPTER 8 Technical data
Chapter 8 - TECHNICAL DATA
Dimensions..................................................................... 240
Engine data ................................................................... 242
Power take-offs .............................................................. 242
Hydraulic system ............................................................ 243
Fuel tank capacity .......................................................... 243
Cab ................................................................................ 244
Battery ........................................................................... 244
Attachment of implements to the tractor ....................... 245
Attachment points .......................................................... 246
*
type of market.
n
239
Sezione 8.pmd 239 20/12/2004, 17.11

Dimensions
Sezione 8.pmd
240
AGROTRON 120-130 150-150.7 165.7
CHAPTER 8
with tires, front 16.9 R 24 480/70 R 28 480/70 R 28

with tires, rear 18.4 R 38 20.8 R 38 20.8 R 38
Wheelbase A mm (in) 2647 (104.29) 2767 (109.02) 2767 (109.02)
Length maximum B mm (in) 4520 (178.09) 4695 (184.98) 4695 (184.98)
240
Width over rear fenders C mm (in) 2008 (79.12) 2068 (81.48) 2068 (81.48)
Width over steps D mm (in) 2130 (83.92) 2130 (83.92) 2130 (83.92)
Width over with 1900 mm track mm (in) 2320 (91.41) 2470 (97.32) 2470 (97.32)
Height with cab E mm (in) 2870 (113.08) 2986 (117.65) 2986 (117.65)
Ground clearance F mm (in) 520 (20.49) 535 (21.08) 535 (21.08)
580 (22.85) 580 (22.85)
Turning radius with 2000 mm track mm (in) 4950 (195.03) 5125 (201.93) 5125 (201.93)
Bare operating weight DIN 70020 kg (lb) 5010 (11045.0) 5970 (13161.5) 5940 (13095.3)
Perm. gross vehicle weight rating kg (lb) 8500 (18739.1) 10000 (22046.0) 10000 (22046.0)
Perm. axle load rating, front kg (lb) 4200 (9259.3) 7200 (15873.1) 7200 (15873.1)
Perm. axle load rating, rear kg (lb) 6500 (14329.9) 7750 (17085.7) 7760 (17107.7)
20/12/2004, 10.31
Technical data
7249-3
F
E
B
A
241
Sezione 8.pmd 241 20/12/2004, 10.31

Sezione 8.pmd
Engine data
242
AGROTRON 120-130-150 150.7-165.7
Engine BF6M 2012 C BF 6M 1013 EC
CHAPTER 8
No. of cylinders 6 6
Speed g/min 2300 2350
Bore mm (in) 101 (3.99) 108 (4.26)
Stroke mm (in) 126 (4.96) 130 (5.12)
Swept volume cm3 (in3) 6057 (369.60) 7146 (435.91)
242
Power take-offs
AGROTRON 120-130 150-150.7 165.7

Rear P.T.O.
540/min engine speed (1/min) 2208 2208 2208
540/min econ engine speed (1/min) 1609 1609 1609
1000/min engine speed (1/min) 2200 2200 2200
1000/min econ engine speed (1/min) 1600 1600 1600
Front P.T.O. 1000/min engine speed(1/min) 2130 2130 2130
23/12/2004, 15.05
Technical data
Sezione 8.pmd
Hydraulic system
AGROTRON 120-130 150-150.7-165.7
Working pressure bar/psi 200 (2900.8) 200 (2900.8)
CHAPTER 8
Delivery rate
- costant pump l/min (U.S. gal/min) 83 (21.91 80 (21.13)
- variable pump l/min (U.S. gal/min) 110 (29.04) 120 (31.69)
243
Oil volume available at remote couplers
Normal oil level
- When traveling up to 14° slope Litres (U.S. gal) 20 (5.28) 20 (5.28)
- When standing on a level surface Litres (U.S. gal) 32 (8.45) 32 (8.45)
Increased oil level
- When traveling up to 14° slope Litres (U.S. gal) 28 (7.39) 28 (7.39)
- When standing on a level surface Litres (U.S. gal) 40 (10.56) 40 (10.56)
Fuel tank capacity

Litres (U.S. gal)
23/12/2004, 15.05
AGROTRON 120-130-150 270 (71.28)
AGROTRON 150.7-165.7 300 (79.23)
Technical data
243
Cab
Sezione 8.pmd
244
The maximum noise level, measured at the ear of the driver in accordance with the test method described in
Addendum II to the European Directive EEC 77/311 is the following:
CHAPTER 8
Cab
Maximum noise level measured
Type of at the driver’s seat with doors and windows
Model
cab
VT4 open db (A) closed db (A)
244
With load Without load With load Without load
AGROTRON 120 GC4 78,4 73,6

AGROTRON 130 GC4 78,4 73,6
AGROTRON 150 GC4 80,0 75,8
AGROTRON 150.7 GC4 79,5 73,6
AGROTRON 165.7 GC6 78,6 73,3
Warning! If the noise level with continuous tractor operation turns out to be equal to or greater than 85 dB(A), the
user needs to take the appropriate precautions, as stated in the Italian Legislative Decree DL no. 277 dated 15/08/
1991, in articles 41, 42, 43 and 44.
Battery
20/12/2004, 10.31
AGROTRON 120-130-150-150.7-165.7 Volts Ha A
Standard 12 143 570
Technical data
Optional 12 170/180 700

Attachment of implements to the tractor
To allow full use in the widest possible range of applications, the structural
frame of the tractor has been designed to afford a solid, safe mounting for
agricultural or semi-industrial implements.
In the case of particularly heavy applications, contact your authorised service

centre to check suitability.
The tyres supplied with the tractor may not be suitable for special
applications.
If this is the case, we advise that you consult your dealer before fitting a
combination of tyres other than that authorised in the relative section of
this manual.
Before attaching the implement, check that the tyres are capable of
supporting the load.
Check the markings on the walls of the tyres and consult the tyre
manufacturer’s load tables.
245
Sezione 8.pmd 245 20/12/2004, 10.31

Sezione 8.pmd
246
A: N 6+6 M22x40
B: N 2+2 M20x2x53
C: N 16 M16x42
D: N 1+1 M20x2x53
CHAPTER 8
1377
E: N 16 M18x1.5x32
1257 F: N 8 M16x2x30 564
== 340
190 ==
B == 205
183
==
110
45
55
160
75
X
246
55
Y
125
183
D
A C
== 250
2545
(X=engine axis; Y= rear wheel axis).
440
==
300
90 == F == E
149
225
3
79
155
231
73
1
200
==
==
==
942
1382
1
20/12/2004, 10.31
Attachment points on the AGROTRON 120-130 with fixed front axle
Technical data
7216-28
Sezione 8.pmd
A: N 6+6 M22x40
B: N 2+2 M20x2x53
C: N 16 M16x42
D: N 1+1 M20x2x53
CHAPTER 8
1377 E: N 16 M18x1.5x32
1257 F: N 8 M16x2x30 564
== 340
190 ==
B == 205
183
==
110
45
55
160
75
247
X
55
Y
125
183
A C
== 250
(X=engine axis; Y= rear wheel axis).
2545
440
==
300
90 == G == D
149
225
3
79
155
231
73
1
200
==
==
==
942
1382
1
20/12/2004, 10.31
Technical data
7216-29
Attachment points on the AGROTRON 120-130 with suspended front axle
247
Sezione 8.pmd
248
A: N 6+6 M22x40
B: N 2+2 M20x2x53
C: N 16 M16x42
D: N 1+1 M20x2x53
CHAPTER 8
1377
E: N 16 M18x1.5x32
1257 F: N 8 M16x2x30 564
== 340
135 ==
B == 205
255
==
183
110
45
55
160
75
X
248
55
Y
125
183
D
A C
== 250
2699
440
==
axle (X=engine axis; Y= rear wheel axis).
300
150 == F == E
149
225
3
79
155
231
73
1
200
==
==
==
942
1382*
1450**
1
140
* AGROTRON 130-140
** AGROTRON 155-165
20/12/2004, 10.31
Attachment points on the AGROTRON 150-150.7-165.7 with fixed front
Technical data
7214-46
Sezione 8.pmd
A: N 6+6 M22x40
B: N 2+2 M20x2x53
C: N 16 M16x42
D: N 1+1 M20x2x53
1377
CHAPTER 8
87 E: N 16 M18x1.5x32
1257 F: N 8 M16x2x30 564
== 340
191 ==
B == 205
==
255
183
110
45
55
160
75
249
X
Y
55
112
165
A C
== 250
2699
440
==
300
150 == G == D
149
225
front axle (X=engine axis; Y= rear wheel axis).
3
79
155
231
73
1
200
==
==
==
942
1382*
1450**
1
20/12/2004, 10.32
* AGROTRON 130-140
** AGROTRON 155-165
Attachment points on the AGROTRON 150-150.7-165.7 with suspended
Technical data
7214-47
249
250
Sezione 8.pmd 250 20/12/2004, 10.32

CHAPTER 9 Fault diagnosis
Chapter 9 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS
Towing the tractor .......................................................... 252

Tools ............................................................................... 252
Fault diagnosis ............................................................... 253
Notes ............................................................................. 259
*
type of market.
n
CAREFULLY DURING OPERATION OF THE TRACTOR.
avv001gb
251
Sezione 9.pmd 251 20/12/2004, 10.32

Towing the tractor
For coupling the tractor, use the front towing and manoeuvring coupling.
If possible, use a towing bar.
When using ropes or chains, avoid jerk-like movements as otherwise the
damaged vehicle or connecting elements could lead to an accident. Upon
towing works, observe regulations specific to the country.
With running engine:

– Engine speed 1200–1300/min
– Maximum towing speed: 30 km/h (18.64 mph)
– Maximum towing time: 2 hours
– Lube oil pressure is supplied to the transmission
Towing the tractor with engine stopped and with forced lubrication
system inoperative: the tractor may only be transported on a suitable
vehicle.
Tools
The toolbox 1 is located at the RH

side of the tractor. 1
It can be locked and removed, if
required.
7181-293a
252
Sezione 9.pmd 252 20/12/2004, 10.32

Fault diagnosis
Engine
Engine fails to turn over when starter operated:

- Check battery charge level: If discharged, re-charge, otherwise clean the
terminals and check that the battery is properly installed.
- Faulty starter motor; have the defective parts replaced by an auto
electrician.
Engine difficult to start, or fails to re-start once stopped:

- Check fuel level; inspect fuel filter and renew if necessary.
- Injection system faulty:
Check for air in the fuel system and bleed if necessary. If the problem
persists, check the calibration of the injection pump and the injectors.
- Check the thermostarter; clean or replace as necessary.
- Poor compression: (operations to be carried out by a specialised service
centre only) check the valve clearances (0.30mm - 1,18 in). Inspect the
valves and grind or replace as necessary. Check head gasket and piston
rings. If necessary, replace pistons and cylinder liners.
White smoke from exhaust:

- Check injection pump timing (operation to be carried out by a specialised
service centre). Check valve stem to valve guide clearance (0.30mm -
1,18 in). If the problem persists, check piston rings and cylinder liners for
wear and replace if necessary.
- Inspect injectors (operation to be carried out by a specialised service
centre).
253
Sezione 9.pmd 253 20/12/2004, 10.32

Dark smoke from exhaust:
- Check that the air filter element is clean:
Clean or replace as necessary. Check the efficiency of the injectors and
calibrate if necessary. Check the calibration of the electronic rpm control
(operation to be carried out by a specialised service centre).
Engine does not respond well to sudden acceleration:

- Inspect the air filter element: Clean or replace as necessary.
- Inspect the fuel filter: Replace if necessary and bleed air from the system
if necessary.
- Poor compression: Check valve clearances are 0.30mm - (1,18 in)
(operation to be carried out by a specialised service centre); grind or
replace valves as necessary. If the problem persists, check piston rings and
cylinder liners for wear and replace if necesssary.
The engine does not run at a constant speed:

- Check for water in the fuel system: Drain the fuel tanks and refill with
clean fuel.
Check the calibration of the injectors (operation to be carried out by a
specialised service centre).
Engine overheats:
- Check drivebelt tensions:
Adjust drivebelt tensions. Clean air intake grilles.
- Check the injection pump timing (operation to be carried out by a
specialised service centre):
Calibrate the pumps and, if necessary, the injectors.
Check the pressure in the turbocharger outlet; clean the the turbocharger.
Gearbox
Difficulty in selecting and deselecting gears:

- Check selection mechanism for wear. Adjust or replace worn parts
(operation to be carried out at a specialised service centre)
Gears disengage during work:

- Check that the gear lever travel is sufficient to engage the gear. Adjust
gear lever travel (operation to be carried out by a specialised service
centre).
- Check gears for wear. Replace worn parts (operation to be carried out by
a specialised service centre).
254
Sezione 9.pmd 254 20/12/2004, 10.32

Noisy gearbox::
- Check level and type of oil. Top up or change oil for recommended type.
- Check gear teeth and bearings for excessive wear. Replace worn parts
- Check backlash between crown wheel and pinion. Adjust backlash
Oil leaks:
- Check that oil level is not too high.
Restore correct level.
- Check that the breather valve is not blocked. Clean or replace as
necessary.
- Check the oil seals for wear.
Replace (operation to be carried out at a specialised service centre).
- Check gaskets.
Replace (operation to be carried out at a specialised service centre).
Front and rear P.T.O.

(All checks of the front and rear P.T.O.s must be carried by a specialised
service centre)
The clutch slips:

- Check the clutch hydraulic system:
Renew worn clutch springs. Inspect and, if necessary, renew the seal rings
on the piston and the manifold. At the same time, check that the piston
slides freely.
- Inspect clutch disks for wear:
Renew disks.
The clutch fails to disengage:

- Check that the piston completes a full stroke.
Check the control device, adjust or replace defective parts, including also
the clutch disks if necessary.
- Piston stuck in housing:
Remove any rough spots on the outer surface of the piston.
- P.T.O. fails to stop on disengaging the clutch:
Poor sealing of piston; overhaul complete assembly.
255
Sezione 9.pmd 255 20/12/2004, 10.32

Front wheel drive
Excessive wear of universal joint cross journals:

- Front axle overloaded:
Use only front loaders recommended by the manufacturer.
- Oil leaks:
Oil breather clogged: clean. Check oil seals for wear and replace if
necessary (operations to be carried out by a specialised service centre).
Worn tyres:
- Check wheel toe-in (operation to be carried out by a specialised service
centre).
- Wheel oscillation:
Check steering joints for wear and replace if necessary (operation to be
be carried out by a specialised service centre).
Brakes
Poor braking action:

- Check for air in braking system:
Bleed air and check adjustment of brake controls and disk wear
(adjustments ke controls and disk wear (adjustments to be carried out by
a specialised service centre).
Braking action unbalanced:

- Check for air in the circuit:
Bleed and check control adjustments
(adjustments to be carried out by a specialised service centre).
Brakes noisy:
- Check adjustment: Adjust brakes and check that the brake fluid is of the
specified type (adjustments to be carried out by a specialised service
centre).
Hydraulic lift
(All inspection and repairs of the front/rear hydraulic lifts are to be carried
out by a specialised service centre)
The lift raises too slowly or fails to raise altogether:

- Check that the lift is not overloaded.
- Check that the pump is functioning correctly: Check that the oil is of the
specified type and that the oil level is correct. Inspect pump and renew
any worn parts. Check safety valve settings.
256
Sezione 9.pmd 256 20/12/2004, 10.32

The lift is only partially raised:
- Check lift adjustments
The lift descends too slowly:

- Check that the “down” valve is not sticking.
The lift oscillates rhythmically:

- Check adjustment and pressure relief valve settings.
When the lift arms are raised to maximum height, the pressure relief valve
discharges continuously:
- Check adjustment.
- Control valve spool worn (with internal leaking).
Auxiliary hydraulic systems
Implements connected to the hydraulic system do not operate correctly:

- Implements not suited to characteristics of the hydraulic system.
- Fault in the hydraulic lift system. See lift unit.
- Incorrect type/quantity of of oil in the circuit: change and/or top up
transmission oil.
- Oil filters clogged: renew filters.
- Oil pump worn or defective: overhaul or replace as necessary (operations
to be carried out by a specialised service centre).
- Safety valve setting incorrect:
Check valve pressure setting and adjust if necessary (operations to be
carried out by a specialised service centre).
- Incorrect adjustment of control levers:
Adjust (operations to be carried out by a specialised service centre).
Excessive noise from system (with vibration of system pipes):

- Air in system:
Check tightness of fittings and seals.
- Interference between pipes (visual inspection):
Move the pipes so that they are not in contact with other pipes or
components.
257
Sezione 9.pmd 257 20/12/2004, 10.32

Oil leaks:
- Pipe fittings worked loose: tighten.
Seals defective: replace.
Pipes damaged: replace.
Automatic centering device does not function correctly:

- Internal components damaged or sticking:
Overhaul the automatic centering device; replace any defective parts
(operations to be carried out by a specialised service centre).
The control valve levers do not remain engaged:

- Incorrect adjustment of control levers:
Adjust correctly (operations to be carried out by a specialised service
centre).
- Automatic centering device defective or incorrectly adjusted:
Overhaul the centering device (operations to be carried out by a
specialised service centre).
Important
Sockets for data transfer and diagnostics
Located on the multifunction console on the right of the driver, there is a 5

-pin socket, which, in conjunction with a special tester, allows diagnosis of
the entire tractor elctronic system.
Furthermore, in the event of a malfunction of a mechanical or hydraulic

component, the electronic control unit will signal any alarm conditions
relayed from the corresponding sensors or actuators on the performance
monitor.
258
Sezione 9.pmd 258 20/12/2004, 10.32

NOTES
259
Sezione 9.pmd 259 20/12/2004, 10.32

NOTES
260
Sezione 9.pmd 260 20/12/2004, 10.32

Index
Index
A
Accelerator pedal .................................................................................. 43
Activation front and rear P.T.O. .............................................................. 57
Active carbon air filter .......................................................................... 127
Actual speed storing .............................................................................. 56
Actuating elements right ....................................................................... 44
Additional socket for external consumers ............................................. 128
Adjustable multi-function arm rest* ......................................................... 8
Adjustable track wheels ....................................................................... 144
Adjusting auxiliary top headlights * ...................................................... 232
Adjusting front fender .......................................................................... 158
Adjusting lift rods ................................................................................ 118
Adjusting steering stops ....................................................................... 143
Adjusting the upper link ...................................................................... 100
Air brake system * ................................................................... LXXVII, 211
Air conditioning controls ...................................................................... 125
Air conditioning system ........................................................................ 123
Air conditioning system check .............................................................. 215
Air conditioning system compressor ..................................................... 216
Air intake ............................................................................................ 188
Air pressure gauge for air brake system * .............................................. 30
Arrangement of electricalimplement sockets ........................................ 128
Ashtray and cigar lighter ...................................................................... 130
ASM ...................................................................................................... 35
ASM – Differential lock .......................................................................... 39
ASM – Four wheel drive ......................................................................... 38
ASM* Driveline Management ................................................................ 37
Attacchi a distanza ................................................................................. 86
Attacco a tre punti e ponte posteriore ................................................. 208
Attachment of implements to the tractor ............................................. 245
Attachment points ..................................................... 246, 247, 248, 249
Automatic * trailer hitch ....................................................................... 105
Automatic P.T.O. .................................................................................... 41
Auxiliary hydraulic systems ................................................................... 257
B
Ballast carrier ....................................................................................... 161
Ballasting * .......................................................................................... 161
Battery .............................................................................. 220, 237, 244
Battery maintenance ........................................................................... 220
Blue function displays ............................................................................ 23
261
Indice analitico.pmd 261 20/12/2004, 10.32

Index
Brakes ........................................................................................ 209, 256
C
Cab ............................................................................... XXXVIII, 121, 244
Cab door ............................................................................................. 134
Cab interior light ........................................................................ 130, 229
Cab with multi-function armrest ............................................................ 12
Cab without multi-function armrest ....................................................... 11
Calibrating the ground speed ................................................................ 20
Capacità serbatoio gasolio .................................................................. 243
Case for instruction booklet ................................................................. XXII
CE ......................................................................................................... XX
Changing engine oil ............................................................................ 184
Changing engine oil filter ........................................................... 185, 186
Changing fuel filter .................................................................... 185, 186
Changing intervals for the hydraulic oil filter and for the
circuit hydrostatics steering *: .............................................................. 197
Changing over between MIN and MAX stored speeds ........................... 56
Changing poly-V belt ........................................................................... 194
Changing PTO shaft stub ....................................................................... 70
Changing the driving direction .............................................................. 65
Changing the driving direction with clutch ............................................. 65
Changing the driving direction without clutch ........................................ 65
Chapter 0 - TABLE OF CONTENTS .......................................................... III
Chapter 1 - SAFETY ........................................................................... XXVII
Chapter 2 - TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION .............................................. LXXI
Chapter 3 - USE ...................................................................................... 1
Chapter 4 - WHEELS ........................................................................... 139
Chapter 5 - SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE .......................................... 169
Chapter 6 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ......................................................... 219
Chapter 7 - STORAGE OF THE TRACTOR ............................................. 235
Chapter 8 - TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................ 239
Chapter 9 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS ........................................................... 251
Charge warning light ............................................................................. 26
Check parking brake ............................................................................. 66
Check the Equipment ........................................................................... XLI
Checking brake fluid for service brake and main clutch ........................ 210
Checking gladhands of air brake system ............................................. 211
Checking oil level ................................................................................ 196
Checking service brake ........................................................................ 210
Checking the coolant level .................................................................. 193
Checking the drivebelts ....................................................................... 195
Checking the engine oil level .............................................................. 183
Checking the main clutch .................................................................... 209
Checking the service brake .................................................................. 209
Checks and maintenance table ................................. 175, 176, 177, 178
Checks before start-up .......................................................................... 60
262

Index
Children’s guard * .......................................................................... 3, 135
CLASS “C” TOWING HITCH ................................................................ 109
CLASS “D2" AND ”D3" TOWING HITCHES .......................................... 110
Clean installed mesh filter for front axle suspension ............................ 202
Clean the Tractor ................................................................................ XLIII
Cleaning ............................................................................................. 236
Cleaning dry-type air cleaner .............................................................. 188
Cleaning front and rear headlights ...................................................... 226
Cleaning side grilles ............................................................................ 180
Cleaning the air-conditioning condenser ............................................. 214
Cleaning the gearbox oil and fuel coolers and the engine radiator ...... 181
Climate control .................................................................................... 121
Clock * ................................................................................................ 131
Closing the hood ................................................................................. 179
Clutch ................................................................................................. 209
Combination of tractor and mounted implement .................................. 93
Commutator switch F–N–R .................................................................... 46
Conformity declaration ......................................................................... XVI
Connection/disconnection the battery to the tractor's
electrical system ................................................................................. 221
Connector sockets ............................................................................... 128
Constant pump ................................................................................... 200
Control switches located on left of dashboard under the
steering wheel ...................................................................................... 33
Control type selector ............................................................................. 74
Conversion tables ............................................................................ LXXXII
Coolant ................................................................................... LXXVII, 236
Cooling system .................................................................................... 192
Coupling the catching hook ................................................................... 99
Creeper range ....................................................................................... 49
Cross shifting lever ................................................................................ 88
D
Damage to the ROPS ..................................................................... XXXVIII
Danger, Warning, Caution .................................................................. XXIX
Decals ................................................................................................. XXX
Delivering the tractor to the customer ................................................ XVIII
Diagram of the mixed-automatic air braking system ........................... 166
Differential .......................................................................................... 203
Differential lock ..................................................................................... 36
Differential lock pilot light ..................................................................... 25
Dimensioni .......................................................................................... 240
Dimensions with front-mounted implements ....................................... 103
Doors and windows ............................................................................. 134
Draft control .......................................................................................... 74
Draft/position intermix ........................................................................... 75
Drawbar* and Piton Fix* towing hitch ................................................... 111
263

Index
Driver’s seat ....................................................................................... 4, 6
Dry-type air filter pilot light ................................................................... 29
E
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ............................................................................ 219
Electronic engine speed ......................................................................... 27
Electronic engine speed controller (EMR) ................................................ 54
EMV supplement sheet ......................................................................... XXI
Engine ........................................................................................ 236, 253
Engine coolant ..................................................................................... 191
Engine data ......................................................................................... 242
Engine oil level ................................................................................. LXXVI
Engine oil pressure pilot light ................................................................. 26
Engine Serial Number ...................................................................... LXXIV
Engine speed ......................................................................................... 17
Engine temperature ............................................................................... 16
EU Declaration of Conformity ............................................................. XXVI
Exchanging bulbs ................................................................................. 227
External connection(POWERBEYOND)* ................................................... 85
External operation of rear P.T.O. ...................................................... 58, 71
External remote control * only with AGROTRONIC-hD ........................... 79
External socket ..................................................................................... 129
F
Failure code display ............................................................................... 47
Failure indications .................................................................................. 51
Fan with air conditioning system ................................................. 194, 195
FAULT DIAGNOSIS .............................................................................. 251
Fault diagnosis .................................................................................... 253
First-aid box * .................................................................................... LXXV
Floating position with the cross-shifting facility in use ............................ 90
Flow controls for hydraulic control valves * ............................................. 78
Follow a Safety Programme ................................................................ XXXI
Follow Safe Operating Practices .......................................................... XLVII
Fresh/recycled air controls .................................................................... 126
Front and rear P.T.O. ............................................................................ 255
Front axle drive ...................................................................................... 36
Front Axle Nameplate ...................................................................... LXXIV
Front ballast for front hydraulic lift ....................................................... 163
Front engine compartment .................................................................. 180
Front loader * ...................................................................................... 104
Front P.T.O. speed * ............................................................................... 18
Front power lift * ................................................................................... 98
Front towing and manoeuvring hitch .............................................. 95, 96
Front towing and manoeuvring hitch front with front ballast
weight 600 kg (1322.76 lbs) 1000 kg (2204,60 lbs) * ........................... 97
Front towing and manoeuvring hitch with ballast carrier
264

Index
and ballast weights * ............................................................................ 96
Front towing and manoeuvring hitch with bolt ................................ 96, 97
Front wheel drive ................................................................................ 256
Front window ....................................................................................... 135
Fuel level in tank ................................................................................... 16
Fuel storage ........................................................................................ 189
Fuel supply pump, water pump and generator .................................... 195
Fuel tank ............................................................................................. 236
Fuel tank supply ............................................................................... LXXVI
Function Agrotronic-hD .......................................................................... 72
Functional description ............................................................................ 55
Fuse box .............................................................................................. 225
Fuse box and fuses .............................................................................. 221
G
Gear shifting ......................................................................................... 48
Gearbox .............................................................................................. 254
Gearbox and hydraulic system ............................................................. 236
Gearbox Nameplate ........................................................................ LXXIV
Gearbox oil pressure pilot lightPOWERSHIFT .......................................... 26
General cleaning of the tractor ............................................................ 218
General Operating Hazards ................................................................... LII
General safety rules ........................................................................... XXXI
Grease lubrication for front axle and cardan shaft ............................... 205
Green function display .......................................................................... 23
Ground speed ....................................................................................... 19
H
Hazard warning lights ............................................................................ 32
Headlight alignment ........................................................................... 230
Headlights front grille .......................................................................... 227
Headlights rear * ................................................................................. 228
Heating system ................................................................................... 125
Height adjustment ................................................................................... 8
Height adjustment * with adjusting rail ................................................ 106
High beam pilot light ............................................................................ 24
High-visibility roof ............................................................................... 136
Hours in operation ................................................................................. 17
Hydraulic control valve levers ................................................................ 86
Hydraulic lift ........................................................................................ 256
Hydraulic trailer brake * ......................................................................... 92
I
Ignition key ............................................................................................. 3
Ignition lock ...................................................................................... 9, 61
Implement Stabilization ....................................................................... 119
265

Index
Implements and Attachments ............................................................... LIII
Important additional information ........................................................... 93
Inadequacy oil pressure in the idraulic steering system warning light ..... 28
INFOCENTER 2 ...................................................................................... 14
INFOCENTER 3 * ................................................................................... 15
Inlet manifold and exhaust pipe .......................................................... 237
Installation of additional controls and display .................................. X, 136
Instrument introduction flap .......................................................... 91, 137
Interior rearview mirrors ...................................................................... 132
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS (PART. 1) ............................................... LXXVIII
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS (PART. 2) ................................................ LXXIX
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS (PART. 3) ................................................. LXXX
Introduction ........................................................................................ XXIII
Introduction to Safety ......................................................................... XXIX
K
Know Your Equipment ............................................................................ XL
L
Lateral stabilization, automatic * ......................................................... 119
Leaving and securing the tractor ............................................................ 67
LEDs ...................................................................................................... 75
Length of the universal joint shaft ......................................................... 69
Lifting AGROTRONIC -hD * ................................................................... 72
Lighting ........................................................................................... LXXVII
Lighting flashing sidelight with auxiliary top headlight * ....................... 228
Lighting rear fender ............................................................................. 229
Load-Sensing System * .......................................................................... 84
Locking remote valves ........................................................................... 87
Loudspeakers * .................................................................................... 131
Lowering speed control .......................................................................... 76
LS system pump .................................................................................. 198
M
Main clutch ............................................................................................ 42
Main control lever .................................................................................. 72
Maintenance intervals .......................................................................... 170
Maintenance of front P.T.O. * ............................................................... 207
Maintenance of the air conditioning system ......................................... 214
Maintenance of the climate control system .......................................... 212
Maintenance of the front drive axle ..................................................... 203
Maintenance of the transmission ......................................................... 196
Manual temperature control ................................................................ 126
Manual throttle ...................................................................................... 43
Maximum lift height control ................................................................... 76
Maximum working depth control ............................................................ 76
266

Index
Meaning of the failure code numbers in the POWERSHIFT display ......... 52
Mechanical * trailer hitch ..................................................................... 104
Mechanical ratio .................................................................................. 142
Metric conversion .............................................................................. LXXXI
Mixed-automatic air braking system .................................................... 166
Mounting and removing front-mounted implements ........................... 100
Mounting implements .......................................................................... 115
Mounting the numberplate ................................................................ LXXV
Multi-purpose switch lever ..................................................................... 31
N
Narrow track ....................................................................................... 141
NOTES ....................................................................................... 259, 260
O
Oil feed control ..................................................................................... 83
Oil filter for transmission oil pump ....................................................... 198
On-road travel with front-mounted implement ................................... 102
Opening the engine hood ................................................................... 179
Operating the cross shifting lever .......................................................... 88
Operations prior to garaging the tractor for a long period ................... 236
Original replacement parts ................................................................ LXXII
Other forms of ballast ......................................................................... 163
Outlet nozzles ..................................................................................... 122
Overhead control panel light ............................................................... 229
Overhead indirect control panel light ................................................... 130
P
P.T.O. control .......................................................................................... 57
P.T.O. shaft operation ............................................................................. 68
P.T.O. shaft pilot lights ............................................................................ 29
P.T.O. shaft speeds ................................................................................. 30
Parallel operation .................................................................................. 89
Parking brake warning light ................................................................... 28
Parking brake warning light * ................................................................. 28
Pendulum compensation ..................................................................... 120
Permanent consumers ........................................................................... 91
Permissible tyre combinations .............................................................. 145
PICK-UP HITCH drawbar and towing hitch ............................................ 107
Piton Fix * ............................................................................................ 113
Planetary drives .......................................................................... 201, 204
Poly-V belt ........................................................................................... 194
Position control ...................................................................................... 75
Power socket ....................................................................................... 129
Powershift Display ................................................................................. 47
Power toke off ..................................................................................... 242
267

Index
Pre-delivery, Installation on the Farm and Warrant ............................. XXIV
Pre-delivery operations to be done in the workshop ........................... XVIII
Preheating pilot light ............................................................................. 27
Prepare for Safe Operation .............................................................. XXXIX
Preparing the tractor for use after a long period of storage ................. 238
Pressure test in the engine hydraulic circuit supply
system warning light ............................................................................ 29
Protective Structures ........................................................................ XXXVII
R
Radar sensor * ..................................................................................... 226
Radio * ................................................................................................ 131
Rear axle and epicyclic reduction units ................................................. 236
Rear ballast ......................................................................................... 163
Rear lift controls .................................................................................... 73
Rear P.T.O. speed ................................................................................... 18
Rear power take-off shaft selector lever ................................................ 59
Rear screen wiper * ............................................................................... 40
Rear view mirrors telescopic * ................................................................ 60
Rear window ....................................................................................... 136
Red warning lights ................................................................................. 23
Refrigerator compartment ................................................................... 134
Refueling ............................................................................................. 189
Refueling at the end of the working day ............................................. 189
Refuelling .............................................................................................. 60
Relay assignment ................................................................................ 224
Remote control ...................................................................................... 77
Remote control of automatic trailer hitch * .......................................... 105
Remote couplers .................................................................................... 83
Remote valves ....................................................................................... 80
Renewing the cab air filter ................................................................... 212
Replacing air filter cartridge ................................................................. 187
Replacing safety cartridge .................................................................... 188
Risk of Overturning .................................................................................. L
Road Transport ...................................................................................... LV
Rotary flashlight * .................................................................................. 40
Routine checks .................................................................................. LXXVI
Running direction of tires ..................................................................... 142
S
SAFETY .............................................................................................. XXVII
Safety ................................................................................................ XXIX
Safety Alert Symbol and Terms ......................................................... XXVIII
Safety information for driving ................................................................ 64
Scope of equipment ............................................................................ XXII
Screen wash system ......................................................................... LXXVI
Seat belts * ............................................................................................. 9
268

Index
Serial numbers ......................................................................................... I
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................. 169
Service and maintenance .................................................................... 170
Service brake – steering brake ............................................................... 42
Service valves of the air conditioning system ....................................... 217
Servicing air filter ................................................................................ 187
Servicing of the engine ........................................................................ 179
Servicing the Tractor ........................................................................... XLIV
Shifting range pilot light ........................................................................ 25
Side stabilisation, right ........................................................................ 119
Signal socket as per ISO 11786 ........................................................... 129
Sockets for data transfer and diagnostics ............................................. 258
Speed over-control ................................................................................ 56
Standby driving program ....................................................................... 50
Start Safely ......................................................................................... XLV
Starting .............................................................................................. XLIV
Starting Fluid ...................................................................................... XLVI
Starting the engine ............................................................................... 61
Starting the tractor ................................................................................ 63
Starting with clutch ................................................................................ 63
Starting without clutch ........................................................................... 64
Starting work with the P.T.O. .................................................................. 69
Steering system ................................................................................... 199
Steering wheel adjustments * .................................................................. 7
Stopping the Motor ............................................................................... 66
Stopping the tractor ............................................................................... 66
Storage compartment .......................................................................... 133
STORAGE OF THE TRACTOR ................................................................ 235
Storing and recalling the lower speed .................................................... 56
Storing and recalling the upper speed ................................................... 55
Storing the tractor ............................................................................... 237
Sunshade – roof hatch * ...................................................................... 137
Sunshade * .......................................................................................... 137
Survey ................................................................................................... 81
Survey – instrument console .................................................................. 13
Survey – Warning and pilot lights ........................................................... 23
Survey - in-cab controls .................................................................. 11, 12
Suspended front axle * .......................................................................... 34
Switchs for additional electric devices ............................................. VII, 40
T
TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................. III
Table of contents .................................................................................... IV
TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................ 239
Tilting ...................................................................................................... 8
Tires and Wheels ............................................................................. LXXVII
269

Index
To Avoid Rear Overturns ......................................................................... LI
To Avoid Side Overturns .......................................................................... L
To prevent damage ............................................................................... 69
Tools .................................................................................................... 252
Topping up coolant .............................................................................. 193
Tow hook interlock ............................................................................... 108
Towing the tractor ................................................................................ 252
Track adjustment ................................................................................. 140
Track width adjustment for wheels with adjustable rims ....................... 147
Track width adjustment for wheels with fixed rims ................................ 154
Tractor and Machine Noise ................................................................. XXVI
TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION ................................................................. LXXI
Tractor nameplate ............................................................................ LXXIII
Trailer hitch assemblies .................................................................... LXXVII
Trailer hitch, rear * ............................................................................... 104
Trailer receptacle ................................................................................. 128
Transmission gear shifting with PowerShuttle ......................................... 45
Transmission housing breather ............................................................. 201
Turn signal pilot light ............................................................................. 24
Tyre inflation pressures ........................................................................ 141
U
Unlocking the door * ............................................................................... 3
Upper link ........................................................................................... 117
USE ......................................................................................................... 1
V
Ventilation ........................................................................................... 121
W
Warning and servicing display * ............................................................ 21
Warning and servicing display * ............................................................. 61
Warning triangle * ............................................................................. LXXV
Water ballasting .................................................................................. 164
Water quality ....................................................................................... 191
Wheel chock .......................................................................................... 67
Wheel slip * ........................................................................................... 19
Wheel slip control * ............................................................................... 78
WHEELS ............................................................................................... 139
Width of front axle ............................................................................... 142
Width of rear axle ................................................................................ 142
Work Safely ........................................................................................ XLVII
Worklights, rear * ................................................................................... 41
Workslights * ....................................................................................... 227
270

Index
Y
Yellow displays ...................................................................................... 23
12/2004 cod. 307.7249.3.6

By Personal Computing Tecnical Publications Dept.
271

307. 7249. 3. 6
12/2004

Agrotron 120-130-150-150.7-165.7

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Agrotron 120-130-150-150.7-165.7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSTRUCTION BOOK

Copertina.pmd 1 20/12/2004, 10.22

The specifications and illustrations contained in this instruction book refer to

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

1st edition 12/2004

Retrocopertina.pmd 1 20/12/2004, 10.22

The specifications and illustrations contained in this instruction book refer to

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

1st edition 12/2004

Retrocopertina.pmd 1 22/02/2005, 9.32

Sezione 0.pmd 2 20/12/2004, 10.22

Chapter 0 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1 - Safety ................................................ XXVII - LXX

Chapter 2 - Tractor identification ...................... LXXI - LXXXII

Chapter 3 - Use .......................................................... 1 - 138

Chapter 4 - Wheels ................................................139 - 168

Chapter 5 - Maintenance .......................................169 - 218

Chapter 6 - Electrical system ..................................219 - 234

Chapter 7 - Storage of the tractor .........................235 - 238

Chapter 8 - Technical specifications .......................239 - 250

Chapter 9 - Fault diagnosis ....................................251 - 260

Sezione 0.pmd 3 20/12/2004, 16.52

Chapter 0 - Table of contents and Presentation ............................ I

Chapter 1 - SAFETY ..................................................................... XXVII

Sezione 0.pmd 4 20/12/2004, 10.22

Chapter 2 – Tractor identification ............................................... LXXI

Chapter 3 - Use ................................................................................. 1

Sezione 0.pmd 5 20/12/2004, 10.22

Sezione 0.pmd 6 20/12/2004, 10.22

Sezione 0.pmd 7 20/12/2004, 10.22

Sezione 0.pmd 8 20/12/2004, 10.22

Sezione 0.pmd 9 20/12/2004, 10.22

Chapter 4 - Wheels ....................................................................... 139

Sezione 0.pmd 10 20/12/2004, 10.22

Chapter 5 - Service and maintenance ........................................ 169

Sezione 0.pmd 11 20/12/2004, 10.22

Sezione 0.pmd 12 20/12/2004, 10.22

Chapter 6 - Electrical system ....................................................... 219

Chapter 7 - Storage of the tractor .............................................. 235

Sezione 0.pmd 13 20/12/2004, 10.22

Chapter 9 - Fault diagnosis ......................................................... 251

Index ................................................................................................ 261

Sezione 0.pmd 14 20/12/2004, 10.22

The relevant accident prevention regulations as well as the other generally

The SAME DEUTZ-FAHR design engineers have placed special emphasis on

SAME DEUTZ-FAHR furnishes you with all necessary information.

Your SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

Sezione 0.pmd 15 20/12/2004, 10.22

are in conformity with the EU-regulation 75/322/EWG, 2001/3/EWG and 95/54/EEC

Sezione 0.pmd 17 20/12/2004, 10.22

Pre-delivery operations to be done in the workshop

Delivering the tractor to the customer

Sezione 0.pmd 18 20/12/2004, 16.53

Sezione 0.pmd 19 20/12/2004, 16.53

CE - This symbol certifies that

Sezione 0.pmd 20 20/12/2004, 16.53

EMV supplement sheet

Safety information regarding the subsequent installation of electrical

The machine is equipped with electronic components and parts whose

In case of the subsequent installation of electrical and electronical

This applies in particular to:

In particular, ensure that the subsequently installed electrical and

For the subsequent installation of mobile communication systems (e.g. CB-